As T2t3ewrs

Central Market
Redevelopment
Architetural Specification
T2 and T3 External Wall
and Rooflight Systems
Tender
27 July 2007
CENTRAL MARKET DEVELOPMENT
ABU DHABI
ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATION _ T2-T3 External

Wall and Rooflight Systems
Tender Issue
Date: 27th July 2007
Foster + Partners
Riverside Three
22 Hester Road
London SW11 4AN
Tel: 020 7738 0455

Fax: 020 7738 1107/08
Central Market Development, Abu Dhabi
CONTENTS
A GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ..............................................................................4
A.1000 FORMAT, DEFINITIONS AND USE OF THE SPECIFICATION................................ 4

A.1001 Specification Format......................................................................................................................................................................4
A.1002 Work Section Categories ............................................................................................................................................................4
A.1003 Supplemental Information ............................................................................................................................................................4
A.1004 Definitions.........................................................................................................................................................................................5
A.1005 Copyright, Patent Rights, etc ......................................................................................................................................................6
A.1006 Disclosure.........................................................................................................................................................................................6
A.2000 DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT............................................................................... 6

A.2001 Project Description ........................................................................................................................................................................6
A.3000 DETAILS OF CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES................................................ 6

A.3100 Descriptive Elements of the Works ...................................................................................................... 6
A.3101 General Requirements ..................................................................................................................................................................6
A.3102 Contractor Responsibility.............................................................................................................................................................6
A.3103 Contractor’s Proposals.................................................................................................................................................................7
A.3104 The Detailed Design ......................................................................................................................................................................8
A.3105 Supply of Additional Supplemental Information .....................................................................................................................8
A.3106 Material Preferences......................................................................................................................................................................9
A.3107 Detailed Design, Manufacturing and Installation Tolerances ..............................................................................................9
A.3108 Substitution at the Time of Tender.............................................................................................................................................9
A.4000 SUBMITTALS .................................................................................................................10

A.4001 Procedure...................................................................................................................................................................................... 10
A.4002 Tender Submittals ....................................................................................................................................................................... 10
A.4003 Post Contract Submittals.......................................................................................................................................................... 10
A.4004 Samples Generally...................................................................................................................................................................... 11
A.4005 Pre-contract Samples ................................................................................................................................................................ 11
A.4006 Post Contract Samples ............................................................................................................................................................. 11
A.4007 Mock-ups....................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
A.4008 Prototypes ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
A.4009 Quality Benchmarks.................................................................................................................................................................... 11
A.4010 Shop Drawings ............................................................................................................................................................................ 12
A.4011 As-built Drawings and Manuals............................................................................................................................................... 13
A.4012 Other Submittals ......................................................................................................................................................................... 13
A.4013 Review of Submittals.................................................................................................................................................................. 14
A.5000 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS AND DATA.......................................................14

A.5100 General ................................................................................................................................................... 14
A.5101 Performance Requirements ...................................................................................................................................................... 14
A.5200 Design and Service Life ....................................................................................................................... 14
A.5201 Design Life of Building............................................................................................................................................................... 14
A.5202 Service Life of Components ..................................................................................................................................................... 14
A.5300 Structural ................................................................................................................................................ 15
A.5301 Movements and Tolerances...................................................................................................................................................... 15
A.5302 Dead Loads................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
A.5303 Live Loads ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
A.5304 Deflections .................................................................................................................................................................................... 16
A.5305 Wind Loads................................................................................................................................................................................... 16
A.5306 Preceding Work........................................................................................................................................................................... 16
A.5307 Vibration......................................................................................................................................................................................... 16
A.5308 Acoustic Requirement Values of Curtain Walling .............................................................................................................. 16
A.5400 Environmental Conditions ......................................................................................................................................................... 17
A.5401 Generally........................................................................................................................................................................................ 17
A.5402 Psychrometric Data..................................................................................................................................................................... 17
A.5500 Fire and Smoke Stops .......................................................................................................................... 17
A.5501 General Requirements ............................................................................................................................................................... 17
A.5502 Fire Protection.............................................................................................................................................................................. 18
A.5600 Corrosion Protection ............................................................................................................................ 18
A.5601 General .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 18
A.5602 Galvanising Corrosion Protection ........................................................................................................................................... 18
A.5603 Electrolytic Protection ................................................................................................................................................................ 18
A.5700 Earth Bonding ........................................................................................................................................ 18
A.5701 General .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 18
Architectural Specification – T2-T3 External A/2 Foster + Partners

Wall and rooflight system. General Requirements
Tender Issue 27/07/07
A.6000 QUALITY CONTROL.....................................................................................................19

A.6100 General Quality Assurance, Quality Control, Testing...................................................................... 19
A.6101 General .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 19
A.6102 Testing and Inspection............................................................................................................................................................... 20
A.6200 Statutory Regulations ........................................................................................................................... 20
A.6201 Standards ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 20
A.6202 Building Codes and Regulations ............................................................................................................................................ 21
A.6203 Submissions to Authorities ....................................................................................................................................................... 21
A.6204 Design Regulations..................................................................................................................................................................... 21
A.6300 Safety and Protection ........................................................................................................................... 21
A.6301 Health and Safety Requirements............................................................................................................................................. 21
A.6302 Damage Anticipation .................................................................................................................................................................. 21
A.6303 Protective Devices ...................................................................................................................................................................... 21
A.6304 Protective Measures ................................................................................................................................................................... 21
A.6305 Packing and Crating ................................................................................................................................................................... 22
A.6306 Protection of Glazed Elements ................................................................................................................................................ 22
A.6307 Vermin and Insects...................................................................................................................................................................... 22
A.6400 Maintenance, Training and Replacement Materials ......................................................................... 22
A.6401 General .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 22
A.6402 Maintenance Manual................................................................................................................................................................... 22
A.6403 Training of User’s Personnel .................................................................................................................................................... 23
A.6404 Replacement Materials .............................................................................................................................................................. 23
A.6405 Relationship with Health and Safety File............................................................................................................................... 23
A.6500 General Materials and Workmanship Requirements ....................................................................... 23
A.6510 Materials ................................................................................................................................................. 23
A.6511 Standard of Materials and Quality........................................................................................................................................... 23
A.6512 Health Hazards............................................................................................................................................................................. 24
A.6513 Deleterious Materials.................................................................................................................................................................. 24
A.6514 Sustainable Sources of Timber ............................................................................................................................................... 25
A.6550 Workmanship ......................................................................................................................................... 25
A.6551 Skilled Personnel......................................................................................................................................................................... 25
A.6552 Suitability of Structure................................................................................................................................................................ 26
A.6553 Setting Out.................................................................................................................................................................................... 26
A.6554 Project Tolerances Definitions ................................................................................................................................................. 26
A.6555 Compatibility................................................................................................................................................................................. 26
A.6556 Manufacturer’s Instructions....................................................................................................................................................... 26
A.6557 Suppliers........................................................................................................................................................................................ 26
A.6558 Covering Up.................................................................................................................................................................................. 27
A.6559 Cutting, etc. .................................................................................................................................................................................. 27
A.6560 Deterioration ................................................................................................................................................................................. 27
A.6561 Line and Level............................................................................................................................................................................... 27
A.6562 Method Statements .................................................................................................................................................................... 27

A GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.1000 FORMAT, DEFINITIONS AND USE OF THE SPECIFICATION
[NOTE: The A Section includes requirements for the final full Specification].
A.1001 Specification Format

a) The Specification comprises Sections A to Z and follows the Uniclass (Common Arrangement)
classification system.
b) Sections A and Z provide general requirements applicable to Sections E to X. Sections E to X
detail particular requirements specific to individual trades or elements of the works.
c) The work sections listed herein form part of the Specification with design responsibility and
specification type indicated for each.
d) The types of Specification are as follows:
i) Descriptive (D): The section, when read with the Design Drawings, indicates the visual
intent with which the Contractor must comply when undertaking the Detailed Design. The
Contractor retains full responsibility for completing the Detailed Design and execution of
the works and for meeting the specified performance criteria.
ii) General Requirements (M) The A section of the Specification is drafted to include
requirements for (D) works to be carried out by the Contractor, outlining the design and
performance responsibilities that are applicable to each situation.
e) No requirement of the Specification shall impose a lesser standard of material or workmanship
than defined in Sections A and Z.
f) The Specification shall be read in conjunction with the Conditions of Contract, Instructions to
Tenderers and other relevant documents.
g) Performance criteria where specified shall be considered as minimum standards with which the
Contractor’s proposals shall comply.
h) Sections A to Z shall constitute a single document.
i) Unless stated otherwise, all requirements of this document (and any related document) refer to
work to be provided by, and obligations of, the Contractor and therefore all clauses are
addressed to, and refer to, the Contractor.
A.1002 Work Section Categories

A General Requirements (M)
E50 Precast Concrete Mullions/Framing (D)
G10 Primary/Secondary Structural Steel primary (architectural Requirements) (D)
H11 Roof and Wall Systems (D)
H31 Metal Profiled SheetCladding/Covering/Siding (D)
H42 Precast Concrete Cladding (D)
L10 Louvres and Louvred Doors (D)
Z11 Metalwork
Z20 Fixings/ Adhesives
Z22 Sealants
Z25 Glass and Coatings
Z30 Metalwork Finishes
Z31 Powder Coatings
Z32 PVDF Coatings
Z33 Anodising
Z36 Gaskets
A.1003 Supplemental Information

a) Refer to the requirements of the following drawings, reports and supplemental information as
relevant:
i) Planning permission and conditions.
ii) Project Common Tolerance and Movement Document.
iii) Wind Loading Report/Wind Tunnel Test Report.
iv) Acoustic Report.
v) Fire Strategy Report.
vi) Façade Access and Maintenance Report.
vii) Design Drawings.
viii) Structural/Services Engineer’s Drawings.
b) The Design Drawings include a ‘Technical Reference Sheet’ (TRS), which is a directory of
references for elements and systems. This directory shall be used to correlate the Design
Drawings with the Specification. The TRS provides a link between the Specification and the
Design Drawings.
A.1004 Definitions
The following definitions apply to the Specification:
a) "Specification": This document, comprising Sections A - Z inclusive.
b) "Contractor’s Proposals": Drawings, detailed technical specifications, method statements,
calculations and any other relevant information prepared by the Contractor and submitted with
the Tender response, maintaining the design and visual intent, functional, performance criteria
and technical requirements as stated in the Tender documents.
c) "Design": The visual intent prepared by the CA for Tender purposes, represented by the Design
Drawings and Specification.
d) "Detailed Design": That prepared either by the Contractor (for Descriptive works) represented
by the Shop Drawings and Contractor’s specifications or by the CA (for
Prescriptive works) showing the full design.
e) "Design Drawings":
i) For Descriptive works: Drawings issued by the CA, representing the Design for Tender
purposes showing the visual and design intent, scope, layout, principal dimensions,
arrangement of services and structure, technical, function, visual and aesthetic
requirements and where the Detailed Design is carried out by the Contractor.
ii) For Prescriptive works: Drawings issued by the CA, representing the Design for Tender
purposes showing the Detailed Design, scope, layout, principal dimensions, arrangement
of services and structure, technical, function, visual and aesthetic requirements where the
Detailed Design is carried out by the CA.
f) "Shop Drawings": Drawings representing the Detailed Design, prepared by the Contractor (or
his specialist sub-contractor) based upon the Design Drawings, showing plans, elevations,
sections and full size details of fabrication, assembly, installation and fixings of the works,
submitted to the CA for examination prior to manufacture, showing all necessary information
required to fabricate, manufacture and install/construct all elements of the works, maintaining
the design intent.
g) "As-built Drawings": Drawings produced by the Contractor, where required, which show the
works as finally constructed as represented by the Shop Drawings unless otherwise agreed.
h) "Contract Drawings": The drawings listed in the Contract, comprising Design Drawings and
Contractor’s Tender response Drawings agreed with the CA with which all Shop Drawings shall
comply.
i) "Evaluation": Reviews carried out by the CA and Contractor between Tender return and
Contract award to agree materials, typical details and critical interfaces to establish
specifications and drawings for Contract purposes.
j) "Inspection": Inspection carried out by the CA of materials, components, equipment and
installation of the works. Such inspection shall be limited to an inspection of the visual
appearance only and not to the selection of materials or the Detailed Design or construction of

components and equipment, which shall remain the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Such
inspections by the CA shall not relieve the Contractor from compliance with the Contract
Documents.
k) "A(a)ccepted, A(a)cceptance or A(a)cceptable": Materials, components, equipment and
installations accepted by the CA shall be based upon Inspections (as defined above).
l) "Contractor’s Supplemental Information": Documentation produced after Contract award, by the
Contractor, demonstrating that the Detailed Design complies with the Contract Documents.
m) "Inspecting Authority": Competent independent body or association, which verifies compliance
with the Specification.
n) “Testing Authority”: Competent accredited independent testing body or association, which
provides appropriate testing equipment, testing environment and independent testing results
which will be used to verify conformance with the CA. The Testing Authority shall be subject to
acceptance by the CA.
o) "works": The scope of work covered by the Specification.
p) "Detailed Design Programme": Submitted by the Contractor, prior to Contract award, showing
the Detailed Design drawing submission dates, sample submissions, prototyping and testing
activities prior to manufacture.
A.1005 Copyright, Patent Rights, etc

The copyright in any designs or installation details developed for this project under the CA's direction
shall be vested in the CA and may not be reproduced elsewhere without the CA's written permission.
This will not apply to standard products and designs already in existence before the date of tender.
A.1006 Disclosure
The nature of the design and construction work performed and any information belonging to the CA,
with which the Contractor may become familiar, will be treated as confidential and may not be
disclosed without the written consent of the CA. Do not publish any drawings, sketches or
photographs of the works or building or its construction without the prior written consent of the CA.
A.2000 DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT

A.2001 Project Description
Tower 2 (Residential) and Tower 3 (Office).
A.3000 DETAILS OF CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES

A.3100 Descriptive Elements of the Works
A.3101 General Requirements

Take responsibility for the Contractor Design works within the list of Work Section Categories listed
in clause A.1002.
A.3102 Contractor Responsibility

a) Undertake the Detailed Design maintaining the function, visual requirements, performance and
intent of the Design.
b) Provide detailed proposals, demonstrating compliance with the visual intent and confirm the
provision of fully warranted systems in accordance with the Contract conditions.
c) The Contractor’s proposals shall include drawings, calculations, methods and technical
specifications detailing the proposed materials and systems in order that a technical appraisal
can be made by the CA.
d) A Tender based on the Contractor’s own preferred design solution may be offered for
acceptance by the CA provided the performance and visual requirements are fully satisfied. Any
alternative solutions shall not alter the performance requirements, appearance or visual intent of
the Design Drawings and the Specification.
e) The Specification and Design Drawings may be modified and amended prior to Contract award
to reflect the agreed final scope of the works, materials and systems selected to reflect the
design intent. The Detailed Design shall reflect the Contract Specification and Drawings.

f) The design and visual character of the project is important and shall be maintained. Hence,
there shall be no variation in the final surface finish of similar materials, which shall remain
visually consistent, including colour and texture, regardless of orientation or natural grain within
agreed tolerances and agreed samples.
g) Provide submittals outlined within A.4000 and 1300 of each particular work section.
h) Provide Shop Drawings and technical information to demonstrate compliance with the Design
Drawings and Specification and to complete the detailing as necessary and comply with the
approvals process specified. The Contractor’s final Detailed Design shall be based on the
Design Drawings which indicate generic solutions and may not cover all conditions.
i) Where proprietary products are to be installed, be responsible for providing any modification,
additional bracing, reinforcing, suitable fixings, etc. to ensure that the products meet the
requirements of the Specification for the circumstances and situation in which they shall be
expected to perform. Be responsible for conveying any concerns that the manufacturers may
have expressed regarding the suitability of products for the purpose intended.
j) No portion of the works shall commence without acceptance of the required submittals by the
CA.
k) Comply with all relevant National Health and Safety requirements including the production and
submission of system Risk Assessment analysis reports.
l) Be responsible for ensuring that items specified are installed correctly such that the
performance requirements specified are fully satisfied for the service life required. All fixings and
other aspects not fully detailed or specified shall be regarded as the Contractor’s responsibility.
m) Be responsible for the final selection of products and associated components, which shall be
used solely for the purpose intended by the manufacturer; which shall satisfy the requirements
of the Specification.
n) Be responsible for the carrying out of all testing as specified.
o) Co-ordinate with the work of others including all interfacing as required.
p) Provide warranties as required.
q) Submit relevant documents to Building Control as required to comply with the Particular
Requirements sections.
r) Comply with the requirements of Planning Approval.
s) Submit relevant documents to the Local Planning Authority.
t) Set out the works and accurately co-ordinate all related works.
u) Provide details, calculations and any other relevant information to the CA for submission to and
approval by the local authorities. Make any adjustments required by the local authorities,
following submissions, to the satisfaction of the CA.
v) In addition to submissions for the Local Authority, be responsible for submitting structural,
deflection and other calculations and technical information, where required (as requested in the
Specification) for review by the CA. Such submissions shall demonstrate compliance with the
Specification.
A.3103 Contractor’s Proposals

a) The Contractor’s Proposals will be reviewed during the Evaluation period by the CA. Attend
evaluation meetings as required and make adjustments and alterations to the Contractor’s
Proposals to agree the major design principles to the satisfaction of the CA prior to the
possible Contract award.
b) Provide the CA with access to the design office and personnel during the Design Evaluation
period.
c) The Contractor’s Proposals as a minimum shall include:
i) Full details of systems, materials and suppliers.
ii) Pre-contract proposals.
iii) Details of any 'Specialist' involvement.
iv) Details of Working Drawing programme.

v) Samples of proposed materials as required and as listed in the relevant work sections.
vi) Full details of systems, materials and suppliers where different from those specified.
vii) Drawings as listed herein or as deemed necessary to explain the Contractor’s Proposals.
viii) Comprehensive technical specifications of the Contractor’s Proposals.
ix) Relevant supplementary information.
x) Drawings as required by the Particular Requirement Sections or as deemed necessary to
explain the Contractor’s Proposals.
xi) Technical statements confirming performance compliance.
xii) Details of guarantees and warranties including details of predicted service lives for
primary and secondary components.
xiii) Summary of deviations from the Design Drawings and Specification.
xiv) Commissioning information as relevant.
A.3104 The Detailed Design

a) Comply with all relevant Codes of Practice, Standards, Fire Regulations, Local Building
Regulations and local Building Codes, Safety Regulations and any other regulations applicable
to the installation, together with all relevant Statutory Rules, Regulations, Bye-laws and other
enforceable instruments applicable to both the design and execution of the works.
b) Prepare a programme for the Detailed Design showing all tasks and submissions and submit for
acceptance by the CA.
c) Produce Shop Drawings to represent the Detailed Design, supported by calculations for review
by the CA.
d) Submit, to the CA, the required number of copies of all design/production information.
e) The Shop Drawings shall finalise all manufacturing, interface and installation details.
f) Ensure that any necessary amendments are made in a timely manner, unless and until the CA
confirms that resubmission is not required, submit copies of amended drawings, etc., and
ensure incorporation of necessary amendments.
g) The Specification shall not be altered without the CA’s prior written consent.
h) Select suitable materials, sizes, thicknesses, types and locations of fixings and sealants, all in
accordance with specified standards and ensure that they are used for the purpose intended by
the manufacturer.
i) Any necessary support structure shall incorporate all movements and tolerances to which it is
subjected.
j) Include descriptions of relevant structural performance principles of the works, including how
and where loads are transmitted to the primary structure and the accommodation of tolerances.
k) Show details of all fixing requirements to interfacing elements of the works, which shall be
agreed with the CA prior to commencement of the installation.
l) Co-ordinate all interfaces.
m) The CA’s review of Shop Drawings shall relate to visual performance and functional matters
only.
n) Be responsible for compiling the Shop Drawings and technical specifications of any chosen
sub-contractors to ensure that all the contractual obligations are met to the satisfaction of the
CA.
A.3105 Supply of Additional Supplemental Information

a) Provide such additional supplemental information in respect of design, materials, systems,
methods, installation and procedures as required by the CA after Contract award.
b) Additional supplemental information shall comply fully with the design intent, functional and
performance requirements of the Design.
c) Where alternative sub-contractors/suppliers/products are proposed, they shall not be utilised
until written acceptance is received from the CA.

d) Submit all relevant information sufficient to demonstrate compliance with the Specification to
the Relevant Authorities.
A.3106 Material Preferences

a) Where the Specification identifies preferred materials, these shall be confirmed as being
suitable for their specified and intended purpose with the Tender return. If no such specific
confirmation is received, then the submission of the Tender return itself shall constitute such a
confirmation. If the preferred materials are considered unsuitable, advise at the time of Tender.
b) Acceptance of alternative proposals by the CA shall not relieve the Contractor from
responsibility to provide suitable materials, components and assemblies, which shall be used as
intended by the manufacturer and in compliance with the Contract Documents.
c) If, with his Tender, the Contractor submits no such alternative proposal to any of the
preferences indicated in the Tender Documents then the solutions proposed in the
Specification and on the Design Drawings shall be deemed to be acceptable and be warranted
by him.
A.3107 Detailed Design, Manufacturing and Installation Tolerances

a) The Specification together with the corresponding Design Drawings indicate the dimensional
tolerances (hereafter referred to as “tolerances”) to which the Contractor shall work (where
relevant) for the Detailed Design, manufacture, sub-assembly, setting out and installation of the
works.
b) The Shop Drawings shall clearly demonstrate how manufacturing and construction tolerances
are to be accommodated.
c) Take account of various specified tolerances and their effect on the works. Inform the CA of any
apparent tolerance omissions, inconsistencies or incompatibilities.
d) Maintain the tolerances as defined and demonstrate, upon request by the CA, the means by
which specified tolerances shall be assured and, where appropriate, which specialist equipment
and/or methods shall be used.
e) All dimensions shall be checked on Site, confirming all dimensions critical to the works. Site
measurements shall be undertaken in sufficient time to enable corrective action to be taken to
the works, or the work of others, to ensure an accurate fit within agreed or implied tolerances.
f) Refer to and take account of the Structural Engineer’s Movements and Tolerances information.
g) Confirm common reference points and agree with the CA. Carry out dimensional checks prior
to the commencement of manufacture as necessary.
h) Ensure that any dimensions are compatible and consistent with other relevant design
dimensions and accumulated tolerances and movements. State and/or show, on the Shop
Drawings, the provisions made which are intended to accommodate the accumulated
tolerances of adjoining or adjacent trades.
i) Inform the CA of any work that does not meet the specified tolerances.
j) The works shall be free from deformation outside of specified tolerances and shall not be
subject to warping, twisting and/or perishing but remain stable, firm, free from vibrations,
knocking, rattles and/or whistles, squeaks or other such noises, taking into account known or
specified conditions.
k) Details shall be provided for acceptance by the CA of the Contractor’s proposed methods for
achieving and constantly monitoring the fabrication and erection tolerances during all stages of
the works. Detailed records of the constant control and tolerance achieved shall be submitted
to the CA.
l) In the event of there being any discrepancy in the values of existing datum reference points,
datum levels, buildings, foundations or other features to which the works are related, determine
and report such a discrepancy to the CA and obtain written instructions before proceeding.
m) The permissible tolerances stated in the Specification shall be progressively checked up to
handover. Where two or more different tolerances can be derived by calculation and/or from the
Design Drawings for the same dimension, the least tolerance shall apply which shall be
confirmed by the Contractor to the CA. Tolerances shall not be cumulative.
A.3108 Substitution at the Time of Tender

a) Should the Contractor, after consideration of all the criteria which in his specialist knowledge

are relevant to the design and construction of the works, wish to make proposals for changes in
any details, dimensions or materials shown in the Design Drawings or referred to in the
Specification, then such proposals shall be provided as separate alternative options and
returned with the Tender. In no way shall any proposal fail to meet the minimum performance
requirements herein specified.
b) A request for a substitution shall be deemed to be a warranty by the Contractor to the client
that such substitutions meet the requirements of the Specification and as such must be
confirmed in writing as equal by the Contractor and accepted in writing by the CA. Admissibility
of any request for substitution after Tender shall be at the sole discretion of the CA and may be
rejected without reason given.
c) In the case that any substitution alters the specified requirements, submit sufficient information
on substituted materials to allow evaluation by the CA on any deviations from the Specification.
A.4000 SUBMITTALS
A.4001 Procedure
a) No portion of the works shall commence without acceptance of the required submittals by the
CA.
b) A schedule of submittals shall be provided for agreement with the CA. Schedule to indicate the
dates on which the CA shall receive the required submittals. The schedule shall be correlated
with the master programme and allow a reasonable amount of time for the review of each
submittal. Critical decision dates shall be indicated for selection of finishes and colours. The
schedule of submittals shall be revised and resubmitted as necessary.
c) Provide submittals in accordance with the following:
i) Addressing of Submittals: Submittals shall be delivered to the premises identified by the
CA.
ii) Identification of Submittals: Each submittal shall be individually identified with the project
name, respective specification reference, supplier's/manufacturer's name and product
reference as appropriate. Each submittal shall be accompanied by a transmittal form
containing similar information; together with the purpose for which the submittal is being
made. Space shall be provided on each item submitted for stamping by the CA.
iii) Numbering of Submittals: Submittals shall be numbered consecutively and that
numbering system shall be retained throughout all revisions and resubmittals.
iv) Completeness of Submittals: All relevant information shall be included within each
submittal to define completely and explain each separate system of work. Submittals may
be combined from various sections as necessary and furnished at one time as a single
submission.
v) Variations and Substitutions: Submittals that differ from the requirements of the Design
Drawings and Specification shall be so identified.
d) Submission and Return of Shop Drawings/Documents:
i) Allow for the required period between the first submission of a Drawing/document and
receipt of comments. Allow for resubmissions for each item to achieve a Category A or B
Status.
ii) Provide a list of Shop Drawings proposed.
iii) Information specifically requested for each element of the works shall be provided.
Additional information may be required by the CA on inspection of the Contractor’s
submittals to allow for accurate comments to be made.
e) The Contractor’s submittals shall be reviewed by the CA during the evaluation period, and any
alteration and/or agreements reached shall be incorporated into the Contract Drawings and
Contract Specification.
A.4002 Tender Submittals

Where called for in the Specification, provide submittals at the time of Tender as listed in the
Specification.
A.4003 Post Contract Submittals

After Contract award provide Shop Drawings, samples, mock-ups, prototypes, quality benchmarks,
calculations, test reports and other relevant data.
A.4004 Samples Generally

a) Samples shall include various products, natural materials, fabricated items, equipment, devices,
appliances or components thereof, as may be required to satisfy the visual appearance and
technical requirements of the Design.
b) Samples shall be reviewed for their visual characteristics only and where moving or operating
elements are involved, the CA shall be given the opportunity to review working samples.
c) Ranges of samples shall be provided where a considerable range of colour, graining, texture,
smoothness and other characteristics may be anticipated in the works.
d) Where custom colours are specified, samples shall be submitted illustrating precise colours,
textures, patterns and finishes for review by the CA.
A.4005 Pre-contract Samples

a) Samples provided with the Tender or during the evaluation period prior to Contract award.
b) Samples shall be as listed in the Particular Requirement Sections which are required to verify
the visual appearance of such items for compliance with the requirements of the Design
Drawings and Specification.
c) Pre-contract samples shall be labelled and kept by the CA as a record of materials agreed for
Contract until completion/handover.
A.4006 Post Contract Samples

a) Samples provided shall be checked against the Pre-contract samples and the Specification to
ensure that quality and type have been maintained.
b) At the appropriate time provide the CA with samples listed in Particular Requirement Sections,
which shall be kept as a record of materials to be incorporated in the works and used as
references for controlling consistency throughout the works.
c) Post contract Samples shall comprise materials in their final form.
A.4007 Mock-ups
a) During the Shop Drawings preparation phase (in due time to permit adjustments to the design)
and where described in the particular Works Sections, the Contractor shall provide full size
mock-ups for inspection by the CA.
b) Mock-ups shall be erected either on or off Site, not necessarily using actual materials to be
incorporated in the works but representing the design solutions.
c) The mock-up shall be constructed to confirm the general visual intent including colour, size and
co-ordination.
A.4008 Prototypes
a) Prior to manufacture of elements of the works, construct off Site (or on Site if specifically
requested by the CA) full scale three-dimensional sections where described in the particular
Works Sections and/or shown on the Design Drawings utilising final specified materials but not
necessarily final production techniques.
b) The prototypes shall be tested fully to ensure that the systems meet the performance
requirements of the Specification and/or be used as a Quality Assurance/Quality Control “Hold
Point”. Manufacture of materials/products for inclusion in the works shall not commence until
the CA’s written acceptance of the prototypes has been received.
c) Shop Drawings for the prototypes shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of
the Specification.
d) Any modifications required to the prototypes shall be recorded to show their final construction.
e) Programme tests to enable any necessary adjustments without delay to the works programme.
A.4009 Quality Benchmarks

a) Upon commencement of installation, erect complete sections of elements of the works, where
described in the particular Works Sections, for acceptance of the CA. These shall be used as a
quality benchmark for the remainder of the works until Practical Completion.

b) Installations shall not commence in other areas of that particular trade until the CA has
examined and accepted the quality benchmark. Carry out immediately any alterations or
adjustments required by the CA in order to achieve the quality of installation required.
c) Upon receipt of the CA’s acceptance, fully protect the quality benchmark. It shall be used, from
time to time, by the CA to check and monitor quality of materials and workmanship incorporated
in the remaining areas of the works, or where specifically stated for the purpose of further
testing. Remove and replace all protection when requested by the CA for such purposes.
A.4010 Shop Drawings

a) Following Contract award, the required number of Shop Drawings, and where specifically
requested in writing, relevant structural, thermal and acoustic calculations and other data, shall
be submitted to the CA for review in accordance with the Conditions of Contract.
b) The CA will review the Shop Drawings for compliance with the Specification and the Design
Drawings in visual, performance and overall functional matters only. The Detailed Design and
construction of components shall remain the responsibility of the Contractor.
c) The CA’s review of the Shop Drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for
errors, or for supplying components and materials to the full satisfaction of the CA.
d) The Shop Drawings shall be fully dimensioned in metric, to an agreed scale appropriate to the
detail, and include:
i) Full size details and graphic representation describing materials, components and
equipment, construction, finishes, provision for movements, fabrication and erection
tolerances.
ii) Layouts, locations and assemblies of all types of construction detail and junctions, details
of materials, method of jointing, details of all Site connections and fixing and sealing
methods, finishes and all pertinent information related to:
• Method of fabrication and construction.
• Proper relation to adjoining work.
• Finishes.
• Amplification of details.
• Minor changes to the Design to suit actual conditions.
e) Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with the Conditions of Contract and do not commence
fabrication of components until formally returned by the CA with either "A" or “B” stamped on
each of the Shop Drawings. Ensure that space is left clear on each of the Shop Drawings for
stamping by the CA. The following drawing inspection codes shall be used when returning the
Shop Drawings to the Contractor:
i) Drawing stamped “Category A” - Fabrication, manufacture or construction may proceed
in accordance with the drawing submitted.
ii) Drawing stamped “Category B” - Fabrication, manufacture or construction may proceed
in accordance with the drawings submitted subject to the Contractor taking necessary
action based on the CA’s comments and all annotations added to the returned drawings.
Unless indicated to the contrary on such drawings, the work shall comply with the
Contract Documents. To achieve “Category A” status, the required number of copies of
amended drawings shall be sent to the CA.
iii) Drawings stamped “Category C” - No work shall be fabricated, manufactured or
constructed. Submit new drawings to the CA for review until re-submission is not
required.
f) The CA’s final comment on the Shop Drawings (Category A) shall be conditional upon receipt
of all documentation, certification, acceptances in respect of anchorages, fire stop assemblies,
samples, mock-ups and test reports, etc. as defined in the Specification.
g) The receipt of Shop Drawings by the Contractor from the CA marked A or B shall not constitute
agreement of a variation.
h) When preparing the Shop Drawings consult the current Architectural, Structural and Services
Design Drawings, adjusting the Shop Drawings to allow for any changes to Site tolerances
and/or discrepancies where applicable.

i) If, before commencing or during the preparation of the Shop Drawings the design intent of the
Design Drawings and/or Specification may be affected, or where other elements of the works
may be affected, notify the CA immediately.
j) Where applicable, the Shop Drawings may utilise the manufacturer’s standard details provided
that they comply with the design intent.
k) The CA shall have the right at all reasonable times to visit the Contractor’s (or his specialist
sub-contractors) design office to check on progress.
l) The Shop Drawings shall be annotated in English and titled in the manner determined for the
Contract, with the title block fully indicating the part of the works to which they apply.
m) Information contained in any of the Design Drawings shall be treated as confidential and shall
not be utilised for any purpose other than for the works. Such information shall not be
communicated to third parties for other purposes without the specific acceptance of the CA.
n) Maintain on Site a full set of Design Drawings, Shop Drawings and technical specifications.
o) Upon completion of the design, manufacture and installation phases, provide the CA with the
appropriate number of As-built Drawings, in accordance with the Conditions of Contract.
p) No Shop Drawings shall be accepted if produced to a reduced size.
q) The Shop Drawings shall be fully co-ordinated with interfacing trades.
A.4011 As-built Drawings and Manuals

a) Upon completion of the works and when deemed necessary by the CA, provide As-built
Drawings in a computer format, agreed with the CA, showing the works as finally fabricated and
erected in accordance with the Category “A” status Shop Drawings.
b) The As-built Drawings referred to above shall include any Site variances or installation
adjustments or variations and any actual Site or setting-out dimensional modifications as
installed.
c) As-built Drawings shall be produced to a relevant and agreed scale and shall be used to
complement the Maintenance Manual for the specific purpose of locating the elements within
the overall structure.
A.4012 Other Submittals

a) Product Data: Provide technical information detailing the characteristics of each system, system
component or material incorporated in the works. This shall include material schedules and
manufacturer’s literature.
b) Certifications: Provide independently certified reports verifying compliance of each element or
component with the requirements of the Design Drawings and Specification. These reports
shall include the chemical and physical properties of various building materials.
c) QA/QC Programme: Provide a programme to satisfy the requirements of A.6000 of the
Specification, the Contract conditions or any other documents referred to in the Contract
Documentation.
d) Pre-construction Testing Reports:
i) Provide technical reports recording test results systems, components and materials as
required by the Design Drawings, the Specification, the CA or a testing laboratory, prior
to commencement of installation.
ii) These reports shall state compliance with the technical requirements of the Specification
and include, where appropriate, test certificates.
e) Maintenance/Operation Manuals: Manuals prepared by the Contractor for the Client/building
user’s maintenance and operation of the various building systems and/or components thereof.
f) Supplementary Product Literature: Such literature may include manufacturer’s catalogue
information, product specifications, standard illustrations, diagrams and standard details. The
supplementary product literature shall describe physical characteristics such as size, weight,
finish, material analysis, electrical requirements and other information such as load tables, test
results, assessments and industry quality standards.
g) Technical Calculations: These shall consist of technical engineering calculations which
document technical performance of various systems, system components and/or materials, as
required by the Design Drawings and Specification.

h) Guarantees and warranties: Provide certified copies of all relevant guarantees and warranties
available for installed materials and products.
i) All submittals provided shall be written in the English language.
A.4013 Review of Submittals

a) The CA shall review submittals for general and practical conformance with the requirements of
the Design. Submittals which meet these requirements shall be stamped or marked in
accordance with the procedure described herein. Submittals which are incomplete or
erroneous, or which are not required, will be returned and a new submittal made as necessary.
The CA’s review shall not be exhaustive and shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility
for any omission or deficiencies or from the responsibility to co-ordinate the work with that of
others (which includes the taking of relevant Site dimensions as necessary).
b) Submittals which provide supplementary information to substantiate the technical performance
of building systems, components and materials including, but not necessarily limited to,
supplementary product literature, certifications, statements of manufacturer’s review and pre-
construction testing and inspection reports, will be stamped ‘Record Document’ by the
Contractor before submission.
c) Resubmittals shall be made under the procedure for initial submittals; identifying changes made
since previous submittals.
A.5000 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS AND DATA

This section (A.5000) is applicable only to Descriptive works.
A.5100 General
A.5101 Performance Requirements

a) The works shall comply with the following performance criteria unless there are detailed
performance criteria stated in clause series 1400 of the Particular Work Sections. Refer also to
the Structural and Services Engineers’ Documentation for specific performance requirements
where applicable.
b) The performance criteria included in the Specification sets the minimum standards with which
the Detailed Design solutions shall comply, and the means by which compliance shall be
checked and controlled prior to completion.
c) Although the Design Drawings show considerable detail and dimensions, no warranty or
representation is given by the CA as to the accuracy of such dimensions or the adequacy or
buildability of such details. Should the Contractor adopt the details or arrangements indicated
on the Design Drawings it shall be deemed that he has checked their buildability and
performance in terms of this Specification, all relevant Regulations and codes of practice, and
manufacturers' recommendations for any products referred to.
d) Minimum Requirements: Where there is in existence a relevant British Standard, BS code of
practice, draft BS, German DIN Standard, ISO Standard, European Standard or British Board
of Agrément Certificate applicable to the design, execution or performance of the works or any
part thereof, then the recommendations and requirements of such documents shall be
considered a minimum standard for the work described and must be complied with. Should two
standards conflict, draw attention to this and state the option chosen, at Tender stage.
A.5200 Design and Service Life
A.5201 Design Life of Building

The design life of the building shall be as BS ISO 15686: Part 1, Table 1, 60 years and with BS
7543 category 2 maintenance level.
A.5202 Service Life of Components

a) The design life of the building shall be the period stated in A.5201 above; however, it is
recognised that various elements/components have varying 'service life' (i.e. actual period of
time during which no excessive expenditure is required on operation, maintenance or repair of a
component or construction – as recorded in use) for primary and secondary components.
b) Primary components are all components with a predicted service life not less than the design
life of the element being specified without the need for maintenance, other than regular
cleaning.

c) Secondary components are all components with a predicted service life of the element being
specified, assuming regular cleaning and maintenance in accordance with information supplied
by the manufacturer. Secondary components shall be capable of easy replacement without
compromising the structural or weatherproof integrity of the element being specified.
Secondary components shall be capable of replacement without progressive dismantling of
adjacent elements.
d) Confirm the predicted service life (i.e. the service life predicted from recorded performance or
accelerated tests) and maintenance requirements of the components of the building as defined
in BS 7543 and BS ISO 15686 for the review by the CA and provide detailed information at
Tender Stage.
e) Materials shall be used solely for the purpose intended by the manufacturer and which satisfy
the requirements of the Specification.
f) Premature deterioration shall not be acceptable.
A.5300 Structural
Refer to the Structural Specification by others for particular requirements.
A.5301 Movements and Tolerances

a) The Detailed Design, fabrication and installation shall take into account all tolerances and
movements of the building structure. Movements include the application of dead, live and wind
loads plus moisture, shrinkage, creep and thermal effects.
b) The Detailed Design shall take account of all structural movement and tolerances, in permanent
and temporary conditions, to avoid stress, deformation and material failure.
c) Torsional stresses shall be accommodated safely.
d) The works shall withstand all movements of the building structure under all design loads or
combination of loads without damage or any reduction in performance.
e) All fixings shall be capable of providing adequate adjustment to suit building movement and
prevent system/installation failure.
f) Movement joints shall accommodate the maximum movement that can be derived from the
specified and determined design loads and movements. Under maximum movements the joints
shall meet all the performance requirements of the Specification.
g) The works shall resist all specified static and dynamic design loads likely to be encountered
without causing permanent deformation of components or the failure of systems, materials or
seals and shall transmit such loads safely to the points of support.
h) The works shall not deflect under loading in any way that is detrimental to any adjacent trade.
i) The works shall accommodate the following movements without any permanent deformation or
reduction in the specified performance:
i) Deflection under design loads.
ii) The effects of any wind or pressure loadings.
iii) Changes in dimension and shape of components arising from building movements,
including settlement, creep, twisting and racking.
iv) Movement of any joint whether designed to permit movement or not.
v) Thermal and moisture related movements.
A.5302 Dead Loads

a) The works shall be capable of accommodating the following dead loads without any reduction
in performance:
i) The component and final assembly dead load which shall be accommodated locally
without causing deflections or movements which adversely affect any component.
ii) The dead loads derived from any permanent fixtures or services attached to the surfaces
of the works.
b) When calculating loads the worst combination shall be considered.
A.5303 Live Loads

a) The works shall be capable of accommodating the following live loads without any reduction in
performance:
i) All loads resulting from movements of the building structure and support structure.
ii) Impact loads, or transferred impact loads, that occur during the service life of the works,
without deterioration in performance and without sustaining non-repairable damage.
iii) Loads imposed during replacement of components.
b) When calculating loads the worst combination shall be considered.
A.5304 Deflections
a) The works when carrying full design loads shall not exceed the deflection limits specified within
the relevant Particular Work Section.
b) The works shall not deflect under loading in any way that is detrimental to any component or
adjacent structural or building elements.
c) All components, couplings and fixings shall be capable of accommodating deflections without
permanent distortion, deformation or failure.
d) The works shall accommodate differential structural movements arising from any loads imposed
by adjacent structures.
e) The magnitude of the allowable deflections shall be reduced if they are detrimental to any part
of the works, its support structure or internal finishes.
A.5305 Wind Loads
a) The works shall withstand without permanent deformation, the effects of wind loads where
appropriate (e.g. external conditions or internal areas subject to external wind pressure).
b) Design Wind Pressures: Refer to the Wind tunnel test Report.
c) When assessing the wind pressure allowances, account shall be taken of the shape of the
building and its location in relation to the layout of the adjacent structures.
d) Particular attention is to be paid to areas subject to increased pressures as defined by BS
6399: Part 2, i.e. eaves, canopies and external corners. Special care shall also be taken to
identify and design for any situation not clearly defined in BS 6399: Part 2 where it is believed
that the geometry of the building shall cause increased pressure due to vortex or eddy
conditions. Maximum gust wind pressure shall be calculated in accordance with BS 6399: Part
2. Refer to the Wind Tunnel Test Report.
e) When calculating loads it shall be ensured that the worst combination of load cases have been
considered and in particular, that the governing wind pressure coefficients may be determined
by more than one wind regime. Refer to the Wind Tunnel Test Report.
A.5306 Preceding Work

a) At the appropriate time check all preceding work, including checking line, level and fixing points
and report immediately to the CA if any is considered to be unsuitable and propose remedial
action if so requested by the CA.
b) Prior to manufacture of components, where possible, inspect the Site and check measurements
of the preceding works while completing the Shop Drawings and co-ordinate all Site
dimensions.
c) The Shop Drawings shall include full details of all interface conditions, demonstrating full
compatibility with adjoining items of work and that the Detailed Design takes into account all
such conditions.
A.5307 Vibration
Ensure that the works withstand all vibration caused by traffic, aircraft, equipment effects or any other
shocks, slamming, strains, stresses and movement imposed, thus avoiding deterioration or fracture of
any element, both during construction and after installation.
A.5308 Acoustic Requirement Values of Curtain Walling

Table 1. Minimum Sound Reduction Indexes:

Building And Sound Reduction Index (dB)

Façade/Roof
Octave Band Centre Frequency (Hz)
Reference
125 250 500 1K 2K 4K
Tower T2 - Residential 23 27 31 35 33 31
Tower T3 - Office 17 21 25 29 27 26
Table 2. Minimum Horizontal and Vertical Flanking Sound Insulation Rating Values:
Building Reference and Adjacency Weighted
Normalized Flanking
Level Difference
(Dnf,w)
Tower T2 – Residential
Apartment at Apartment 50dB
Amenity Space at Apartment 55dB
Plant Room at Apartment 60dB
Tower T3 – Office
Office Tenant at Office Tenant 45dB
Amenity Space at Office Tenant 50dB
Plant Room at Office Tenant 55dB
A.5400 Environmental Conditions
A.5401 Generally
a) Ensure that the works conform to all aspects of the Specification, taking into account all local
environmental conditions prevailing at Site.
b) Refer to the Particular Requirement Sections for specific performance data.
c) Obtain any additional meteorological and climate data considered necessary in order to fulfil
contractual obligations.
d) Allow for the fact that the works will be erected in all extremes of weather conditions throughout
the year and that the building may not be climatically controlled during construction. Damage to
materials as a result of Site conditions shall be the Contractor’s responsibility.
e) All material grades, manufacturing methods and standards, corrosion protection, etc. shall be
selected so that they are fully suited to the internal and external environmental conditions as set
out below (to meet the relevant British Standards and all other relevant standards) and as
contained in the relevant parts of the Mechanical & Electrical Engineer’s specifications and
drawings. Refer to Mechanical & Electrical Engineer’s specifications and drawings for relevant
data.
A.5402 Psychrometric Data

a) External Climate: Summer: Refer to the M&E specification.
b) External Climate: Winter: Refer to the M&E specification.
c) Internal Conditions: Refer to the M&E specification.
d) Internal Conditions during Construction: As items a) and b) above.
A.5500 Fire and Smoke Stops
A.5501 General Requirements

a) Detail and co-ordinate all necessary fire/ smoke stops required by NFPA 5000, Local Building
Regulations, Civil Defence and the Relevant Local Authority.
b) Where the Local Statutory Authorities and/or Local/National Fire Regulations require a specific

fire resistance to elements of structure which form a junction with adjacent components, ensure
that the junction is fire stopped to the same degree as the elements.
A.5502 Fire Protection

a) Fire performance in terms of fire resistance of elements and structure shall be determined in
accordance with NFPA 5000 and the Fire Strategy Report.
b) Supply test certificates to demonstrate that all materials meet the above requirements.
c) Ensure compliance with all Statutory Authorities' and Fire Services' requests/recommendations
and ensure discharge of relevant conditions in their respect.
A.5600 Corrosion Protection
A.5601 General
a) Ensure that protective measures are taken to avoid any corrosion or any deleterious effects
caused by manufacturing, finishing, transportation, storage and installation of materials.
b) Ensure full resistance to any corrosion for components that are secured or bolted to each other,
paying particular attention to the surface damage caused by such bolting or securing.
c) Ensure full resistance in repair of corrosion protection to cope with the Site cutting of
components, especially at boundary and external conditions.
d) The minimum requirements for the corrosion protection system for secondary structural
steelwork shall conform to BS 5493, BS EN ISO 12944: Parts 1-8 and BS EN ISO 14713 as
appropriate. For primary structural steelwork refer to the Structural Engineer’s specification. The
environmental category under BS EN ISO 12944: Part 2 shall be:
i) External corrosion category:
• Category C5-M including resistance to the effects of high salinity, wind blown sand
including sand storms: Refer also to clause A.5402.
ii) Interior corrosion category:
• Category C1: Refer also to clause A.5402.
e) Allow for protection against all corrosion arising from exposure to seawater, non-saline water,
soil, high humidity, low or high temperatures, chemical acids and alkalis, abrasion and impact,
fungi and bacteria.
f) Particular care shall be taken with delivery and storage on Site, particularly if storage is
prolonged. On no account shall materials or components be stored or used beyond the
manufacturer’s expiry date.
A.5602 Galvanising Corrosion Protection
The interval to first maintenance shall be no less than the following period as defined in BS EN ISO
14713: Very long (equal to or greater than 20 years).
A.5603 Electrolytic Protection

At all locations where different metals are assembled together, ensure that electrolytic corrosion does
not occur and that the necessary protection is provided where needed, in both temporary and
permanent conditions.
A.5700 Earth Bonding
A.5701 General
a) All extraneous conductive parts of the works shall be effectively bonded to earth. An extraneous
conductive part is defined as being that part which is liable to transmit a potential, including
earth potential, and not forming part of the electrical installation. Each component shall
constitute an extraneous conductive part.
b) The works shall be electrically continuous as required by the latest edition of the IEE (Institution
of Electrical Engineers) Regulations.
c) Equipotential bonding shall be provided to ensure that the various exposed conductive parts
and extraneous conductive parts as defined by the IEE Regulations shall be at a substantially
equal potential.
d) Earthing connecting shall comply with BS 6651 and BS 7430. Copies of the final testing

certificates shall be incorporated in the Health and Safety File.
A.6000 QUALITY CONTROL

A.6100 General Quality Assurance, Quality Control, Testing
A.6101 General
a) Establish, document and maintain a quality assurance and quality control system capable of
verifying to the satisfaction of the CA that all materials and workmanship, whatever their
sources, conform to the requirements of the Specification. Should the Contractor or any of his
sub-contractors be certified to the BS EN ISO 9000 family of standards then these works shall
be monitored accordingly.
b) The quality programme shall be defined in a quality control manual or similar document in which
the organisation systems, inspection and test plan procedures are fully described to ensure that
all essential inspection requirements are determined and satisfied throughout all phases of the
works.
c) Establish a tolerance quality control manual to cover all aspects of tolerance compliance
relating to the works. A quality control proposal shall be prepared for submission to the CA for
acceptance. This shall describe, in detail, the various types of quality control checks that shall
be carried out during each stage of the works; what means and methods shall be used; which
personnel shall be employed, together with their qualifications, and how each type of tolerance
check shall be recorded and kept for future reference.
d) The Contractor’s proposals for the quality control manual shall meet the requirements of this
section as a minimum and be submitted to the CA. Provide facilities in the event that the CA
wishes to examine these proposals at the works. Include details of any formal approvals held for
the Contractor’s or any sub-contractor’s quality system or any evaluations or assessments
carried out by independent third parties.
e) Within 30 days of the written order to commence the works, submit a comprehensive quality
control manual to the CA for review, amendment where appropriate and acceptance.
f) Include with the quality control manual an inspection and test plan for each major item of work
or type of fabrication which shall detail, in sequential order:
i) The principal activities to be carried out.
ii) The type, method and frequency of inspections and tests to be carried out.
iii) The inspecting authority.
iv) The acceptance criteria.
v) The records to be kept.
g) The inspection and test plan shall contain sufficient space for the CA to indicate on it the
activities he wishes to inspect as either "hold" or "witness" points.
h) A "hold" point is defined as a point on the inspection and test plan beyond which the process
may not continue until it has been accepted by the CA.
i) A "witness" point is defined as a point on the inspection and test plan where the Contractor
shall give reasonable notice that a particular part of the process has been reached although the
process may continue without acceptance being notified by the CA.
j) The inspection and test plan shall provide the basis of inspection for the item of work and shall
be accepted prior to commencement of the work.
k) At all times during the Contract period, make available at the works all necessary resources and
facilities and implement any reviews and amendments of the quality control manual deemed
necessary or desirable by the CA.
l) As a minimum the quality control manual shall include information and procedures as defined
below:
i) Organisation and Management.
ii) Facilities, Measuring and Test Equipment.
iii) Personnel Training and Certification.
iv) Documentation.

v) Receipts, Storage, Handling and Transportation.

vi) Materials.
vii) Welding.
viii) Fabrication and Erection.
ix) Tolerance Control.
x) Prototypes.
xi) Painting and Coating.
xii) Inspection and Testing of Materials and Workmanship.
xiii) Non-conforming Items.
xiv) Detailed Design.
xv) Control of Purchased Materials and Services.
xvi) Completed Item, Inspection and Test Results.
xvii) Records.
xviii) Review of the Quality System.
A.6102 Testing and Inspection

a) Where required, engage an accredited independent testing specialist, as agreed with the CA,
to verify that the requirements of the Contract have been satisfied.
b) Allow for testing on samples and materials incorporated in the works as necessary.
c) Include and supply detailed proposals of tests that demonstrate compliance with the
requirements of the Specification and the Design Drawings.
d) The following minimum provisions shall be made available to the CA at all times:
i) Suitably qualified personnel using appropriate validated equipment.
ii) All necessary access and facilities for inspection and testing in fabrication shops and on
Site.
iii) Regularly calibrated equipment for the purposes of load measuring.
e) Maintain the following:
i) Tests and inspection results during all stages of manufacture, assembly and installation of
components.
ii) Certificates relating to the materials used in the work, as confirmation of tests carried out
in accordance with the relevant standards and codes.
iii) Records of all inspections and tests performed to substantiate conformity with the
Specification, including those carried out by sub-contractors and sub-suppliers.
f) Should any test reveal defective material and/or workmanship, immediately carry out any
remedial work and/or re-testing, including that of a special nature, under instruction from the
CA.
g) Indicate on the Contract Programme the exact timing of all testing, procedural trials and trial
assemblies, in order to allow the CA the opportunity of attending.
h) If the CA is of the opinion that the works do not conform to the requirements of this document,
or to the details indicated on the Shop Drawings, then the CA shall give instructions for special
tests to be carried out to establish the case.
A.6200 Statutory Regulations
A.6201 Standards
a) British Standards and Local Building Regulations and Codes shall be the governing standards
for the works.
b) Only where expressly stated in the Specification shall other National Standards be applicable to
the works.

c) All reference to British and other standards, regulations and requirements of statutory bodies
shall mean the latest published editions at the time of Contract award. Where such standards,
regulations and requirements are amended after Contract award and affect the Contractor’s
responsibilities during the course of the works, immediately inform the CA in writing.
d) If unable to comply with the governing standards or regulations and proposing to substitute
other National Standards, inform the CA within the summary of deviations from the
Specification. Provide fully detailed reasons for being unable to comply, together with any
design and/or technical implications. Failure to provide such notification prior to Contract award
shall be deemed to be acceptance of the governing standards or regulations and later
notification shall be a nullity.
A.6202 Building Codes and Regulations

a) All materials, components, equipment and workmanship shall comply with all Local Authority
Codes and Local Building Regulations, British Standards, and any other regulations applicable
to the works, together with all relevant Statutory Rules, Regulations, Bye-Laws and other
enforceable instruments in both the design and execution of the installation.
b) Unless stated otherwise, British Codes and Standards shall apply to the Building Design and
Materials as listed herein.
A.6203 Submissions to Authorities

a) When required by the Local Statutory Authorities, submit to them any component part of the
works for appraisal, testing, stamping or certifying.
b) After such component part has been satisfactorily approved, tested, stamped or certified, return
the marked component or documentary evidence of its approval, as appropriate, to Site for
reference purposes.
c) If the Local Statutory Authority rejects components, replace the component part(s) with those
that are acceptable.
d) Obtain any approvals required from the Statutory Authorities.
A.6204 Design Regulations

Ensure that the Shop Drawings comply with all Statutory Regulations, requirements and relevant
codes and that they receive the necessary approval in good time to ensure that there is no
programme delay caused by awaiting such approvals.
A.6300 Safety and Protection
A.6301 Health and Safety Requirements

a) Comply with the latest National Health and Safety requirements/regulations, ensuring that full
consideration is given to the health and safety of operatives when completing the Detailed
Design, manufacturing, installing or operating and maintaining the works.
b) The Shop Drawings shall only incorporate methods of manufacture, installation, maintenance
and use that are safe and comply with all Health and Safety requirements.
A.6302 Damage Anticipation

Other than damage through terrorist attack or similar activity, anticipate the possible sources of
damage to the works and take active and positive protective measures to maintain them in pristine
condition until full Practical Completion. The acceptance of responsibility for making good in the
event of damage shall not be considered adequate.
A.6303 Protective Devices

Provide necessary protective devices to protect all goods and materials incorporated into the works,
at all stages through to Practical Completion, against damage arising from but not limited to weather
conditions, construction, other contractors, warping, distortion, abrasion and other conditions which
could have an adverse effect on any goods and/or materials used in the works.
A.6304 Protective Measures

Provide full details of the protective measures proposed for implementation at each of the following
stages:
a) Manufacture and packaging of goods and materials at off-Site locations.

b) Shipment to Site and unloading.

c) Storage on Site and movement to point of installation or construction.
d) Installation/construction.
e) Completion to handover.
A.6305 Packing and Crating

a) Where components are delivered to the Site in packages or crates, then each package or crate
shall be labelled on the outside giving the reference and quantity of the contents so that
deliveries can be accepted at the Site without the necessity of breaking open any package.
b) Carefully remove all protection from the works immediately before Practical Completion and
leave the works perfectly clean and fit for immediate use.
A.6306 Protection of Glazed Elements

a) All elements of framework and associated beads and strips shall be stored on Site such that
they shall not be damaged, distorted or weathered unevenly.
b) All finished components shall be carefully packed in stillages or crates such that they are
suitably separated and protected to prevent scratching, scuffing or other surface damage.
c) All glass panes, sealants and gaskets shall be stored on Site in accordance with their
manufacturer’s written recommendations.
A.6307 Vermin and Insects

a) The Detailed Design, manufacture and installation of the works shall protect against and not
contain or provide harbourage for infestation by vermin or insects.
b) Carry out the recommendations and take account of Digest 415 produced by the Building
Research Establishment.
A.6400 Maintenance, Training and Replacement Materials
A.6401 General
a) Replaceable materials/components shall be maximised.
b) Materials shall be capable of simple maintenance/repair and integration with other maintenance
systems.
A.6402 Maintenance Manual

a) One month before programmed completion of the works/Practical Completion prepare and
submit, to the satisfaction of the CA, three copies of a Maintenance Manual required to maintain
the works.
b) Content:
i) The Maintenance Manual shall incorporate all maintenance systems and give details of the
operation and required maintenance of all items, components and systems comprising the
works.
ii) This information shall be supplied for the CA’s review in the following format:
• Specially written information shall be on A4 size pages with typed text using double
spacing and in a format agreed prior to submission.
• Drawn information shall generally be on A1 size sheets.
• Standard published information shall be carefully selected and edited to include
only those items installed. Where editing is not appropriate, the relevant items shall
be typed out and included.
c) Component Information: The following information shall be supplied for every item, component
and/or system:
i) Certified manufacturing certificate.
ii) Full description giving any special features. A full breakdown of the parts and the
catalogue number of the constituent parts.
iii) The guarantee period of any element or material where in excess of the warranty required

by the Specification.
d) Maintenance Procedures: The Maintenance Manual shall include fully comprehensive details in
respect of:
i) Cleaning procedures for all elements of the works.
ii) Replacement procedures.
iii) Regular cyclical maintenance procedures (avoiding damage).
iv) Repair procedures in the event of damage.
v) Washing methods, including the frequency and method of washing required to maintain
performance and appearance. Details shall be provided in respect of the maximum time
during which performance of components can be maintained, together with the frequency
and method of washing required to achieve this.
A.6403 Training of User’s Personnel

a) Prior to Practical Completion of the works provide skilled staff/operatives to instruct the user’s
staff on the correct and efficient operation and maintenance of all systems, components, plant,
equipment and controls as detailed in the Maintenance Manual.
b) Provide a programme and schedule of training requirements, prior to completion of the works,
stating the minimum amount of time which is required for the skilled staff to train the user’s staff.
c) Throughout the training period remain responsible for the operation and maintenance of the
works.
d) Where such training cannot be carried out prior to Practical Completion of the works due to the
nature of the equipment, return to Site at a later mutually agreed date to complete the training
period.
A.6404 Replacement Materials

a) Where required by the Contract, provide replacement materials upon completion of the works.
b) All replacement materials shall be of identical quality to those installed in the works.
c) In addition, supply a list of recommended replacement materials, together with unit prices for
specialist elements of the works. (Note: This shall not form part of the Tender price but shall
form the basis for costing of materials as required by the user).
d) All replacement materials provided as part of the works shall be handed over in crates, boxes or
cabinets, each individually marked with the words "Replacement Parts for . . " and the
component or equipment name and reference number stencilled on. Such materials shall be
identified within the Contract Documents.
A.6405 Relationship with Health and Safety File

a) Provide information as required for inclusion in the Health and Safety File.
b) In addition, agree with the CA suitable cross-referencing in the Manual so that it is fully co-
ordinated with the Health and Safety File and other Contractor’s O&M Manuals.
A.6500 General Materials and Workmanship Requirements
A.6510 Materials
A.6511 Standard of Materials and Quality

a) Materials shall be new, unless otherwise specified, carefully selected and of the best
merchantable quality.
b) All materials shall be acceptable to the CA.
c) Preference shall be given to materials/products that comply with the Construction Products
Directive (CPD) and are physically labelled with CE marking.
d) Insulation materials generally shall comply with all the recommendations of the LPC Design
Guide for the Fire Protection of Buildings.
e) Expanded polystyrene or polyurethane core sandwich panels shall not be used in the works
unless the Contractor complies with all the recommendations of the LPC Design Guide for the
Fire Protection of Buildings 2000 from the date of its first publication in December 1999 or any

subsequent guidance which supersedes this guidance.
A.6512 Health Hazards

All proposed materials shall not in any way be a potential health hazard. Maintain a full, up-to-date
knowledge of all current published research and legislation in this respect. The Contractor shall also
accept the exclusions contained in the Contract documents.
A.6513 Deleterious Materials

The following materials shall not be used in the works unless it can be demonstrated, to the
satisfaction of the CA, that they are safe during manufacture, installation and use and that their
suitability is ensured:
a) Asbestos or asbestos-containing products, as defined in the United Kingdom’s Control of
Asbestos at Work Regulations 2002, or any statutory modification or re-enactment thereof, and
the Asbestos (Prohibitions) Regulations 1992 and as amended 1999 and 1999(2) or any later
statutory modification or re-enactment thereof.
b) Lead where the metal or its corrosive products may be directly ingested, inhaled or absorbed.
Applications of lead such as roofing, flashings, rainwater goods and copper alloy fittings
containing lead which are specifically required are acceptable, until equal or better alternatives
are available.
c) Lead based paints and primers.
d) Urea formaldehyde foam or materials which may release formaldehyde beyond British Standard
limits.
e) Pitch polymer DPC.
f) Materials which generally comprise mineral fibres, either man-made or naturally occurring, which
have a diameter of 3 microns or less and a length of 200 microns or less, or which contain any
fibres not sealed, encapsulated, or otherwise stabilised to ensure that fibre migration is
prevented. Products that may contain these fibres include insulation, fire protection and air
filters. For all mineral wool insulation products, test evidence must be available and produced
confirming that the materials fulfil the requirements of European Directive 97/69/EC and the
Approved Supply List of current HSE CHIP Regulations and consequently are not classified as
a possible human carcinogen.
g) Chlorofluorocarbons or hydrochlorofluorocarbons or any goods and/or materials containing the
same (e.g. materials in which CFCs, HCFCs or HFAs have been used as blowing agents)
h) The use of a species of hardwood from the tropical rainforests is not permitted unless it is
obtained from sustainable resources.
i) High alumina cement in structural elements.
j) Wood wool slabs in permanent formwork to concrete or in structural elements.
k) Calcium chloride in admixtures for use in reinforced concrete.
l) Aggregates for use in reinforced concrete which do not comply with BS EN 12620 and
aggregates for use in concrete which do not comply with the provisions of BS 8110.
m) Polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), polychlorinated terphenyls (PCTs) or any goods and/or
materials containing the same.
n) Calcium silicate bricks or tiles.
o) Sea dredged aggregates that do not comply with the chloride limits specified in BS EN 206,
BS EN 12620, BS EN 1744: Part 1 and BS 8500.
p) Lindane - wood treatment/insecticidal spray.
q) Pentachlorophenol (PCP) or timber treated with Pentachlorophenol - biocide/wood
preservative.
r) Tributyltin (TBT).
s) If wishing to use any of the materials that are listed above, prepare detailed observations for the
Client based upon the guidelines contained within the document “Good Practice in the
Selection of Construction Materials” prepared by Ove Arup & Partners.
t) Paints and coatings shall comply with the following:

i) Paints and coatings shall have a low VOC content, the limits of which are established in
the following:
• -Green Seal standard GS-11 paints first edition May 20 1993.
• -Green Seal standard GC-03 anti-corrosive paints, second edition Jan 07 1997.
• -(SCAQMD) rule #1113, Architectural Coatings.
A.6514 Sustainable Sources of Timber

a) All softwood timbers and all temperate hardwoods shall be procured from sustainable sources.
b) Tropical hardwoods in timber or timber based products (including but not limited to veneers,
lippings and manufactured board) shall be avoided.
c) Tropical hardwoods or timber-based products from unsustainable or unknown origin are
prohibited from use in the works.
d) All timber and timber based products shall carry the Forest Stewardship Council’s (FSC)
Trademark or other label from an equivalent internationally recognised, globally applicable,
independent certification system for good forest management, acceptable to the CA.
Demonstrate that the proposed FSC accredited timber is available in the required quantities.
e) Full shipping documents to confirm chain of custody from the concession/plantation to the UK
supplier’s premises shall be supplied.
f) Endeavour to source timber and timber based products in accordance with sub-clause d). If
unable to comply, offer for acceptance timber and timber based products which are from a
known source being a well-managed forest and provide as a minimum the following
documentation:
i) The species and country of origin.
ii) The identity of the concession/plantation.
iii) Details of the forestry policies pursued by the concession/plantation confirming that a
sustainable resource policy is followed.
iv) Full shipping documents to confirm chain of custody from the concession/plantation to
the UK supplier’s premises.
g) All plywood used in the works shall be from softwood or temperate hardwoods from sustainable
sources.
h) Provide information to the CA in respect of timber products proposed for use in the works for
review and acceptance by the CA. No timber products shall be procured prior to acceptance of
the proposed timber products by the CA. The information shall be presented to the CA in
tabular form under the following headings:
i) Country of Origin.
ii) Trade Name.
iii) Botanical Name.
iv) Wood Product Volume Category A (m³).
v) Wood Product Volume Category B (m³).
vi) Wood Product Volume Category R (m³).
vii) Total Volume (m³), where timber is:
• Category A: From an FSC certified forest.
• Category B: From a known certifiable forest.
• Category R: Recycled material.
A.6550 Workmanship
A.6551 Skilled Personnel

Execute the work using persons skilled in the processes to be adopted. Where requested, provide
such documentation necessary to demonstrate an individual’s ability to carry out the work to which he
has been assigned.

A.6552 Suitability of Structure

Before commencing any part or element of the works, survey the structure, checking line, level and
fixing points and report immediately to the CA if the structure is considered to be unsuitable. If the
structure is unsuitable, propose remedial action.
A.6553 Setting Out

a) Establish a physical Base Reference Datum on Site from which all primary plan positioned grids
and principal levels are subsequently set out. This Base Reference Datum point shall be
strategically placed such that it can be referred to as necessary for the duration of the works. It
shall be physically robust and located in ground that is not prone to movement or vibration
during the works so that it is spatially fixed for the duration of the works. The Base Reference
Datum shall be located to within ±2mm accuracy of the design dimension to the designated
reference point.
b) Suitably qualified personnel shall carry out all primary setting out. It shall be done using
instruments and methods appropriate for achieving the necessary precision and accuracy.
c) Prior to commencing the installation, submit to the CA the proposed method of setting out, how
grid lines shall be marked on Site and how their positions shall be checked and maintained for
the duration of the works.
d) The plan position of any designated mark (measured to its centre) defining a Primary Positional
Grid Line shall be located to within ±2mm of its design dimension from the Base Reference
Datum.
A.6554 Project Tolerances Definitions

a) Tolerance: The defined maximum allowable dimensional deviation from a prescribed or agreed
value or position.
b) Base Reference Datum: The physical marker established on Site to define the base reference
plan and level position to which all other Site setting out is referenced.
c) Dimension: Any prescribed dimension, or any dimension which can be determined from a set of
prescribed dimensions, for any element or part thereof as defined by the designer responsible
for that element.
d) Primary Positional Grid Line: Any setting-out grid line used to define the spatial layout of the
project and to which the local setting out of elements may be referenced.
e) Location Reference Point: A specified point that is used to define the position of certain other
points and/or elements.
f) Location Reference Plane: A specified plane that is used to define the position of certain other
planes and/or elements. The reference plane shall typically be defined by a specified set of
reference points.
g) Location Reference Surface: A specified surface that is used to define the position of another
surface and/or surfaces. The reference surface may be defined mathematically (e.g. as part of a
cylinder or as part of a sphere) where it is spatially fixed in relation to specified reference points.
h) Reference Element: A specified element that is used to define the position of other elements.
Typically a specific point on the reference element shall be defined to any other element to
which it refers.
A.6555 Compatibility
Ensure that all materials and processes employed in the works are compatible with each other and
meet the current requirements of the relevant British Standards and Codes of Practice.
A.6556 Manufacturer’s Instructions

a) Where proprietary systems are specified and included in the works, ensure that the method of
building or installing is strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and
that copies of all such documentation are supplied to the CA prior to commencement of the
works.
b) All materials and associated components shall be stored in a clean dry area, in accordance with
the manufacturer’s written recommendations.
A.6557 Suppliers

Be responsible for all materials, components and equipment supplied or manufactured by sub-
contractors or suppliers, until the end of the warranty period defined in the Contract.
A.6558 Covering Up
No work shall be covered up without agreement by the CA. Afford reasonable notice and full
opportunity for the examination and measurement of any work that is about to be covered up.
A.6559 Cutting, etc.

a) All methods, principles, details, etc. for Site cutting of components shall be submitted as part of
the Contractor’s method statement to the CA for review. No manufacture shall commence until
it can be demonstrated that all proposed techniques have been reviewed by the CA.
b) Cutting of metal products shall be straight and free from burrs and all joints shall be flush,
without gaps or imperfections. If base metal is exposed, the surface shall be protected to the
same level of protection as stated in the Specification.
A.6560 Deterioration
a) All materials shall be treated/selected to prevent any damage from all possible combinations of
atmospheric deterioration, corrosion, wet rot, dry rot, fungi, mould and all other deleterious
effects including atmospheric pollution and pH factor of the adjacent elements.
b) Ensure that no chemical or electrolytic action takes place where dissimilar metals and/or
materials are used together.
c) No materials shall discolour, crack or otherwise be damaged by the worst possible combination
of environmental conditions identified herein.
d) With materials subject to surface treatment, special attention shall be given to the substrate to
ensure that the preparation is compatible with the surface treatment.
e) Ensure that all superficial dust and friable materials are removed and that adequate protection is
provided during the process of the surface treatment and finishes to prevent contamination by
dust and other debris.
f) Materials used in the manufacture of the works shall not be liable to infestation attack by micro-
organisms, fungi, insects or other vermin, nor provide harbourage for same.
A.6561 Line and Level

All components shall be installed such that they are plumb or horizontal and shall line up with
adjacent components, in all directions, taking account of the allowable tolerances as defined in the
Project Common Tolerance and Movements Document.
A.6562 Method Statements

A detailed method statement describing the sequence and methods to be employed in carrying out
the works identifying proposed solutions and processes with regard to workmanship, fabrication,
fixing, securing, storing and handling, setting out, site assembly and protection.
End of Section

Contents
E50 PRECAST CONCRETE MULLIONS/FRAMING ..............................................3
E50.1000 SCOPE, SUBMITTALS, TESTING AND PERFORMANCE ............................. 3
E50.1100 SPECIFICATION AND SCOPE ....................................................................................... 3

E50.1101 Descriptive Works..........................................................................................................................................................................3
E50.1102 Scope of Works..............................................................................................................................................................................3
E50.1103 Particular Interfaces .......................................................................................................................................................................3
E50.1200 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS/TYPES.................................................................................. 3

E50.1201 Precast Concrete Cappings and Floor Channel Profile.......................................................................................................3
E50.1300 SUBMITTALS AND TESTING .......................................................................................... 4

Tender Submittals .......................................................................................................................................................................... 4
E50.1301 Tender Response ...........................................................................................................................................................................4
Samples, Mock-ups, Prototypes and Quality Benchmarks ................................................................................................. 4
E50.1302 Pre-contract Samples ...................................................................................................................................................................4
E50.1303 Post Contract Samples ................................................................................................................................................................4
E50.1304 Mock-ups..........................................................................................................................................................................................4
E50.1305 Prototypes ........................................................................................................................................................................................5
E50.1306 General Requirements for Quality Benchmarks.....................................................................................................................5
E50.1307 Benchmark Requirements............................................................................................................................................................5
Testing............................................................................................................................................................................................... 5
E50.1308 Test Requirements .........................................................................................................................................................................5
E50.1400 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS................................................................................ 5

Structural Requirements............................................................................................................................................................... 5
E50.1401 General .............................................................................................................................................................................................5
E50.2000 PRODUCTS AND FABRICATION....................................................................... 5
E50.2100 DESCRIPTION OF CONCRETE FINISHES .................................................................. 5

E50.2101 Definitions for Surface Finish of Concrete...............................................................................................................................5
E50.2102 Precast Concrete Finish ...............................................................................................................................................................6
E50.2103 Sizes Generally ...............................................................................................................................................................................6
E50.2104 Moulds Generally............................................................................................................................................................................6
E50.2105 Materials and Construction for Moulds ....................................................................................................................................7
E50.2107 Built-in Components .....................................................................................................................................................................7
E50.2108 Colour Consistency .......................................................................................................................................................................8
E50.2109 Aggregates.......................................................................................................................................................................................8
E50.2110 Materials Generally ........................................................................................................................................................................8
E50.2111 Dowels/Fixings................................................................................................................................................................................8
E50.2200 QUALITY AND CONTROL ............................................................................................... 8

E50.2201 Quality Control/Monitoring Requirements ...............................................................................................................................8
E50.2202 Batching, Mixing and Transport..................................................................................................................................................8
E50.2203 Generally...........................................................................................................................................................................................9
E50.2205 Inserts, Holes and Chases...........................................................................................................................................................9
E50.2206 Production Control Unit(s)...........................................................................................................................................................9
E50.2207 Inspection .........................................................................................................................................................................................9
E50.2208 Records.............................................................................................................................................................................................9
E50.2209 Mix Proportions and Aggregate..................................................................................................................................................9
E50.2210 Damaged Units ...............................................................................................................................................................................9
E50.3000 SITE INSTALLATION...........................................................................................10
E50.3100 SITE CONTROL...............................................................................................................10

E50.3101 Storage .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 10
E50.3102 Setting Out.................................................................................................................................................................................... 10
E50.3103 Installation and Propping........................................................................................................................................................... 10
E50.3104 Final Fixings................................................................................................................................................................................... 10
E50.3105 Damaged Units ............................................................................................................................................................................ 11
E50.3106 Cleaning......................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
Architectural Specification – T2-T3 External E50/1 Foster + Partners

Wall and rooflight system.
E50.3107 Accuracy of Erection .................................................................................................................................................................. 11
E50.3200 PROTECTION ..................................................................................................................11

E50.3201 Protection of the Works............................................................................................................................................................. 11

E50 PRECAST CONCRETE MULLIONS/FRAMING

To be read in conjunction with the Structural Engineer's specification, Section A and other related
sections of the Specification, Preliminaries and Contract Conditions.
E50.1000 SCOPE, SUBMITTALS, TESTING AND PERFORMANCE
E50.1100 SPECIFICATION AND SCOPE

E50.1101 Descriptive Works
a) This section specifies requirements for precast concrete mullions/framing associated with
cladding specified in Section H11.
b) For design and general performance requirements, refer to Section A of the Specification.
Specific design and performance requirements are as defined in the particular trade
sections.
c) Complete the Detailed Design, manufacture, supply, install and warrant the works whilst
complying with the visual intent indicated on the Design Drawings and criteria stated in the
Specification.
d) Where no material, product or supplier is indicated in the Specification, propose suitable
materials and systems prior to Contract award which comply with the visual intent and
performance criteria stated and remain fully responsible for the Detailed Design of the works.
e) Where a particular material, product or supplier is indicated in the Specification, such
material, product or supplier shall be deemed indicative representing the CA’s design
intent only. The Contractor may complete the installation using that product, or such other
confirmed as acceptable by the CA in writing, but shall remain fully responsible for the
Detailed Design and performance of the works.
f) Comply with the requirements for samples, mock-ups, benchmarks, etc., as specified for the
proposed finishes and co-ordinate the work accordingly.
g) The CA shall be allowed access to the Contractor's place of manufacture, finishing and off-site
storage of the moulds and precast units when requested by the CA.
E50.1102 Scope of Works

This section of the Specification, when read in conjunction with the Design Drawings, provides
particular requirements with respect to the following:
a) Precast concrete capping profiles to mullions.
b) Associated reinforcement and fixings.
E50.1103 Particular Interfaces

a) Complete the Detailed Design of all interfaces with adjoining trades prior to commencement of
manufacture.
b) All interfaces shall be fully co-ordinated prior to commencement.
E50.1200 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS/TYPES

E50.1201 Precast Concrete Cappings and Floor Channel Profile.
a) Profiled precast concrete capping pieces to mullions of Types EWS-11, EWS12 and EWS-13,
refer to section H11, with stainless steel reinforcement in accordance with the structural
engineers specification. Stainless Steel to be grade 1440.1 (316).
b) Standard: Complete the design in accordance with BS 8110 and the requirements of Section
H11.
c) Comply with the design intent as shown on the Design Drawings and provide all required
reinforcement, bracketry and fixings.
d) Finish: Precast with acid etched finish exposing aggregate, even-coloured, blemish-free smooth
as-struck finish to provide Special Class 1, Type B surface finish, uniform in appearance.
Colour reference to be confirmed by the CA.

e) Joints between caps are to be minimal and open.
E50.1300 SUBMITTALS AND TESTING

Tender Submittals
E50.1301 Tender Response

a) Provide tender submittals in accordance with the requirements of Section A.4000 of the
Specification.
b) Submit a design response with the Tender proposal, to include all profiles of typical conditions,
with dimensions.
c) The Tender design response shall include:
i) Draft programme indicating Working Drawing programme, sample unit construction,
approval periods.
ii) Colour samples.
iii) Choice of moulds/formwork.
iv) Proposed mixes and treatments within method statements to achieve precast finish
specified.
v) Transportation and storage of units method statements.
vi) Outline of construction sequence, i.e. installation and adjustment of unit installation,
alignment and propping.
vii) Samples where specified.
viii) List of Tests included.
ix) QA/QC programme.
x) List of proposed Shop Drawings.
xi) Summary of deviations from the Specification.
xii) Outline technical specifications reflecting proposed materials/systems, etc. including
formwork materials proposed for use.
xiii) A list of proposed suppliers and sub-contractors intended to be used.
Samples, Mock-ups, Prototypes and Quality Benchmarks
E50.1302 Pre-contract Samples

4 pre-contract samples of each type shall be provided as follows:
a) 600mm length sample of precast concrete mullion in the required colour using proposed
formwork and mix.
b) Sample ranges (provide 6 -12 mixes) 300mmx300mm blocks of colour and texture variations
for acceptance by the CA.
c) 600mm length sample of precast concrete mullion capping profile in the required colour using
proposed formwork and mix.
d) 600mm length sample of precast concrete floor channel profile in the required colour using
proposed formwork and mix.
E50.1303 Post Contract Samples

Post contract samples shall be provided as follows:
a) Samples of finished precast concrete mullion capping profile and floor channel profile as
agreed, 600mm length. Provide range of samples of the agreed colour demonstrating the upper
and lower limits to be achieved which shall be used as reference samples throughout the
works.
b) Various samples of fastening devices and anchors, etc.
E50.1304 Mock-ups
Refer to Section H11 for Mock-up requirements.

E50.1305 Prototypes
The following prototypes shall be provided in accordance with Section A.4000:
Make allowance for the construction of a prototype as required. Refer to Section H11 for prototype
requirements.
E50.1306 General Requirements for Quality Benchmarks

a) Construct sections of the works as specified, to the satisfaction of the CA. These shall be used
as a quality benchmark for the remainder of the works until Practical Completion.
b) Do not commence construction in other areas of that particular trade until the CA has examined
and accepted the quality benchmark. Immediately carry out any alterations or adjustments
required by the CA in order to achieve the quality of construction required.
c) Upon receipt of the CA’s acceptance, immediately fully protect the quality benchmark. It shall
be used, from time to time, by the CA to check and monitor the quality of materials and
workmanship incorporated in the remaining areas of the works, or where specifically stated for
the purpose of further testing. Remove and replace all protection when requested by the CA for
such purposes.
E50.1307 Benchmark Requirements

Quality benchmarks shall be provided as follows:
Visible precast units installed on Site representing the finished work.
Testing
E50.1308 Test Requirements

Refer to Section H11 for testing requirements.
E50.1400 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

Comply with the general performance of Section A.5000 and the following specific performance
requirements.
Structural Requirements
E50.1401 General
For structural performance requirements, refer to Section H11 and Structural Engineers Report.
E50.2000 PRODUCTS AND FABRICATION
E50.2100 DESCRIPTION OF CONCRETE FINISHES

E50.2101 Definitions for Surface Finish of Concrete
a) The quality of concrete finish shall be identified by the following classifications in accordance
with BS 8110: Part 1:
i) Class 2 - applicable to surfaces that are to be exposed to view but where appearance is
not critical.
ii) Class 1 - applicable to most surfaces exposed to view, with additional finish requirements
as further described herein.
iii) Special Class - applicable to high standards of appearance as required by the CA.
b) The Type of finish shall be identified by the following codes, in accordance with BS 8110: Part
1:
i) Type A finish: This finish shall be achieved by the use of properly designed formwork or
moulds of timber, plywood, plastics, concrete or steel. Small blemishes caused by
entrapped air or water may be expected, but the surface shall be free of voids,
honeycombing or other blemishes.
ii) Type B finish: This finish shall be achieved by the use of high quality concrete and
formwork. The concrete shall be thoroughly compacted and all surfaces shall be true, with
clean arrises. Only very minor surface blemishes shall occur and no staining or
discolouration from the release agent shall be permitted.

iii) Type C finish: This finish is obtained by first producing a Type B finish. The surface shall
then be improved by carefully removing all fins and other projections, thoroughly washing
it down and then filling the most noticeable surface blemishes with a cement and fine
aggregate paste to match the colour of the original concrete. The release agent shall be
carefully chosen to ensure that the concrete surface does not become stained or
discoloured. After the concrete has been properly cured, the face shall be rubbed down,
where necessary, to produce a smooth and even surface.
E50.2102 Precast Concrete Finish

a) The finish shall be at least equivalent to the following class and finish to BS 8110: Part 1:
i) Special Class.
ii) Type B Finish.
b) The finish shall have the following additional requirements:
i) Crack widths in the exposed surfaces of the concrete shall not exceed 0.3mm. Confirm
the name and address of the suppliers at Tender for inspection by the CA.
ii) Beams and columns shall have acid etch treatment. Degree of etching to be medium
etching to match type.
iii) Smooth dense as-struck finish with an acid-washed finish shall be applied to all visible
precast concrete to beams and columns.
iv) A smooth, matt, dense, even-coloured, blemish-free concrete surface using grey cement.
v) The finishes shall be uniform in colour and appearance throughout the works.
vi) The surfaces shall be free from discolouration caused by contamination from release
agent, grout leakage, rust staining or other sources.
vii) Abrupt irregularities shall be not greater than 1mm. Gradual irregularities expressed as
maximum permissible deviation from a 1m straightedge shall not be greater than 3mm.
viii) Produce a smooth even finish with an impervious high quality resin film faced plywood or
acceptable equivalent sheet material arranged in an accepted regular pattern as a feature
of the surface. This shall coincide with the architectural features as indicated on the
Design Drawings.
ix) The surface shall be free from discolouration caused by contamination from a release
agent, grout leakage or other sources including reinforcement laying out marking.
x) There shall be no uneven distribution of aggregate across all visible faces of concrete
columns and beams.
xi) After acid etching, colour equalizing sealer shall be applied to all visible precast concrete
surfaces.
xii) Other requirements: Chamfered edges to beams and columns acceptable to the CA.
xiii) Generally, surfaces shall be free of voids, honeycombing, segregation and other defects.
Voids shall be kept to an absolute minimum whilst ensuring compliance with other
requirements of the Specification. The following maximum acceptable limits for air
voids/blowholes shall be observed:
• No more than 20mm² of holes for any 100mm x 100mm of surfaces area. Maximum
size of any visible holes is 5mm.
xiv) Cover spacers: Do not use without acceptance.
E50.2103 Sizes Generally

a) The precast concrete units shall be worked to sizes defined by the Design Drawings and be
within the recommended deviations. They shall hold out reasonably square at the back, i.e.
without corners broken away whereby the strength of the fixings system may be impaired.
b) Broken corners shall not be permitted to any visible elements.
E50.2104 Moulds Generally

a) Moulds shall be of such construction that casting deviations can be readily controlled to give
compliance with the Specification.

b) Moulds shall be maintained in clean, sound condition and inspected carefully for defects before
each reuse. Damaged moulds shall not be repaired and reused if this would impair the surface
appearance of the units.
c) Moulds shall be designed to permit demoulding without damage to the units.
d) Where applicable, moulds shall be coated evenly with a suitable release agent, which shall not
be allowed to touch the reinforcement. Application shall be such as to prevent puddling or
concentrations in corners, etc.
e) Moulds shall be constructed of mould lining that is an impervious material suitable to provide
the consistency of finish required and selected to provide crisp edge details as indicated on the
Design Drawings. The mould linings shall not be of steel unless agreed with the CA. Materials
for fillets, etc. required to achieve features shall be chosen to provide a finish identical to the
finish to the body of the unit.
f) Any joints and fixings in mould linings shall be sealed to prevent grout loss defects and shall be
such as to result in no visible change in plane of the concrete and no change in the finish
whatsoever.
g) The mould linings shall have no variations in stiffness that may produce differences in vibration
across the mould surface.
h) The mould linings shall be replaced after the agreed maximum number of casts, or upon
discovery of damage or defects whichever is the sooner.
i) Before casting, ensure that moulds have been checked to be free of all dust, reinforcement
clippings or other debris.
j) Moulds inspection: Inform the CA when each mould is complete and not less than 10 days
before commencing manufacture of units.
k) Moulds for features, etc. shall not have any splits, cracks or other defects.
l) Moulds that have been previously used shall be repaired and the edges resealed before they
are assembled. Moulds, which in the opinion of the Contractor have deteriorated to an extent
such that they shall not produce the specified finish, shall not be used for that class or a higher
class of finish.
m) Moulds shall be cut in such a manner that reinforcement and built-in components passing
through the moulds are maintained in position; the joint shall be tight and shall not permit grout
loss.
n) Formers for profiled work, chamfers, splays, rebates, curved troughs and other features shall be
rigidly and evenly fixed to the formwork along the complete length and shall not permit grout
loss.
o) Moulds shall be designed to be consistent with the geometry and as indicated on the Design
Drawings, subject to the acceptance of the CA. The lines of joints between units shall form
smooth curved lines consistent with the geometry and as indicated on the Design Drawings,
subject to the acceptance of the CA. The number of make-up pieces shall be kept to a
minimum.
p) Holes left by ties and components in concrete surfaces shall be in line horizontally and vertically
and shall form a regular pattern, to the acceptance of the CA.
q) Unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings, chamfers shall be provided for all external
angles of 90° or less in concrete surfaces with plain or fine finishes.
r) Moulds for curved concrete surfaces shall not be made up of a series of facets, unless
indicated on the Design Drawings.
E50.2105 Materials and Construction for Moulds

a) Materials for moulds shall be obtained from one source. Damaged moulds shall not be used
unless permitted by the CA. Propose materials for use in moulds in the Tender, for acceptance
by the CA.
b) Moulds shall be protected from spillages, rust marks, stains or any other debris or harm
whatsoever.
E50.2107 Built-in Components

a) Built-in components, cast-in items, void formers and box-outs shall be fixed in position before

concreting. Unless permitted by the CA, void formers and box-outs shall not be used instead of
built-in components. Polystyrene shall not be used for void formers and box-outs unless
permitted by the CA.
b) Do not cut hardened concrete to provide holes or chases.
c) Correctly locate and secure pipe sleeves, inserts and ducts in place. Formwork for all openings,
chases and holes in columns and units shall be constructed in such a way that it does not
interfere with the reinforcement.
d) Formwork moulds shall be rigid and free from movement that shall affect their performance with
regard to tolerances or colour of concrete. Allow for all necessary mid-rib reinforcement of the
moulds.
E50.2108 Colour Consistency

a) The consistency of the concrete colour is deemed to be of great importance on the project.
Select all suppliers and materials and all methods to ensure the specified finish and
consistency, including but not limited to the following:
i) Main plant to have consistent supply to achieve specified finish, to acceptance.
ii) Back-up plant selected to achieve equivalent supply.
b) Agree with the CA the colour range that shall be acceptable, based on the on-Site prototype or
other benchmarks or samples which shall then become the colour standard for the project.
E50.2109 Aggregates
Aggregates shall be selected in accordance with the recommendations of BS EN 12620, of
consistent colour, free from absorbent particles that may cause pop-outs and other particles such as
coal and iron sulphide that may be unsightly or cause unacceptable staining. Obtain from one source,
and ensure that adequate supplies can be maintained throughout the contract. Submit evidence to
demonstrate compliance in respect of compressive strength and free water/cement ratio.
E50.2110 Materials Generally

The materials for all the works shall be consistent and from the same source. Bulk purchasing and
premixing a material where inconsistency is a risk (e.g. the aggregate) is essential. The cement shall
be grey ordinary Portland cement unless otherwise stated or agreed with the CA.
E50.2111 Dowels/Fixings
a) All dowels and fixings shall be concealed when fixed in position in the works.
b) Dowels/fixings shall be stainless steel grade 1.4401 to BS EN 10088 and the relevant precast
concrete standards.
E50.2200 QUALITY AND CONTROL

E50.2201 Quality Control/Monitoring Requirements
a) Proposals shall be submitted for ongoing monitoring and quality control of the concrete with the
Tender submission. Make provision for inspection by the CA prior to precast units leaving the
factory.
b) Set up a system of “Hold” and “Monitor” points in the works to ensure that the quality achieved
is accepted by the CA prior to further pours proceeding.
c) As soon as possible after any concrete has been deemed as unacceptable within the
requirements of the Specification, submit proposals to the CA for the removal and
reconstruction of that section of the works. This requirement applies to all elements of the
works.
E50.2202 Batching, Mixing and Transport

a) Extreme care shall be taken to ensure that accurate and consistent batching and mixing are
carried out to achieve the specified quality of finish e.g. added water shall allow for the moisture
content of the aggregate to achieve a similar slump for each mix.
b) Proposals shall be submitted with the Tender, which shall have to be expanded upon if
acceptable, together with a demonstration of the proposed methods of practice by constructing
the full size quality-control prototype.

c) Consideration shall be given to the use of a dedicated main mixing and batching plant to avoid
contamination of the mix. A stand-by back-up plant shall also be available that is capable of
providing equivalent mix and batching facilities. The use or otherwise of such a plant shall be
stated in the Contract documentation.
E50.2203 Generally
Conform to the procedures of BS 8110, BS 8297, the requirements of Section H11 as applicable
and the requirements of all relevant National Standards. Provide Shop Drawings for all precast
concrete for review by the CA.
E50.2205 Inserts, Holes and Chases

a) Confirm all positions and details to ensure that alterations to and decisions about the size and
location of inserts, holes and chases are not made without the knowledge and acceptance of
the CA.
b) Fix inserts or box-outs as required in the correct positions before placing concrete. Form all
holes and chases. Do not cut hardened concrete without acceptance.
c) Ensure that all fixings and holding-down bolts, etc. are not disturbed or damaged during
construction.
E50.2206 Production Control Unit(s)

a) The first unit produced of each type shall be inspected at the works by the CA. If its
appearance is accepted it shall be clearly marked and kept safely at the factory as a control
standard for appearance of subsequently produced units.
b) Allow for inspection of all units at the works and provide adequate space and facilities for full
inspection of all surfaces.
E50.2207 Inspection
Carefully inspect and check all completed units for match with accepted sample(s) or control unit(s)
and compliance with the Specification before dispatch to Site. Make arrangements with the CA for
him to inspect the completed units in the factory.
E50.2208 Records
a) Keep complete records for each unit including the following information:
i) Unique identification number.
ii) Correlation with records of mixes, including batch numbers.
iii) Date of each stage of manufacture.
iv) Dates and results of all tests, checks and inspections.
v) Dimensions related to specified levels of accuracy.
vi) Specific location in the finished work.
vii) Details of any damage.
viii) Any other pertinent data, e.g. if the unit is an accepted production control unit.
b) Records shall be available for inspection on request.
E50.2209 Mix Proportions and Aggregate

Select mix proportions and aggregate to achieve the specified colour to match the agreed sample.
E50.2210 Damaged Units

a) Making good shall be minimal and consistent to an accepted sample. As far as possible the
finished surface shall be achieved without making good. The improvement of the surface finish
by the Contractor (e.g. filling noticeable surface blemishes) shall be agreed with the CA, prior to
any work being carried out. Blowholes shall be filled and all irregularities stoned off. Provide
continuity of personnel for making good, where required, to the complete satisfaction of the CA.
b) Components having arrises or faces that are broken, chipped, cracked, crazed, honeycombed,
irregular, inconsistent, stained or otherwise marred such that their appearance or performance
is impaired shall not be acceptable.
c) Submit finished samples to the CA for his acceptance prior to commencement. Finished

samples of precast concrete units which have been submitted and accepted by the CA shall be
used as reference samples for all precast units prior to being passed for inclusion into the
works, to the satisfaction of the CA. Precast units may be rejected for the following reasons:
i) Exceeding specified construction tolerances for units.
ii) Chipped, spalled or cracked units or other damage incurred during transport or
construction operations.
iii) Exposed-to-view surfaces that develop surface finish deficiencies.
iv) Other defects as listed including:
• Ragged or irregular edges.
• Finish quality below standard set by samples or mock-up.
• Excessive air voids/blowholes on exposed surfaces.
• Casting lines evident from different placements.
• Visible form joints or irregular surfaces.
• Stains on unit surfaces.
• Non-uniformity of colour and texture.
• Effects of grout seepage.
• Areas of any back-up concrete bleeding through facing concrete.
• Foreign material embedded in face.
• Visible repairs.
• Reinforcement shadow lines.
• Visible cracks.
• Any damage due to erection methods, propping panels, etc.
d) Provide a method statement demonstrating how damage will be avoided during all stages of
manufacture, installation and transportation.
E50.3000 SITE INSTALLATION
E50.3100 SITE CONTROL

E50.3101 Storage
All materials shall be suitably stored on Site, clear of the ground with protection from inclement
weather and contamination by other materials and kept dry. Precast concrete units shall be stored so
as to prevent soiling, chipping and any mechanical damage, contamination by salts and other
deleterious substances.
E50.3102 Setting Out

Be responsible for providing full setting-out drawings of all precast units, for acceptance by the CA.
E50.3103 Installation and Propping

a) Design and develop methods of propping and alignment of precast units to achieve accurate
positioning without any damage or effects on the finishes of the units whatsoever.
b) Consider locating self-aligning/locating heads, etc. within recesses for light fittings, etc.
E50.3104 Final Fixings

a) Ensure that the appearance of each elevation is acceptable before tightening the fixings, filling
the bed joints and dowel pockets or sealing the joints.
b) Where appropriate, tighten the threaded fastenings to the torque figures recommended in
writing by the manufacturer. Do not overtighten restraint fixings intended to permit lateral
movement.
c) Dowel bars and recessed lifting devices shall be filled with a polyester mix, be well tamped in

and shall not be in the visible faces of the unit without prior agreement.
E50.3105 Damaged Units

Do not repair without acceptance. Such acceptance shall not be given where the units are damaged
or where the proposed repair would impair appearance or performance.
E50.3106 Cleaning
a) Clean dirt or blemishes from exposed surfaces.
b) Wash and rinse in accordance with the precast concrete manufacturer’s recommendations.
c) Protect adjacent surfaces from damage caused by cleaning operations.
d) Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could alter the character of exposed finishes.
E50.3107 Accuracy of Erection

a) The structure, including any fixing inserts, shall be surveyed fully before commencing erection.
b) Each precast concrete unit shall be clearly marked with its identification symbol relative to its
position within the wall/soffit layout. Production and storage of units shall be arranged so that
delivery in accurate sequence for Site fixing is possible.
c) Within the length of any joint (including in-line continuations across transverse joints) the
greatest width shall not vary by more than ±2mm. Any variation shall be evenly distributed with
no sudden changes.
d) The average width of an individual joint between units, compared with the nominal design width
of the joint as specified, shall not vary by more than ±2mm.
e) Unit edges at a joint out of parallel shall not taper by more than 3mm, in overall height of joint
between units.
f) A jog in alignment of a unit edge from one unit to another shall not exceed 2mm.
g) The offset in planes between the vertical faces of adjacent units across any joint shall not
exceed 2mm.
h) Aligning heads shall be incorporated into the units so as to be concealed in the final works.
E50.3200 PROTECTION
E50.3201 Protection of the Works
a) Provide full and adequate protection for the works against the effects of weather, until the
building is watertight, during storage, handling, and transport and during and after installation.
b) Provide full and adequate protection for the works, until Practical Completion of the project,
against damage or accidental spillage of liquids that may discolour the concrete finishes.
c) The protective measures used shall not in any way permanently mark or damage the concrete
finishes.

Contents
G10 PAINTED VISIBLE AND STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
(ARCHITECTURAL REQUIREMENTS) ...........................................................................3
G10.1000 SCOPE, SUBMITTALS, TESTING AND PERFORMANCE ............................. 3
G10.1100 SPECIFICATION AND SCOPE ....................................................................................... 3

G10.1101 Descriptive Works..........................................................................................................................................................................3
G10.1102 Scope of Works..............................................................................................................................................................................3
G10.1103 Particular Interfaces .......................................................................................................................................................................3
G10.1200 DESCRIPTIONS/TYPES................................................................................................... 3
Paint to Internal Exposed Mild Steel.......................................................................................................................................... 3
G10.1201 Paint to Exposed Secondary Steelwork for Types EWS-14, EWS-40C, EWS-20G and EWS-40E....................3
G10.1300 SUBMITTALS AND TESTING .......................................................................................... 4

G10.1301 Tender Response ...........................................................................................................................................................................4
G10.1302 Pre-contract Samples ...................................................................................................................................................................4
G10.1303 Post Contract Samples ................................................................................................................................................................5
G10.1304 Mock-ups..........................................................................................................................................................................................5
G10.1305 Prototypes ........................................................................................................................................................................................5
G10.1306 Benchmark Requirements............................................................................................................................................................5
Testing............................................................................................................................................................................................... 5
G10.1307 Inspection .........................................................................................................................................................................................5
G10.1308 Testing...............................................................................................................................................................................................5
G10.1309 Test Requirements .........................................................................................................................................................................5
G10.1310 Testing Authority.............................................................................................................................................................................5
G10.1311 Products ...........................................................................................................................................................................................5
G10.1312 Defective Work ...............................................................................................................................................................................5
G10.1313 Evidence of Performance .............................................................................................................................................................5
G10.1400 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS................................................................................ 5

General ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 5
G10.1401 Visual Requirements ......................................................................................................................................................................6
G10.1402 General .............................................................................................................................................................................................6
G10.1403 Appearance......................................................................................................................................................................................6
G10.1404 Deleterious Materials.....................................................................................................................................................................6
G10.1405 Gloss Levels ....................................................................................................................................................................................6
G10.1406 Scratch Resistance........................................................................................................................................................................6
G10.1407 Life Expectancy ...............................................................................................................................................................................6
G10.1408 Inspection .........................................................................................................................................................................................7
G10.2000 MATERIALS/PRODUCTS AND FABRICATION ............................................... 7
G10.2200 PROTECTIVE COATING SYSTEMS AND FINISHES.................................................. 7

G10.2201 Source of Materials........................................................................................................................................................................7
G10.2202 Two Pack Zinc Rich Primer, Isocyanate Free Acrylic Polysiloxane, Compliant Coating..............................................7
G10.2203 Coating Materials ...........................................................................................................................................................................7
G10.2204 Preparation Materials and Ancillaries ........................................................................................................................................7
G10.2205 Fire Proofing ....................................................................................................................................................................................7
G10.3000 SITE INSTALLATION............................................................................................. 7
G10.3200 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PROTECTIVE COATING WORK ....................... 8

G10.3201 General .............................................................................................................................................................................................8
G10.3202 Finishes .............................................................................................................................................................................................8
G10.3203 Removal of Coatings by Sandblasting......................................................................................................................................9
G10.3204 Inspection .........................................................................................................................................................................................9
G10.3205 Handling and Storing Coated Steelwork .................................................................................................................................9
G10.3206 Protection .........................................................................................................................................................................................9
G10.3207 Remedial Work ...............................................................................................................................................................................9
G10.3300 PREPARATION FOR PAINTING ..................................................................................... 9

Architectural Specification – T2-T3 External G10/1 Foster and Partners
Stage 2 Tender Issue
25th April 2007Tender Issue 2724/075/07
G10.3301 Preparation Generally....................................................................................................................................................................9

G10.3302 Off-Site Preparation and Painting........................................................................................................................................... 10
G10.3303 Touching-up for Factory-applied Finishes ............................................................................................................................ 10
G10.3304 Inaccessible Surfaces ................................................................................................................................................................ 10
G10.3306 Site Preparation of Shop Painted Steelwork ....................................................................................................................... 11
G10.3400 PAINTING .........................................................................................................................11

G10.3401 Suitability of Conditions............................................................................................................................................................. 11
G10.3402 Applying Coatings....................................................................................................................................................................... 11
G10.3403 Film Thickness.............................................................................................................................................................................. 11
G10.3404 Stripe Coats ................................................................................................................................................................................. 12

G10 PAINTED VISIBLE AND STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

(ARCHITECTURAL REQUIREMENTS)
To be read in conjunction with Section A, the Structural Engineer’s specification and other related
sections of the Specification, Preliminaries and Contract Conditions.
G10.1000 SCOPE, SUBMITTALS, TESTING AND PERFORMANCE
G10.1100 SPECIFICATION AND SCOPE

G10.1101 Descriptive Works
a) Refer to the Structural Engineer's specification for details of steelwork.
b) This particular work section deals with finishes to structural steelwork and shall be read in
conjunction with the Structural Steelwork specification.
c) This Specification includes surface preparation, primers, fillers, etc. and requirements for the
application of coatings to surfaces identified on the Design Drawings and Schedules.
d) Provide the final paint system including requirements for primers, corrosion protection and
decorative coatings.
e) Achieve the visual, aesthetic requirements for all visible painting as described in the
Specification to the satisfaction of the CA.
f) Provide all submittals as specified herein and in the Structural Engineer's specification.
g) Where no product or supplier is indicated in the Specification, propose suitable materials and
systems prior to Contract award which comply with the visual intent and performance criteria
stated and remain fully responsible for the selection of materials/performance requirements.
h) Where a particular product or supplier is indicated in the Specification, complete the installation
using that product, or such other confirmed as acceptable by the CA in writing, whilst remaining
fully responsible for the selection of materials, performance requirements and quality of
workmanship.
G10.1102 Scope of Works

This section of the Specification, when read in conjunction with the Design Drawings and the
Structural Engineer's specification for structural steelwork, provides particular requirements with
respect to the following:
a) Secondary steelwork visible in the finished works as follows:
i) EWS-14 as per Section H11.
ii) EWS-40C as per Section H11.
iii) EWS-20G as per Section H11.
iv) EWS-40E as per Section H11.
b) Protective coatings and finishes to external exposed steelwork.
G10.1103 Particular Interfaces

manufacture.
b) Ensure that all interfaces are fully co-ordinated prior to commencement.
G10.1200 DESCRIPTIONS/TYPES
Paint to Internal Exposed Mild Steel.
G10.1201 Paint to Exposed Secondary Steelwork for Types EWS-14, EWS-40C, EWS-20G and EWS-40E.
a) Location: External exposed secondary steelwork incorporated into Types EWS-14, EWS-40C,
EWS-20G and EWS-40E in Section H11.
b) Painting:
i) Surface preparation shall remove all rust, scale and surface contamination to leave a

surface equivalent in cleanliness to SA 2.5 quality of BS EN ISO 8501: Part 1. In general

this shall be achieved by acid pickling, except where the presence of paint, oil, grease,
welding slag, etc. renders this ineffective, and in all weld areas, the steel shall be locally
blast cleaned to SA 2.5 quality of BS EN ISO 8501: Part 1.
ii) Paint type: Two pack high solids zinc rich primer, isocyanate free acrylic polysiloxane
compliant coating.
iii) Paint System manufacturer: International Coatings or Jotun Ltd., or acceptable equivalent.
iv) Degrease with recommended degreasing solution and flash blast or abrade as
recommended by the manufacturer, rinse and allow to dry.
v) Steels shall receive a factory applied primer as recommended by the manufacturer. Dry
Film Thickness: 75 microns minimum. Colour: Grey. Special Requirements: VOC: 189
grms/ litre Volume Solids: 73%.
vi) Shop Top Coat:
• Dry film thickness (nominal): 125 microns.
• Colour: To be confirmed.
• Special Requirements: VOC: 165 grms/ litre Volume Solids: 76%.
• Gloss level of finish coat: Matt finish. The required matt/ gloss percentage of 30%
gloss: 70% matt. To be confirmed by the CA.
c) Site treatment:
i) Transport and erection damage shall be made good as follows:
• Small chips and damage back to bare steel shall be wire brushed to Swedish
Standard ST3.
• Touch up damage to primer to equal the specified microns nominal dry film
thickness.
• Touch up by brush application of top coatings as recommended by the
manufacturer.
G10.1300 SUBMITTALS AND TESTING

Tender Submittals
G10.1301 Tender Response

Specification.
with dimensions.
i) Technical data including inspection proposals, workmanship and application methods,
touching-up proposals, testing data and material properties including generic descriptions
of materials for all products to be used.
ii) Full details of corrosion treatments, primers and all coating systems, materials and
suppliers where different from those specified.
iii) Confirmation that the specified gloss/ matt percentage can be achieved.
iv) Details of life predicted expectancy details/ periods up to and after first maintenance,
including a specification for maintenance and recoating (by others).
v) Full information relating to Health and Safety, including details of any hazardous materials.
G10.1302 Pre-contract Samples

Sufficient samples of the following, including relevant trade literature and technical specifications,
shall be provided in accordance with Section A.4000:

300mm x 300mm sample of each type to specified substrate.
G10.1303 Post Contract Samples

In accordance with Section A.4000, post contract samples of the following shall be provided:
Sample of flat plate (approximately 500mm square) coated with each type of protective coating and
architectural finish specified. Following acceptance this sample shall be kept at the works and used
as a reference to establish consistency of finished work during the course of the application and will
be a point of reference regarding quality of finish to be achieved.
G10.1304 Mock-ups
Not required.
G10.1305 Prototypes
Not required.
G10.1306 Benchmark Requirements

The following quality benchmarks shall be provided in accordance with Section A.4000:
First 9m² or 5m of each type in location to be agreed.
Testing
G10.1307 Inspection
Permit the CA, and/or an appointed independent inspection authority, to inspect the work at all
reasonable times and at all places where it is being carried out. Provide all facilities, hand tools,
lighting, etc. as necessary to ensure adequate inspection.
G10.1308 Testing
Arrange for testing to be carried out as directed by the CA. Prepare any necessary test pieces.
Submit copies of all test and examination results to the CA as soon as they are available.
G10.1309 Test Requirements

a) Adhesion testing as specified.
b) Solvent test as specified.
c) Film thickness assessments as specified.
d) All other testing as specified and as applicable.
G10.1310 Testing Authority

An authority to be decided by the CA shall carry out all tests.
G10.1311 Products
When requested by the CA, submit a copy of test certificates for finishes to steelwork.
G10.1312 Defective Work

As soon as possible after any part of the work or any materials are known or suspected to be
defective, submit proposals to the CA for further testing, inspection or replacement and obtain
instructions.
G10.1313 Evidence of Performance

a) If it is proposed to use manufacturers different from those specified, provide technical
information/test certificates to demonstrate that paints meet the requirements of the
Specification.
b) Testing and provision of data does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities regarding
the performance requirements, service life and warranties given.
G10.1400 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

requirements.
General

G10.1401 Visual Requirements

a) The definitions contained in BS 2015 and BS EN ISO 4618 shall be used to define adhesion,
excess fading, non-uniformity of colour, cracking, peeling, pitting or other visual defects. None
of the defects shall be acceptable.
b) Visual requirements shall be based upon samples submitted and agreed.
c) For the purpose of conforming with visual requirements, the work shall be viewed with normal
eyesight from a distance of 2m for colour consistency and excessive fading and 1m for
cracking, pitting and other defects.
G10.1402 General
The work shall maintain the specified appearance and performance for the specified period to first
maintenance period without failure resulting from inappropriate material selection or defects in either
materials or workmanship. Failure shall be defined as excessive fading, excessive non-uniformity of
colour or shade, discolouration, yellowing, cracking, peeling, pitting or other defects identified in BS
2015 and BS EN ISO 4618 within the following limits:
a) Excessive fading: A change in appearance which is perceptible and unacceptable, as
determined by the CA, when visually compared with the original range samples from a distance
of 2m (under the agreed lighting conditions).
b) Cracking, peeling, pitting or other defects that are discernible (by the CA) when viewed from a
distance of 1m, or which result in any corrosion or impairment to the substrate.
c) All finished surfaces shall be subject to visual inspection and be accepted by the CA. No areas
of unfinished material shall be visible in the finished work.
d) Visual requirements shall be based upon samples submitted and agreed.
G10.1403 Appearance
a) All finishes shall be stable, fade resistant and not affected by ultraviolet light. Provide data and
samples for review by the CA.
b) All finishes shall be durable, of uniform texture and colour and be resilient to all known and/ or
specified environmental and pollution effects. This shall include scratching and cigarette smoke
and burns, etc. Submit data and samples for review by the CA.
c) Minor scratches and blemishes shall be repaired using the coating manufacturer's
recommended products and system, matching original finish for colour, texture and gloss.
Repair coatings shall be visually acceptable to the CA. Confirmation shall be provided that the
damaged finish complies in all respects to the requirements of the Specification. Guarantee in
writing that the damaged or defective coating is satisfactory for the proposed remedial paint
system. Employ an independent finishing consultant to carry out an inspection and any
necessary tests and supply a full report to the CA.
d) All finishes shall be within the limits of the agreed samples and without irregularities or
distortions. Fixings, stiffeners, etc. which are not intended to be visible shall be treated so that
there is no discontinuity in the finished surface appearance.
G10.1404 Deleterious Materials

All materials, constituent parts of the painting and protective coating systems, primers and cleansing
agents, etc. shall be lead free. See also Section A for Hazardous Materials.
G10.1405 Gloss Levels

Specular gloss levels specified shall be measured in accordance with BS EN ISO 2813.
G10.1406 Scratch Resistance

Paints used shall comply with the minimum requirements of BS EN ISO 1518 “Scratch test”.
G10.1407 Life Expectancy

a) Life expectancy for the decorative coatings to first maintenance shall be a minimum of 15 years
b) The maintenance procedure for the decorative finishes for the steelwork paint/ protective
coatings systems shall be clarified/ confirmed by the Contractor at Tender stage. The paint/
coating manufacturer shall provide a written specification at the time of Tender for recoating at
the end of the life expectancy period including time for reapplication.

G10.1408 Inspection
a) Together with the applicator, where Site coats are to be applied, alert the paint manufacturer
seven days prior to the start of the application programme and permit the paint manufacturer to
inspect the work in progress and prepare inspection reports in accordance with the standard
conditions of Contract. The paint manufacturer shall forward a copy of any inspection report
direct to the CA.
b) Technical support from the paint manufacturer shall not relieve the Contractor of his contractual
responsibility to ensure that the coatings are applied in accordance with the Specification.
Where the paint manufacturer does not have an inspection/quality control support system, then
employ an independent testing authority to verify compliance of the coating systems with the
Specification.
G10.2000 MATERIALS/PRODUCTS AND FABRICATION
G10.2200 PROTECTIVE COATING SYSTEMS AND FINISHES

G10.2201 Source of Materials
a) Coating materials shall be obtained from one source and the CA shall be notified of the
selected manufacturer before the works commence.
b) All materials used shall be as recommended for the intended application and a warranty shall be
provided from the manufacturer for the particular surface and the conditions of exposure. They
shall be compatible with each other.
G10.2202 Two Pack Zinc Rich Primer, Isocyanate Free Acrylic Polysiloxane, Compliant Coating
a) Location: Internal exposed steelwork.
b) Shop primer:
i) Dry film thickness: 75 microns minimum.
ii) Colour: Grey.
iii) Special requirements: Maximum V.O.C. 189gms/litre. Volume solids: 73%.
c) Shop topcoat:
i) Dry film thickness: 100 microns minimum.
ii) Colour: As required by the CA.
iii) Special requirements: Maximum V.O.C. 165gms/litre. Volume solids: 76%.
d) Refer to the manufacturer’s recommended working procedures to be read in conjunction with
the technical data sheet and material safety data sheet. Provided information to be strictly
adhered to.
G10.2203 Coating Materials

a) Ensure, whenever possible, that coating materials are from one manufacturing batch. Where
more than one batch is to be used, keep separate, allocate to distinct parts or areas of the
work, and inform the CA accordingly.
b) Check that all coating materials to be used are recommended by their manufacturers for the
particular surface and conditions of exposure, and that they are compatible with each other.
c) Ensure that coating materials are obtained from only one manufacturer unless specified
otherwise. Inform the CA of the selected manufacturer at an early date.
G10.2204 Preparation Materials and Ancillaries

Preparation, materials and ancillaries shall be of the types recommended by their manufacturers and
the protective coating manufacturer for the surfaces being prepared.
G10.2205 Fire Proofing

Propose a proprietary product that carries all the necessary test and performance guarantees. Submit
samples of the finished fire proofing to the CA for review before work commences on Site.
G10.3000 SITE INSTALLATION

G10.3200 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PROTECTIVE COATING WORK

G10.3201 General
a) Work shall comply with BS 8000: Part 12, BS 6150, BS EN ISO 12944 and any additional
requirements of the Specification.
b) All coatings shall be applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
c) The paint/ coatings applicator shall confirm in writing that the cleaners and paint/coatings
system used will not affect any surrounding sealants or construction elements. Provide written
confirmation by the manufacturer regarding compatibility.
d) When removing or partially removing coatings, the methods used shall not damage the
substrate or adjacent surfaces nor adversely affect subsequent coatings.
e) Materials used in preparation shall be of the types recommended by their manufacturers and by
the coating manufacturer for the situation and surfaces being prepared.
f) Surfaces shall be fully rubbed down and prepared. The primer and corrosion protection coats of
any steelwork shall be touched up after removing, or partially removing, existing coatings. The
methods used shall not damage the substrate or adjacent surfaces, nor adversely affect
subsequent coatings. The preparatory coatings used shall be of the types recommended by the
coating manufacturer for the situation and surfaces being prepared to receive new finishes.
g) Oil based stoppers/fillers shall be applied after priming; water based stoppers/fillers shall be
used before priming unless otherwise recommended in writing by the manufacturer. Water
based stoppers/fillers shall be patched after priming.
h) There shall be an interval of at least the periods recommended in writing by the manufacturer
between successive coats of paint.
i) Application of coatings shall not occur until the surfaces and conditions within any given area to
receive the specified coatings are acceptable.
j) Unless otherwise agreed or specified, all coats to be spray applied in thicknesses and layers as
specified in accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure curing and
resilience of coatings as soon as possible.
k) Apply coatings evenly to give a smooth finish of uniform thickness and colour, free from brush
marks, nibs, sags, runs and other defects.
l) Keep all surfaces clean and free from dust during coating curing and drying. Adequately protect
completed work from damage until full resilience is achieved.
m) Brushes shall comply with the requirements of BS 2992.
n) Brushing generally shall comply with the requirements of BS 6150 and BS 2992.
o) Roller application shall be in accordance with the recommendations of BS 6150.
p) Spray application shall be in accordance with the recommendations of BS 6150 generally.
Submit details of the spraying equipment for review by the CA. Comply with all Health and
Safety requirements for spraying.
q) All surfaces shall be keyed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's written
recommendations to accept the subsequent paint/ protective coating system by mechanical or
chemical etching wherever appropriate. The use of the adhesion promotion systems shall be
selected to comply with the requirements of the refinishing system specification and methods of
application.
G10.3202 Finishes
a) Once applied the finish shall not in any way slump, flow, crack, flake, split, sag, pit, bubble,
blister, float, effloresce, craze, shrink, break, wrinkle, crinkle, yellow, chalk, fade, discolour,
powder, stain, bleed or lose its finish or gloss in any way, taking full account of the extremes of
all atmospheric and environmental conditions for the service life specified and during
construction.
b) Paints shall not be overthinned so as to change in any way the surface colour, gloss, opacity or
finish and nothing shall be added to paints to change in any way the consistency or constitution.
Thinning shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations and
the express agreement of the CA.
c) All necessary controls shall be undertaken to ensure uniformity in manufacture and to maintain

uniformity of all surface finishes for the works.

d) All finishes shall be durable, of uniform texture and colour and shall be resilient.
e) All finishes shall be uniform in texture, colour and appearance within the limits of the agreed
samples and without irregularities or distortion. When applying matt coatings apply brush
strokes and lay off using criss-cross strokes (switching) rather than in one direction. Specular
gloss levels shall be tested to BS EN ISO 2813. Finish coatings shall match the colour and
sheen of the agreed control samples.
f) There shall be an interval of at least 24 hours between successive coats of painting, or as
recommended by the manufacturer.
g) Zinc rich primers shall comply with BS 4652.
G10.3203 Removal of Coatings by Sandblasting

Removal of existing coatings, by sandblasting, shall be carried out by specialists using abrasives and
pressures appropriate to the substrate. Take all necessary precautions to minimise dust and residues.
G10.3204 Inspection
a) Applicator to alert the paint manufacturer where their paint system is being applied to inspect
works in progress and prepare inspection reports in accordance with their standard conditions
of contract. The manufacturer to forward copies of any inspection reports direct to the CA.
Technical support from the manufacturer does not relieve the applicator of his contractual
responsibility to ensure that the coatings are applied in accordance with the Specification.
b) Notify the CA of projected dates for start of surface preparation and coating.
c) Give the CA at least 7 days' notice before coated members or components leave the works.
G10.3205 Handling and Storing Coated Steelwork

a) Use methods and equipment that minimise chafing, chipping and other damage to coated
components.
b) Ensure an adequate drying/curing period for each coat before handling.
c) Use suitable packings, lashings, lifting harnesses, nylon slings, rubber protected chains and
chocks, etc.
d) Stack coated components clear of the ground, separated by timber chocks, so that ponding
does not occur.
G10.3206 Protection
a) Adequately protect freshly applied surface coatings from damage.
b) Exhibit `Wet Paint' signs and provide protective barriers where necessary.
c) Adequately protect surfaces adjacent to those being covered.
G10.3207 Remedial Work

a) Ensure that early degradation of coatings by blistering, peeling, flaking, cracking, lack of
adhesion, etc. is made good by complete removal, preparation and reapplication of all coats, as
instructed.
b) Ensure that inadequate dry film thickness or surface defects due to inclement weather may,
depending on the type of paint, be remedied by rubbing down and applying further coat(s), as
instructed.
c) Any painted area mechanically damaged in transit or at site is to be hand or power tool cleaned
to St2 standard (ISO 8501: Part 1). Touch up bare areas with surface tolerant epoxy to meet
original works dry film thickness followed by specified topcoat where applicable leaving a neat
continuous and flat finish. Adhere to the manufacturer of the paint system’s recommendations
regarding appropriate method of application.
d) Where damage to coatings or subsequent surface preparation has exposed bare metal, ensure
that it is thoroughly cleaned and primed within two hours.
G10.3300 PREPARATION FOR PAINTING

G10.3301 Preparation Generally

a) Ensure that the surface preparation is sufficient to meet the Design and service life expectancy
of the Specification and is carried out strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
b) Comply with BS 6150 and BS 8000: Part 12, Section 2 and additional requirements in the
Specification.
c) When removing or partially removing coatings, use methods that will not damage the substrate
or adjacent surfaces, nor adversely affect subsequent coatings.
d) Materials used in preparation to be types recommended by their manufacturers and the coating
manufacturer for the situation and surfaces being prepared.
e) Prevent or control exposure of operatives to dust, vapour and fumes exceeding occupational
exposure standards set in the current Health and Safety Executive (HSE) document EH40.
f) Substrates shall be sufficiently dry in depth to suit the coating to be applied.
g) Remove efflorescence salts from surfaces. Repeat removal if efflorescence recurs.
h) Clean off dirt, grease and oil from surfaces. If contamination of surfaces/ substrates has
occurred, obtain instructions before proceeding.
i) Unless otherwise specified or agreed, cleaning shall be carried out with an anti-silicone solution
with lint free cloths, the solution shall have a neutral pH to ensure that it is not detrimental,
should any spillage occur.
j) Remove dust and particles from dry abrasive preparation of surfaces.
k) Remove residues from wet preparation of surfaces by rinsing with clean water, wiping and
allowing to dry.
l) Where the preparation of the metal exposes bare steel or zinc galvanising, either chromate
passivation, phosphate treatment, mordant (zinc only), as applicable or an appropriate etch
primer shall be applied before the chosen paint/ protective coating system is used.
G10.3302 Off-Site Preparation and Painting

Carry out off-Site preparation and painting under cover and in properly lit, heated and ventilated
conditions. Select the sequence of working from one of the following and inform the CA before
starting work:
a) Fabricate, blast clean and prime as specified.
b) Blast clean, fabricate and prime as specified (immediately before priming remove flash rust with
a light overall sweep blast).
c) Blast clean and prime with a weldable prefabrication primer recommended in writing by the
manufacturer of the specified primer. Fabricate and prime as specified.
G10.3303 Touching-up for Factory-applied Finishes

a) Comply with the requirements of BS EN ISO 12944: Parts 1-8 and BS 6150.
b) Any areas of transit or erection damage shall be touched up in accordance with the paint
system manufacturer's recommendations to leave surfaces indistinguishable from the factory-
applied finish.
c) Ensure that Site-applied touch-up colours match exactly.
d) Ensure that protective base coats are repaired to provide full corrosion protection to equal the
factory corrosion protection.
e) Ensure that surfaces are clean and free from dirt, grease or any deleterious substances
incompatible with the painting system.
G10.3304 Inaccessible Surfaces

Ensure that the sequence of working shall be such as to ensure that surfaces inaccessible after
assembly receive the full specified treatment and coating system including, if necessary, local shop
application of Site coatings.
G10.3305 Blast Cleaning for Painting
a) Ensure that steel complies with Sa 2.5 preparation grade (ISO 8501: Part 1) at the time of
blasting as follows:

i) Dry blasting: Initial rust grade A or B.

ii) Wet blasting: Initial rust grade A, B or C.
b) Thoroughly degrease. Remove millscale by chipping, grinding and/or heat treatment.
c) Blast clean to Sa 2.5 quality as ISO 8501: Part 1 preparation grade, and control quality of
preparation in accordance with BS 5493, BS EN ISO 12944: Parts 1-8 and BS EN ISO
14713. Use an abrasive of a suitable type and size, as recommended in writing by the paint
system manufacturer(s), free from contamination by fines, water and oil. Remove abrasive
residues.
d) Remove all surface defects likely to be detrimental to the protective painting system, including:
i) Defects in the steel, including cracks, surface laminations, shelling and deep pitting as
required by BS 7668, BS EN 10029, BS EN 10025: Parts 1-6 and BS EN 10210: Part
1.
ii) Defects resulting from fabrication, including fins at cuts, burrs, sharp edges and weld
spatter.
e) Apply primer as soon as practicable and while the surface is still in a condition acceptable to
the primer manufacturer.
G10.3306 Site Preparation of Shop Painted Steelwork

Carry out all necessary remedial work as specified and prepare all surfaces by abrading and/or
washing down as recommended in writing by the manufacturer before applying coats.
G10.3400 PAINTING
G10.3401 Suitability of Conditions
a) Do not apply coatings:
i) To surfaces affected by moisture or frost.
ii) Unless the steel temperature is at least 3°C above the dew point with conditions stable or
improving.
iii) Unless the relative humidity is below 85%.
iv) When heat is likely to cause blistering or wrinkling.
b) Take all necessary precautions including restrictions on working hours, providing temporary
protection and allowing extra drying time, to ensure that coatings are not adversely affected by
climatic conditions before, during and after application.
c) Take responsibility for the application of coatings and ensure the suitability of surfaces and
conditions within any given area.
G10.3402 Applying Coatings

a) Ensure that adjacent coats of the same material are of a different tint to ensure that each coat
provides complete coverage.
b) Multiple coats of the same material to be of a different tint to ensure that each coat provides
complete coverage. Choice of colour for the undercoat shall be made to complement the
finished topcoat colour to avoid any colour variation showing through the topcoat.
c) Apply coatings to clean, rust free, suitably dry surfaces in dry atmospheric conditions and after
any previous coats have cured adequately.
d) Apply coatings evenly to give a smooth finish of uniform thickness and colour, free from brush
marks, nibs, sags, runs and other defects.
e) Keep all surfaces clean and free from dust during coating and drying. Adequately protect
completed work from damage.
G10.3403 Film Thickness

a) Check the thickness of each coat during application using a wet film thickness wheel or comb
in accordance with BS EN ISO 2808.
b) After each coat has dried, measure the total accumulated dry film thickness using a magnetic or
electromagnetic meter, checked against standard shims and recalibrated regularly against a

smooth steel reference plate, the number and position of measurements to be as directed by
the CA. Carry out all measurements in the presence of the CA, unless otherwise directed.
c) Over any square metre of coating ensure that the average accumulated dry film thickness is
equal to or exceeds the specified thickness, with no reading less than 75% of the specified
thickness. Where a minimum dry film thickness has been specified, any areas found to be below
the specified figure shall be made good at no extra cost to the Client.
d) If at any stage the accumulated dry film thickness is deficient, apply additional coats at no extra
cost.
e) The dry film thickness of the topcoat shall be sufficient to give an even, solid, opaque
appearance, irrespective of the number of applied topcoats necessary to achieve cosmetic
obliteration of the undercoat. The full specified topcoat dry film thickness shall be maintained
notwithstanding any greater than specified undercoat dry film thickness.
G10.3404 Stripe Coats

Stripe coating of the welds and the corners of any flanges or edges, nuts and bolt heads, rough weld
seams and areas that are difficult to access shall be carried out by brush prior to the spray application
of the specified primer.
End of Section

Contents
H11 ROOF AND WALL SYSTEMS............................................................................5
H11.1000 SCOPE, SUBMITTALS, TESTING AND PERFORMANCE ............................. 5
H11.1100 SPECIFICATION AND SCOPE ....................................................................................... 5

H11.1101 Descriptive Works..........................................................................................................................................................................5
H11.1102 Scope of Works..............................................................................................................................................................................5
H11.1103 Interfaces ..........................................................................................................................................................................................5
H11.1200 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS/TYPES.................................................................................. 5

General ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 5
H11.1201 The contractor is to make general provision for: ...................................................................................................................5
Podium Levels of Tower External Wall Cladding Systems.................................................................................................. 6
H11.1202 Type EWS-11 Cladding System ...............................................................................................................................................6
Tower Wall Cladding Systems ................................................................................................................................................... 9
H11.1207 Type EWS-20A Cladding System – Fixed Unit.....................................................................................................................9
H11.1208 Type EWS-20B Cladding System – Opening Unit ..............................................................................................................9
H11.1209 Type EWS-20C Cladding System – Thermal Tube Unit.....................................................................................................9
H11.1210 Type EWS-20D Cladding System ......................................................................................................................................... 10
H11.1211 Type EWS-20E Cladding System with Fixed Stainless Steel Louvre .......................................................................... 10
H11.1212 Type EWS-20F Cladding System – Full Height................................................................................................................. 10
H11.1213 Type EWS-20G Cladding System - Skirt ............................................................................................................................ 11
H11.1214 Type EWS-40A Cladding System.......................................................................................................................................... 11
H11.1215 Type EWS-40B Cladding System ......................................................................................................................................... 12
H11.1216 Type EWS-40C Cladding System – Full Height (Tower 3) ............................................................................................ 12
H11.1217 Type EWS-40D Cladding System - Skirt............................................................................................................................. 13
H11.1218 Type EWS-40E Cladding System......................................................................................................................................... 13
Roofglazing Systems.................................................................................................................................................................. 13
H11.1219 Type RFL-20 Roofglazing System .......................................................................................................................................... 13
Shading Devices.......................................................................................................................................................................... 14
H11.1220 Type SHD-10 Shading Device ................................................................................................................................................ 14
Panels to Columns...................................................................................................................................................................... 14
H11.1221 Type PEN-43 Aluminium panels to concrete columns. ..................................................................................................... 14
Doors .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 14
H11.1222 Type EDR-20 Frameless Revolving Door ............................................................................................................................. 14
H11.1223 Type EDR-21 Metal Framed Doors........................................................................................................................................ 14
H11.1224 Type EDR-22 Aluminium Doors .............................................................................................................................................. 14
H11.1225 Type EDR-23 Emergency Exit Doors..................................................................................................................................... 14
H11.1226 Type EDR-24 Revolving Doors................................................................................................................................................ 14
H11.1227 Type EDR-25 Emergency Exit Doors..................................................................................................................................... 14
H11.1228 Type EDR-26 Sliding Doors..................................................................................................................................................... 15
H11.1229 Type EDR-27 Loured Bi-Fold Door........................................................................................................................................ 15
H11.1300 SUBMITTALS AND TESTING ........................................................................................15

Tender Submittals ....................................................................................................................................................................... 15
H11.1301 Tender Response ........................................................................................................................................................................ 15
Samples, Mock-ups, Prototypes and Quality Benchmarks .............................................................................................. 15
H11.1302 Pre-contract Samples ................................................................................................................................................................ 15
H11.1303 Post Contract Samples ............................................................................................................................................................. 16
H11.1304 Mock-up Requirements ............................................................................................................................................................. 16
H11.1305 Prototype Requirements............................................................................................................................................................ 16
H11.1306 Benchmark Requirements......................................................................................................................................................... 16
Testing............................................................................................................................................................................................ 16
H11.1307 Previous/ Comparative Testing Certification........................................................................................................................ 16
H11.1308 Testing of Prototypes ................................................................................................................................................................. 17
H11.1309 Standard Test Apparatus and Calibration ............................................................................................................................ 17
H11.1310 Air Permeability Tests................................................................................................................................................................. 17
H11.1311 Façade Floor Air Leakage Testing .......................................................................................................................................... 17
H11.1312 Weatherproofing and Watertightness Tests........................................................................................................................ 18
H11.1313 Wind Resistance Tests.............................................................................................................................................................. 18
H11.1314 Impact Testing.............................................................................................................................................................................. 19
H11.1315 Off-Site Test Sequence............................................................................................................................................................. 19
H11.1316 Acoustic Testing – Initial Advance Test ................................................................................................................................ 19
Architectural Specification – T2-T3 External H11/1 Foster and Partners

H11.1317 Structural Silicone Testing and Maintenance ...................................................................................................................... 19

H11.1317 Site Hose Testing........................................................................................................................................................................ 21
H11.1318 Testing of Fixings......................................................................................................................................................................... 21
H11.1319 Thermal Cycling Tests................................................................................................................................................................ 21
H11.1320 Building Movements/Racking Procedure Tests .................................................................................................................. 21
H11.1321 Fire Tests ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 21
H11.1322 Results and Certificates ............................................................................................................................................................ 21
H11.1400 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS..............................................................................21

General .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 21
H11.1401 General .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 21
Structural Performance.............................................................................................................................................................. 22
H11.1402 Specific Movements ................................................................................................................................................................... 22
H11.1403 Deflections .................................................................................................................................................................................... 22
H11.1404 Design Loads ............................................................................................................................................................................... 22
H11.1405 Seismic Loads.............................................................................................................................................................................. 23
H11.1406 Imposed Gravity Loads .............................................................................................................................................................. 23
H11.1407 Live Loads ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 23
H11.1408 Imposed Movements .................................................................................................................................................................. 23
H11.1409 Wind/Air Pressure Loads.......................................................................................................................................................... 23
H11.1410 Thermal Movement...................................................................................................................................................................... 24
H11.1411 Inertial Loads ................................................................................................................................................................................ 24
H11.1412 Exceptional Loads ....................................................................................................................................................................... 24
H11.1413 Strength of Doors........................................................................................................................................................................ 24
Environmental Performance...................................................................................................................................................... 25
H11.1414 Moisture Movement .................................................................................................................................................................... 25
H11.1415 Thermal Performance Requirements ...................................................................................................................................... 25
H11.1416 Solar Performance Requirements ........................................................................................................................................... 25
H11.1417 Air Permeability/Infiltration......................................................................................................................................................... 27
H11.1418 Condensation ............................................................................................................................................................................... 28
H11.1419 Capillarity....................................................................................................................................................................................... 28
H11.1420 Weather and Water Penetration Resistance ....................................................................................................................... 28
H11.1421 Local Factors ................................................................................................................................................................................ 28
Acoustic ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 28
H11.1422 Acoustic Performance Requirements .................................................................................................................................... 28
H11.1423 Flanking Transmission ................................................................................................................................................................ 29
Fire .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 29
H11.1424 General .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 29
H11.1425 Surface Spread of Flame........................................................................................................................................................... 29
H11.1426 Fire and Smoke Stopping ......................................................................................................................................................... 29
H11.1427 Fire Resistance ............................................................................................................................................................................ 29
H11.1428 Joint System Required ............................................................................................................................................................... 29
H11.1429 Fire Stopping between Floors.................................................................................................................................................. 30
Durability........................................................................................................................................................................................ 30
H11.1430 General .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 30
H11.1431 Impact and Abrasion Resistance............................................................................................................................................. 30
H11.1432 Demountability.............................................................................................................................................................................. 30
Components ................................................................................................................................................................................. 30
H11.1433 Primary Components.................................................................................................................................................................. 30
H11.1434 Secondary Components............................................................................................................................................................ 30
Services ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 31
H11.1435 Cables within Box Sections...................................................................................................................................................... 31
H11.1436 Opening Lights ............................................................................................................................................................................ 31
Blinds.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 31
H11.1437 General .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 31
H11.2000 SYSTEMS, MATERIALS AND FABRICATION ................................................31
H11.2100 SYSTEMS .........................................................................................................................31

Wall Cladding Systems ............................................................................................................................................................. 31
H11.2101 Framing to Screen Cladding .................................................................................................................................................... 31
H11.2102 Cast Aluminium Screens to Cladding Systems .................................................................................................................. 31
H11.2103 Insulated Backing Wall System ............................................................................................................................................... 32
H11.2104 Stainless Steel Louvres ............................................................................................................................................................. 32
Glazing ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 33
H11.2105 Glass Types (Refer to section Z25 for general glass clauses) ....................................................................................... 33
Blinds.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 33
H11.2106 Venetian Blinds ............................................................................................................................................................................ 33
H11.2107 Vertical Slat Blinds...................................................................................................................................................................... 34
H11.2108 Floor Channel Profiles................................................................................................................................................................ 35
H11.2109 Roof Channel/Guide track Profiles......................................................................................................................................... 35

H11.2200 MATERIALS ......................................................................................................................36

General .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 36
H11.2201 Fabric Specifications.................................................................................................................................................................. 36
Frames............................................................................................................................................................................................ 36
H11.2202 Glass Retaining Frames Generally ......................................................................................................................................... 36
H11.2203 Glass Retaining Frames (Structural Silicone Glazing System) ....................................................................................... 37
H11.2204 Glass Retaining Frames with Dry Pressure Glazing System ........................................................................................... 38
H11.2205 Stainless Steel Framing/Profiles ............................................................................................................................................. 38
H11.2206 Solid Insulated Aluminium Faced Panels .............................................................................................................................. 39
H11.2207 Glass-To-Glass Corners........................................................................................................................................................... 39
Joints............................................................................................................................................................................................... 39
H11.2208 Movement Joints .......................................................................................................................................................................... 39
Windows ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 39
H11.2209 Opening Windows...................................................................................................................................................................... 39
Doors .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 40
H11.2210 General .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 40
H11.2211 Frameless Glass Revolving Door Assemblies ..................................................................................................................... 41
H11.2212 Framed Glazed Doors ................................................................................................................................................................ 42
H11.2213 Ironmongery .................................................................................................................................................................................. 43
Glazing ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 43
H11.2214 Systems Generally ...................................................................................................................................................................... 43
H11.2215 Inclined Glazing ........................................................................................................................................................................... 43
GRC................................................................................................................................................................................................ 43
H11.2216 GRC Panels and screens to cladding system Generally.................................................................................................. 44
Copings ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 45
H11.2217 Copings Generally ...................................................................................................................................................................... 45
Flashings........................................................................................................................................................................................ 46
H11.2218 Flashings........................................................................................................................................................................................ 46
Fixings............................................................................................................................................................................................. 46
H11.2219 Fixings Requirements ................................................................................................................................................................. 46
H11.2220 Fixing Directly to Concrete Structure..................................................................................................................................... 46
H11.2221 Fixing Directly to Steel Structure............................................................................................................................................. 47
Sealants and Gaskets ................................................................................................................................................................ 47
H11.2222 Sealants ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 47
H11.2223 Gaskets.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 47
Miscellaneous Materials............................................................................................................................................................. 47
H11.2224 Metal Studwork............................................................................................................................................................................ 47
H11.2225 Breather Membrane .................................................................................................................................................................... 48
H11.2226 Vapour Barrier .............................................................................................................................................................................. 48
H11.2227 Damp-proof Membrane ............................................................................................................................................................. 48
H11.2228 Insulation........................................................................................................................................................................................ 48
H11.2229 Standard Plasterboard............................................................................................................................................................... 48
H11.2230 Fire Resistant Plasterboard ...................................................................................................................................................... 48
H11.2231 Moisture Resistant Plasterboard ............................................................................................................................................. 49
H11.2232 Impact Resistant Plasterboard................................................................................................................................................. 49
H11.2233 Foilbacked Plasterboard............................................................................................................................................................ 49
H11.2234 Acoustic Plasterboard................................................................................................................................................................ 49
H11.2235 External Grade Board................................................................................................................................................................. 49
Cladding Support Structure..................................................................................................................................................... 49
H11.2236 Supports – All Architectural Steelwork ................................................................................................................................. 49
H11.2300 FABRICATION .................................................................................................................49

H11.2301 Fabrication of Curtain Walling Systems................................................................................................................................ 49
H11.2302 Structural Glazing........................................................................................................................................................................ 49
H11.2303 Tolerances for Manufacture and Element Fabrication ....................................................................................................... 50
H11.2304 Welding Procedures................................................................................................................................................................... 50
H11.2305 Tolerances for Manufacture ...................................................................................................................................................... 50
H11.2306 Tolerances for Component Assembly.................................................................................................................................... 50
H11.2307 Tolerances for Manufacture of GRC Panels ........................................................................................................................ 50
H11.2308 Manufacture for GRC................................................................................................................................................................. 51
H11.2400 FINISHES ..........................................................................................................................51

H11.2401 Colours........................................................................................................................................................................................... 51
H11.2500 ANCILLARIES ..................................................................................................................51

Lightning Protection and Earth Bonding ............................................................................................................................... 51
H11.2501 General .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 51
Fixing Brackets for Blinds ......................................................................................................................................................... 51
H11.2502 General .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 51
Cradle Restraints......................................................................................................................................................................... 51
H11.2503 Cradle Restraint Sockets .......................................................................................................................................................... 51

H11.3000 SITE INSTALLATION...........................................................................................52
H11.3100 WORKMANSHIP .............................................................................................................52

H11.3101 Generally........................................................................................................................................................................................ 52
H11.3102 Blinds Generally........................................................................................................................................................................... 52
H11.3103 Quality of GRC Finishes............................................................................................................................................................ 52
H11.3200 TOLERANCES .................................................................................................................53

H11.3201 Installation...................................................................................................................................................................................... 53
H11.3202 Site Erection ................................................................................................................................................................................. 53

H11 ROOF AND WALL SYSTEMS

To be read in conjunction with Section A and other related sections of the Specification, Preliminaries
and Contract Conditions.
H11.1000 SCOPE, SUBMITTALS, TESTING AND PERFORMANCE
H11.1100 SPECIFICATION AND SCOPE

H11.1101 Descriptive Works
a) For design and general performance requirements, refer to Section A of the Specification.
Specific design and performance requirements are as defined in the particular trade
sections.
b) Complete the Detailed Design, manufacture, supply, install and warrant the works whilst
Specification.
c) Where no material, product or supplier is indicated in the Specification, propose suitable
d) Where a particular material, product or supplier is indicated in the Specification, such
material, product or supplier shall be deemed indicative representing the CA’s design
intent only. The Contractor may complete the installation using that product, or such other
confirmed as acceptable by the CA in writing, but shall remain fully responsible for the
Detailed Design and performance of the works.
H11.1102 Scope of Works

a) Framing systems.
b) Stick built curtain wall systems.
c) Unitised glazed curtain wall systems.
d) Structural silicone bonded curtain wall systems.
e) Open pattern screens.
f) Roofglazing systems.
g) Integrated grilles, louvres and spandrel panels.
h) Integrated opening lights, glazed pivoting/ hinged and sliding doors including all ironmongery.
H11.1103 Interfaces
manufacture.
H11.1200 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS/TYPES

General
H11.1201 The contractor is to make general provision for:

a) Concealed cable channels/conduits within the wall and roof facades which are to be accessible
fro maintenance/repair.
b) Fixing of external lighting and aviation lights between panels.
c) Coordination and interfacing. Refer to M&E specification and documentation for external lighting
requirements.
d) Restraints for cleaning/maintenance cradle. Refer to the Cleaning and Maintenance
documentation for requirements of restraints.

e) Lightening protection systems.

Podium Levels of Tower External Wall Cladding Systems
H11.1202 Type EWS-11 Cladding System

a) Open screen system with various patterns to screens. Screens to be fixed to framing with
concealed fixings/bracketry. Full height or floating mullions to have precast concrete capping
profiles to either side and clad on front and back with GRC to match the finish of the precast
concrete mullion capping as indicated on the design drawings. Mullions are to have aluminium
cladding on the internal side with the front face (external side) of the mullion capped with a
precast concrete profile capping reinforced with stainless steel with aluminium end caps to the
base as indicated on the Design Drawings. Screens to be manufactured from GRC panels with
the required patterns as shown on the design drawings:
b) The system to include precast concrete channel profile at floor levels as shown on the Design
Drawings.
c) Finishes:
i) Stainless steel framing/profiles to have shot peened or brushed finish.
ii) All aluminium to be colour anodised. Colours to be confirmed.
iii) Non-visible framing/metalwork to be stainless steel or to be suitably corrosion protected.
iv) GRC to be self coloured and finished as specified to accepted samples. Colour to be
confirmed.
v) Precast concrete capping profiles to mullions to be self coloured and finished as
specified to accepted samples. Colour to be confirmed. Refer to section E50 for precast
concrete.
d) Pattern variations to screens to be as shown on the Design Drawings.
e) Bird mesh/spikes to be discreetly integrated as indicated on design drawings
f) There shall be a sufficient expansion joint between the precast concrete caps and the GRC to
the front and back of the mullion including a suitable sealant. Refer to section Z22 for sealants.

a) External aluminium curtain wall with integrated double glazed units. The system to be faced with
integrated open screen cladding similar to EWS-11 and precast concrete capping profiles to
mullions. The system to comprise:
i) Extruded aluminium framing (steel core and brackets as required) to profiles as shown on
the Design Drawings to support double glazing incorporating gaskets, sealants etc as
required.
ii) Precast concrete capping profiles to mullions to be self coloured and finished as
specified to accepted samples. Colour to be confirmed. Refer to section E50 for precast
concrete.
iii) Double glazing type GL-01.(TBC)
b) Windows to be electronically openable (30%) for ventilation. The windows shall also have
provision to be key operated to allow them to be fully openable for cleaning/maintenance
purpose and shall be connected to the ‘Building Management System’ (BMS). Windows at
finished floor level are to be electronically openable/closable for ventilation only and connected
to the BMS, but are not to exceed the back line of the mullion or 100mm whichever is the
lesser. Automatically openable/closable windows shall include anti-trap safety measures to
prevent injury in the event that windows close automatically and trap body parts. Provide all
opening actuators, ironmongery, flashings, drips, seals and associated gaskets, fixings and
bracketry as required to complete the installation.
c) Double glazing to be suited to SSG bonding with black spacers between glass panes.
d) Provide thermal break as shown on the Design Drawings.
e) Open screen system with various patterns to screens. Screens to be fixed to framing
comprising mullions which are to be capped with precast concrete capping profiles reinforced
with stainless steel as indicated on the design drawings, with concealed fixings/bracketry..
Screens to be manufactured from GRC panels with the required patterns as shown on the
design drawings. Refer to section E50 for precast concrete.

f) The system to incorporate insulated spandrel panels within ceiling void as shown on the Design
Drawings comprising aluminium faced composite panels integrated into the curtain walling
system.
g) The system to include precast concrete channel profile at floor levels as shown on the Design
Drawings as specified. Refer to section E50 for precast concrete. Provide insulation, fire
separation and seals behind to seal junctions with floor slabs as shown on the Design Drawings
including provision for expansion and all bracketry, fixings and closure pieces as required.
h) Open screen system with various patterns to screens. Screens to be fixed to framing
comprising solid fabricated stainless steel profiles with concealed fixings/bracketry.
i) Finishes:
i) All aluminium to be colour anodised externally. All internal aluminium to be PVDF coated.
Anodising and RAL colours to be confirmed.
ii) GRC to be self coloured with smooth finished to accepted samples. Colour to be
confirmed.
iii) Refer to section E50 for finish to precast concrete mullion cappings.
j) Pattern variations to screens to be as shown on the Design Drawings.
k) Panels to be set out in a facetted manner as shown on the Design Drawings.
l) Bird mesh/spikes to be discreetly integrated as indicated on design drawings.

a) External cladding system comprising of a solid insulated backing wall system, as specified, with
concealed support framing, fixings/bracketry and with integrated screen cladding similar to
EWS-11. To be fixed into wind post/mullion set into solid wall construction. Provide extruded
aluminium capping piece internally and precast concrete capping profiles reinforced with
stainless steel externally to wind post/mullion, as indicated on the design drawings and in
accordance with the structural engineers documentation. Insulated backing wall system to
include non-combustible insulation within cavity, anodised aluminium panel, all framing
components, bracing, head and base channels, bracketry and fixings, EPDM vapour barrier,
insulation, sealants and packing to ensure a rigid, airtight and watertight installation. Internal
face of system to have double layer of plasterboard.
b) Backing wall system to be thermally and acoustically insulated. Refer to Acoustic Consultant’s
report and Environmental Consultants report for respective insulation requirements.
c) Open screen system with various patterns to screens. Screens to be fixed to framing
comprising solid fabricated stainless steel profiles with concealed fixings/bracketry. Screens to
be manufactured from GRC panels with the required patterns as shown on the Design
Drawings:
d) The system to include precast concrete channel profile at floor levels as shown on the Design
Drawings. Refer to section E50 for precast concrete. Provide insulation, fire separation and
seals behind to seal junctions with floor slabs as shown on the Design Drawings including
provision for expansion and all bracketry, fixings and closure pieces as required.
e) Where required and as indicated on the Design Drawings, the system is required to comprise
screen cladding similar to EWS-11 but facing blockwork construction. Where this occurs, the
GRC panels are required to be fixed to wind posts set within the block wall. Refer to the Design
Drawings for details of wind post requirements.
f) As required and as indicated on the Design Drawings integrate LVR-01 cladding system.
g) Finishes:
i) All aluminium to be colour anodised externally. All internal aluminium to be PVDF coated.
Anodising and RAL colours to be confirmed.
h) Pattern variations to screens to be as shown on the Design Drawings.
i) Backing wall system to incorporate concealed metal stud/framework and be lined either side
with breather water/vapour layer as one membrane to outer face (ie behind the screen).
j) Bird mesh/spikes to be discreetly integrated as shown on design drawings.
k) Refer to section E50 for precast concrete.


a) Double glazed stick built system with including fixed and opening panels.. The system to
comprise:
i) Full height aluminium carrier frame forming back-framing to structurally bonded double
glazing (SSG) with gaskets as required. Framing to also act as drainage channel as
shown on the Design Drawings. RAL and anodising colours to be confirmed. Non-visible
metalwork to be suitably corrosion protected.
ii) System shall be stick built type – double glazing unit with aluminium carrier frame
connected directly to steelwork.
iii) Glazing Type to be GL-05.
iv) Double glazing to be suited to flush SSG bonding with black spacers between glass
panes. Exposed edges to be ground and arrised.
v) Provide setting blocks to internal glass panes to accommodate lateral/parallel movement
of adjacent panes. Refer to the Design Drawings.
vi) System is to include local dead load glazing support and mechanical back-up restraints to
horizontal edges which allow for vertical movement. Refer to the Design Drawings.
vii) Coordinate with Interior Works Package Contractor and provide fixing points for stainless
steel plates and grilles as required by others.
viii) Secondary steelwork with paint finish as Section G10.
b) All external aluminium to be colour anodised. All internal aluminium to be PVDF painted. RAL
colours to be confirmed. Non-visible framing to be corrosion protected.

a) Double glazed curtain walling system comprising of a unitised system with aluminium thermally
broken/ split frames supporting glazing with special recessed capping between glass panels
as indicated on the Design Drawings.
b) Horizontal mechanical restraints shall finish flush with glazing as indicated on the Design
Drawings.
c) Glazing Type to be GL-05.
d) Double glazing unit shall be structurally bonded (SSG) to framing/ carrier frames as required.
e) Frames shall not be visible to external face.
f) Carrier frames shall be finished to match framing.
g) Exposed edges of glazing shall be ground and arrised.
h) Blinds: Provide Venetian blinds as follows:
i) Venetian type slatted blinds with raise and tilt operation.
ii) Blinds to be motorised as specified.
iii) Provide manual override in event of power loss and electronic manual override to allow
operation of blinds independent of automated system.
iv) Blinds to be automatically deployed in response to surface solar gains in excess of
threshold value.
i) Provide aluminium set back spandrel panel with fully formed return edges and welded corners.
Folds with internal ‘V’ cut to reduce bending radius. All fixings concealed. Aluminium to be
PVDF coated to all exposed surfaces. Panel and blinds to be demountable for ease of
maintenance and cleaning purposes. Panel to be sealed at junction with floor slab to provide
continuity of fire separation between floors. Refer to the Fire Strategy Report.
j) Spandrel panels to be thermally and acoustically insulated. Refer to Acoustic Consultant’s
report and Environmental Consultants report for respective insulation requirements.
k) Finishes:
i) All external metalwork shall be coloured anodised.
ii) All internal metalwork shall be PVDF coated.

iii) Non-visible framing shall be corrosion protected.

iv) RAL colours to be confirmed.
Tower Wall Cladding Systems
H11.1207 Type EWS-20A Cladding System – Fixed Unit

a) Curtain walling system as follows:
i) Unitised system with aluminium thermally broken/split frames supporting glazing with
special recessed capping between glass panels (flush with face of glazing) as shown on
the Design Drawings.
ii) Double glazed units (type GL-20) to be structurally bonded (SSG) to framing/carrier
frames as required. Frames not visible to external face. Carrier frames to be finished to
match framing.
iii) Exposed edges of glazing to be ground and arrised.
iv) Silicon colour to be black.
b) Provide acoustically insulated aluminium faced set back spandrel panel with fully formed return
edges and welded corners. Folds with internal ‘V’ cut to reduce bending radius. All fixings
concealed. Aluminium to be PVDF coated.
c) Panels to be set out in a facetted manner as shown on the Design Drawings.
d) Blinds: Provide Vertical blinds as shown on the Design Drawings and as specified herein and
as follows:
i) Vertical V shaped blinds.
ii) Blinds to be motorised as specified.
iii) Provide manual override in event of power loss and electronic manual override to allow
iv) Blinds to be automatically deployed in response to surface solar gains in excess of
threshold value.
e) All external metalwork to be colour anodised. All internal metalwork to be PVDF coated. Non-
visible framing to be corrosion protected. RAL colours to be confirmed.
H11.1208 Type EWS-20B Cladding System – Opening Unit

As type EWS-20A but forming opening panels. Opening panels to be ceiling height with SSG
bonded double glazing and be manually operated with stainless steel handles and multi-point locking
mechanism. Area above ceiling level to have fixed glazed spandrel panels with frame and glazing to
match EWS-20A. Provide integral floor closer plate as shown on the Design Drawings. Carrier
frames for SSG glazing to be finished to match framing. Hinges shall be designed to push panels
(heavy-duty scissor/pantograph hinges) out and be concealed in the closed position. Hinges, closers
and all other hardware shall be stainless steel grade 1.440 (316) to be confirmed by CA. All external
metalwork to be colour anodised. All internal metalwork to be PVDF coated. Non-visible framing to be
corrosion protected. RAL colours to be confirmed.
H11.1209 Type EWS-20C Cladding System – Thermal Tube Unit

a) Double skin curtain walling system incorporating solar thermal tubes as follows:
i) Unitised system with aluminium thermally broken/split frames supporting outer and inner
glazing and thermal tubes with special recessed capping between outer glazing panels
(flush with face of glazing) as shown on the Design Drawings.
ii) Choice of thermal break material should take account of the particular environment in
which it is to operate. Performance of thermal resistance shall not decrease as cavity
temperature increases.
iii) Outer glazing: Single glazing (GL-21) structurally bonded (SSG) to framing/carrier frames
with gaskets as required. Frames not visible to external face. Exposed edges to be ground
and arrissed. Carrier frames to be finishes to match framing.
iv) Silicon colour to be black.
v) Inner glazing: Aluminium framed double glazed (GL-22) panels with gaskets as required.
Panels to be openable/hinged for access to cavity.

vi) Thermal tubes: Thermal tube panels integrated into the curtain walling system. Refer to
the M&E Specification for details of the performance requirements, interfacing etc.
Thermal tubes to be mounted to brackets to inside of mullion profiles and hinged for
maintenance as shown on the Design Drawings.
b) Panels to be set out in a facetted manner as shown on the Design Drawings.
c) Provide aluminium set back spandrel panel with fully formed return edges and welded corners.
Folds with internal ‘V’ cut to reduce bending radius. All fixings concealed. Aluminium shall be
colour anodised to match PVDF coating to frame.
d) Incorporate pressure valve with filter to prevent sand/dust ingress into top transom to allow
cavity to breathe in response to thermal expansion of the air. As shown on the design drawings.
e) All external metalwork to be colour anodised. All internal metalwork to be PVDF coated.
Aluminium surfaces facing the inside of the cavity to be colour anodised to match PVDF coating
to frame. Non-visible framing to be corrosion protected.
f) Contractor to coordinate with Interior Works Package Contractor and provide fixing point for
internal finishes by others.
H11.1210 Type EWS-20D Cladding System

a) Curtain walling system with double glazing and insulated aluminium faced back-panel as
follows:
i) Unitised system with aluminium thermally broken/split frames supporting double glazed
outer panel and insulated aluminium faced back panel.
ii) Aluminium back-panel to be single sheet of metal (i.e. no break lines). Provide all supports
as necessary to ensure a rigid panel. Provide plasterboard inner lining taped, filled and
seamed for decoration by other (ie finish by interior works package Contractor). (TBC)
iii) Insulation to achieve the required U values and comply with the requirements of the
specification.
iv) Glazing to have special recessed capping between outer glazing panels (flush with face
of glazing) as shown on the Design Drawings.
v) Glazing: Double glazing (GL-20) structurally bonded (SSG) to framing/carrier frames with
gaskets as required. Frames not visible to external face. Exposed edges of glazing to be
ground and arrissed. Carrier frames to be finishes to match framing.
c) All fixings to be concealed (i.e. no fixings visible to front of panel).
d) All external metalwork to be colour anodised. All internal metalwork to be PVDF coated. Non-
visible framing to be corrosion protected.
e) Incorporate pressure valve with filter to prevent sand/dust ingress into top transom to allow
cavity to ‘breathe‘ in response to thermal expansion of the air. As shown in the design drawings.
f) Panels to be set out in a facetted manner as shown on the Design Drawings.
g) Contractor to coordinate with Interior Works Package Contractor and make provision for fixing
of skirting boards, plasterboards and internal finishes by others. Liaise and coordinate with CA
to include suitable substrate in locations within curtain walling system for fixing of internal
skirting boards.
H11.1211 Type EWS-20E Cladding System with Fixed Stainless Steel Louvre
a) Vertical stainless steel louvers incorporating sand-trap and insect mesh. Stainless steel to be
grade 1.4401 with mirror polished finish. Profiles to comply with the design intent and as
indicated on the Design Drawings. Refer to Section L10 for performance requirements for
louvres.
H11.1212 Type EWS-20F Cladding System – Full Height

Full height ‘stick built’ system fitted to secondary steel structure with painted mild steel mullions as
shown on the design drawings. To have same external appearance as EWS-20A.
a) Painted mild steel mullions to have varying fabricated mild steel profiles welded onto them to
accommodate differing angles of glass panels to achieve glass to glass joint to the
requirements specified herein. Glazing panels to be SGG bonded to aluminium carrying frame

fitted onto fabricated profiles as shown on the Design Drawings. To include seals and gaskets.
b) System is to include local dead load glazing support and mechanical back-up restraints to
horizontal edges which also accommodate vertical movement. Refer to the Design Drawings.
c) To include vertical and horizontal stack joints between aluminium and steel framing to connect
‘stick built’ system with unitised system. Stack joints are to be concealed behind internal
partition walls. Vertical stack joints consisting of male/female half mullions which clip together
as shown on the Design Drawings.
d) External visual appearance of both ‘stick built’ and unitised systems are to be the same as
EWS-20A including joints and glazing.
H11.1213 Type EWS-20G Cladding System - Skirt

Cladding system the same as EWS-20A but fitted as a skirting to base of towers with all framing/
components finished both sides and for external exposure. To incorporate external grade suspended
ceiling system comprising composite aluminium faced panels with open joints and recessed lighting.
To also include stainless steel horizontal cladding panels above suspended ceiling to form a walkable
deck as indicated on the Design Drawings. All fixings and support framing are to be concealed. Refer
to M&E documentation and Lighting Consultant’s documentation for lighting requirements and Design
Drawings for positions/locations. Allow for coordination of interfaces. System to also comprise:
a) Aluminium set back spandrel panel with acoustic board core to face of RC slab with fully
formed return edges and welded corners. Folds with internal ‘V’ cut to reduce bending radius.
All fixings concealed. Aluminium to be colour anodised.
b) Insulation fixed to underside and face of RC slab.
c) Finishes and colours are to be as the accepted samples.
d) The panels shall have a flatness criterion of 1:1000 over any length (i.e. the permitted deviation
from the true panel shall not exceed 1.0mm either way in any 1000mm and shall be non-
cumulative).
e) The panels shall be resistant to impact consistent with a walkable surface.
H11.1214 Type EWS-40A Cladding System

a) Double skin curtain walling system incorporating integral blinds as follows:
glazing and integral blinds with special recessed capping between outer glazing panels
ii) The system to be an ‘active’ double skin system with mechanical intake and extract as
shown on the Design Drawings. Refer to the M&E drawings and Specification for details
of air supply/extraction.
iii) Outer double glazing (GL-20) to be suited to flush SSG bonding with black spacers
between glass panes. Exposed edges of glazing to be ground and arrised. Frames not
visible to external face. Silicone colour to be black.
iv) Inner glazing: Aluminium framed panels with single glazing (type GL-25) with gaskets and
SSG bonding as required. Panels to be openable/hinged for access to cavity. Hinges to
be discreetly located and have provision to be reversible as shown on the design
drawings.
v) Blinds: Provide Venetian blinds within the cavity as specified herein and as follows:
• Venetian type slatted blinds with raise and tilt operation.
• Blinds to be motorised as specified.
• Provide manual override in event of power loss and electronic manual override to
allow operation of blinds independent of automated system.
• Blinds to be automatically deployed in response to surface solar gains in excess of
threshold value.

d) Panel at ceiling level is to allow air flow over full height of glass as shown on the design
drawings.
e) Provide a ventilation passage at ceiling void (hot air out) and at low level (cool air in) to facilitate
ventilation of cavity as shown on the Design Drawings. Provide air filter at bottom to prevent
dust entering cavity. To be coordinated with M&E and A/C contractor.
f) All external metalwork to be colour anodised. All internal metalwork to be PVDF coated. Non-
H11.1215 Type EWS-40B Cladding System

a) Curtain walling system incorporating integral louvres as follows:
i) Unitised system with aluminium thermally broken/split frames supporting double glazing
with special recessed capping between outer glazing panels (flush with face of glazing)
as shown on the Design Drawings.
ii) Where indicated on the Design Drawings the system is to include vertical stainless steel
louvers incorporating sand-trap and insect mesh. Stainless steel to be grade 1.4401 with
mirror polished finish. Profiles to comply with the design intent as shown on the Design
Drawings.
iii) Vertical mirror polished stainless steel louvers to be fitted onto galvanised support posts
and incorporated into the curtain walling system as shown on the Design Drawings.
iv) Incorporate drainage channels and waterproof membranes to masonry walls as required.
v) Glazing: Double glazing (GL-20) with gaskets and SSG bonding as required. Exposed
edges of glazing to be ground and arrised.
vi) Double glazing shall be suited to flush SSG bonding with black spacers between glass
panes. Silicone colour shall be black. Exposed edges of glazing to be ground and arrised.
Frames shall not be visible on the external face.
vii) System to have additional mild steel back mullions to support the system for double
height spaces as indicated on the Design Drawings.
b) Louvre pitch and angle shall be as required to satisfy the performance requirements specified.
c) Refer to Section L10 and M&E documentation for louvers performance requirements.
d) Stainless steel to have mirror polished finish. All external aluminium to be colour anodised. All
internal metalwork to be PVDF coated. Non-visible framing to be corrosion protected.
H11.1216 Type EWS-40C Cladding System – Full Height (Tower 3)

Full height stick built system fitted to secondary steel structure with painted mild steel mullions as
shown on the design drawings.
a) Painted mild steel mullions to have varying fabricated mild steel profiles welded onto mullions to
accommodate differing angles of glass panels to achieve glass to glass joint to the
requirements specified herein. Glazing panels to be SGG bonded to aluminium carrying frame
which is then fitted onto the fabricated profiles. To include seals and gaskets.
b) Dead loads are to be supported from the ring beam via suspension rods. Lateral wind loads
taken up by steel columns, mullions and transoms which are to receive painted finish, to be
confirmed by the CA. Refer to section G10 for painted steel, Structural Engineers
documentation for loading requirements and Design Drawings.
c) To include horizontal stack joints between aluminium and steel framing to connect stick built
system with unitised system. Stack joints are to be concealed behind internal partition walls as
shown on the Design Drawings.
d) External visual appearance of both stick built and unitised systems are to be the same as EWS-
40A including joints and glazing. When each system is located and connected adjacent to one
another there shall be no steps at junctions or change in external visual appearance of the
overall façade.
e) System is to include local dead load glazing support and mechanical back-up restraints to
horizontal edges which allow for vertical movement. Refer to the Design Drawings.

H11.1217 Type EWS-40D Cladding System - Skirt

As EWS-20G but with different shaped profiles and transoms. For installation into Tower 3 (Office).
a) Finishes and colours are to be as the accepted samples.
b) Refer to the Design Drawings for profile and transome design.
H11.1218 Type EWS-40E Cladding System

a) Double skin curtain walling system incorporating integral blinds as follows:
glazing and integral blinds with special recessed capping between outer glazing panels
ii) The system to have set back hollow section mild steel structural support posts housing air
supply/extraction system as shown on the Design Drawings. Refer to the M&E drawings
and specification for details of air supply/extraction and the Structural Engineer’s
specification for structural requirements.
iii) Outer double glazing (GL-20) to be suited to flush SSG bonding with black spacers
between glass panes. Exposed edges of glazing to be ground and arrised. Frames not
visible to external face. Silicone colour to be black.
iv) Inner glazing: Aluminium framed panels with single glazing (type GL-25) with gaskets and
SSG bonding as required. Panels to be openable/hinged for access to cavity. Hinges to
be discreetly located and have provision to be reversible as shown on the design
drawings.
v) To have same visual appearance as EWS-40A.
vi) Blinds: Provide Venetian blinds within the cavity as specified herein and as follows:
• Venetian type slatted blinds with raise and tilt operation.
• Blinds to be motorised as specified.
• Provide manual override in event of power loss and electronic manual override to
allow operation of blinds independent of automated system.
• Blinds to be automatically deployed in response to surface solar gains in excess of
threshold value.
d) All external metalwork to be colour anodised. All internal metalwork to be PVDF coated. Non-
Roofglazing Systems
H11.1219 Type RFL-20 Roofglazing System

a) Inclined steel framed roof glazing system fixed to the support structure which is spanning
between and fixed to the structure. Refer to the Structural Engineer's Drawings and
Specification for requirements for the structure.
b) The rooflight panels to comprise rafter and purlin system with thermally broken aluminium
framing supporting glazing as shown on the Design Drawings.
c) Framing to make provision for aluminium channel/guide track for BMU access equipment. To be
accommodated within glazing bars as shown on the design drawings.
d) Framing elements required to support loads from access equipment. Refer to the Structural
Engineers report and specification. Coordinate all interfacing requirements with the Façade
Access Maintenance Equipment works package specification.
e) Framing elements to have an integrated insulated gutter system as indicated on the design
drawings. Refer to the M&E specification.

f) The rooflight system to be double glazed with photovoltaic panels (glass Type GL-30) as
specified. The system is to include wiring, junction boxes and is to be coordinated with the M&E
specification.
g) Panels to comprise fixed panels including flashings, drips, seals and associated gaskets, fixings
and bracketry as required to complete the installation.
h) Framing profiles are to be aluminium capped internally as shown on the Design Drawings.
i) Ring beam and columns are to be clad with aluminium panels internally as shown on the Design
Drawings.
j) All external metalwork to be colour anodised. All internal metalwork to be PVDF coated. Non-
k) All necessary wiring to be concealed.
Shading Devices
H11.1220 Type SHD-10 Shading Device

a) Aluminium shading system forming a canopy of aluminium profiles bonded onto moisture
resistant backing board suitable for external use. Refer to the Design Drawings.
b) To include waterproof membrane and aluminium flashings as shown on the Design Drawings.
c) Aluminium to be colour anodised.
d) All supporting framework, bracketry and fixings to be concealed and suitable corrosion
protected as required and as shown on the Design Drawings.
e) To be fixed to the primary structure as shown on the Structural Engineers drawings.
Panels to Columns
H11.1221 Type PEN-43 Aluminium panels to concrete columns.

Refer to section H31.
Doors
H11.1222 Type EDR-20 Frameless Revolving Door

Frameless glass revolving door to have 4 internal compartments and be integrated into the curtain
walling system with floor mounted motor and glass lid. Door to be fully automatic in accordance with
BS 7036 Part 5.
H11.1223 Type EDR-21 Metal Framed Doors

Metal framed doors with metal framing, single glazing (Type GL-31) with suitable opening mechanism
to suit the BMU access requirements. Door system to include door leaves and frames and all
ironmongery/operating mechanisms. Frame to conceal all necessary wiring/cabling from plant room
supply and shall be integrated in the adjacent walling type. Door to be fully automatic in accordance
with BS 7036 Part 5. Refer to M&E documentation for wiring/cabling requirements. Glass and frame
to match appearance of RFL-20.
H11.1224 Type EDR-22 Aluminium Doors

Aluminium framed doors with extruded aluminium framing, double glazing with pivoting or hinged
operation. Door system to include door leaves and frames and all ironmongery/operating
mechanisms. Door to match and be integrated into the adjacent walling type. Door to be power
operated or fully automatic in accordance with BS 7036 Part 5.
H11.1225 Type EDR-23 Emergency Exit Doors

Manually operated emergency exit double doors complete with panic ironmongery/operating
mechanisms. External finish to match adjacent wall type depending on door location.
H11.1226 Type EDR-24 Revolving Doors

As EDR-20 but with larger diameter rotating drum. Refer to Design Drawings for dimensions and
locations. Allow for all structural amendments as required.
H11.1227 Type EDR-25 Emergency Exit Doors

Glazed aluminium framed access door and emergency exit door operated by electronic opening
mechanism with manual override in accordance with BS 7036 Part 5. Ironmongery to include panic

push bars/pads as shown on the Design Drawings.
H11.1228 Type EDR-26 Sliding Doors

Aluminium framed glazed sliding door. External finish to match adjacent walling type.
H11.1229 Type EDR-27 Loured Bi-Fold Door.

Louvred bi-fold door in loading bay. Refer to section L10.
H11.1300 SUBMITTALS AND TESTING

Tender Submittals
H11.1301 Tender Response

a) Provide Tender submittals in accordance with the requirements of Section A.4000 of the
Specification.
with dimensions.
i) Pre-contract Design proposals including comprehensive technical specifications of the
Contractor's Proposals.
ii) Full details of systems, materials and suppliers where different from those specified.
iii) Method statements for installation for all cladding types.
iv) Details of proposals of fabricated profiles for EWS-20F and EWS-40C showing methods
of accommodating differing angles of glazing panels.
v) Predicted service life data.
vi) Specification/ Technical details of glass proposed including surface modified glass data,
colour rendering indices, etc. as specified.
vii) Details of proposals for glass door mechanisms.
viii) Outline risk assessment statement for all glazing systems.
ix) Samples where specified.
x) List of Tests included.
xi) QA/QC programme.
xii) List of proposed Working Drawings.
xiii) Summary of deviations from the Specification.
xiv) Outline technical specifications reflecting proposed materials/systems, etc.
xv) A list of proposed suppliers and sub-contractors intended to be used.
H11.1302 Pre-contract Samples

Provide pre-contract samples in accordance with Section A.4000, including trade literature and
technical specifications:
a) 500mm x 500mm cruciform sample panel of all glazed curtain walling types including extruded
aluminium mullion and transom and double glazing set into framing with gaskets with proposed
finish.
b) 300mm x 300mm sample of aluminium sheet cladding.
c) All proposed gasket types, extrusions, etc. including at least one joint.
d) Glass samples 300mm x 300mm of all proposed glass types.
e) Proposed types of finish.
f) Ironmongery.
g) Switches and controls.

H11.1303 Post Contract Samples

Provide post contract samples in accordance with Section A.4000:
a) 1800mmx3000mm glass samples to be viewed in glass box as shown on the drawings.
b) 1000mm x 1000mm cruciform sample panel of all glazed curtain walling types including
extruded aluminium mullion and transom and double glazing set into framing with gaskets with
proposed finish. To include all profiles, mullions and transoms.
c) 500mm x 500mm sample of aluminium sheet cladding.
d) Metal louvres of all types.
e) All proposed gasket types, extrusions, etc. including at least one joint.
f) All colour types samples 300mm x 300mm minimum size.
g) Operating mechanisms for roof openings.
h) Sliding operating mechanisms, track and wheels.
i) Switches and controls.
j) Glass samples 500mm x 500mm of all specified glass types.
k) Various extrusions at least 300mm in length.
l) Various bolts and exposed fixings.
m) Various ironmongery including hinges, budget locks and window and door handles.
n) Samples of fastening devices and anchors, etc.
H11.1304 Mock-up Requirements

Provide mock-ups in accordance with Section A.4000 and with reference to the Mock-up Drawings
as follows:
i) Mock up with all types of EWS-20 mounted together as per drawings.
ii) Mock up with all types of EWS-40 mounted together as per drawings.
iii) Mock up of RFL-20 mounted together as per drawings.
iv) Mock up of EWS-14, EWS-17 and EWS-19 joined together showing stack joints, glazing
and framing junctions between each system.
H11.1305 Prototype Requirements

Provide prototypes in accordance with Section A.4000 as follows:
a) Prototypes for project specific testing as follows:
i) Provide prototypes covering all EWS-20 types, minimum size to be 2 storeys high by 9
metres wide mounted together to simulate tower bay.
ii) Provide prototypes covering all EWS-40 types, minimum size to be 2 storeys high by 9
metres wide mounted together to simulate tower bay.
iii) Provide prototypes of RFL-20, minimum size to be 9 metres by 9 metres.
A purpose made rig will be required for testing purposes as necessary. For details of required
prototype test scope, refer to the Tender Drawings. Details of test including testing rig to be
submitted for review by the CA.
H11.1306 Benchmark Requirements

Provide quality benchmarks in accordance with Section A.4000:
a) First completed full height structural bay of each type of system in location to be agreed.
Testing
H11.1307 Previous/ Comparative Testing Certification

a) The Contractor may provide certification to demonstrate that the cladding works have been
previously tested to meet the criteria specified.
b) Where previous testing data is not representative of the project specific requirements or is not

deemed to be satisfactory by the CA, laboratory tests shall be carried out to satisfy the
c) Test certificates do not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities regarding the performance
and service life requirements of the cladding works.
H11.1308 Testing of Prototypes

a) Supporting Frames: The prototypes shall be mounted in test rigs which have the same
conditions of attachment and support as elements of the works, with a supporting structure
similar in stiffness to that supporting the works. The prototypes to be tested shall not be
influenced by the test chamber.
b) Provide details of all jointing, sealing and glazing techniques, materials used, type, number and
size of drainage/ventilation apertures and section properties of the framing members.
c) The CA shall be given at least 7 days notice prior to the erection and dismantling of the
prototype construction, as the CA may elect to observe the assembly and dismantling of the
test prototypes.
d) Tests shall not be carried out without prior notice of at least 7 days being given to the CA.
e) Prior to testing, sufficient time shall be allowed to permit all chemically curing sealants to
achieve their proper cure as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
f) Before the test is begun, the external face of the specimen shall be thoroughly washed using a
mild additive-free detergent and then rinsed.
g) Testing shall be carried out by an independent laboratory acceptable to the CA.
h) The prototypes shall be tested for air permeability, water leakage, and wind load resistance,
plus additional structural loading tests as necessary to demonstrate through
calculations/drawings (with the exception of performance prototypes) that the works are
capable of accommodating the building movements without degrading the performance of the
works.
i) Details of the testing procedures shall be provided to the CA for review and comment.
H11.1309 Standard Test Apparatus and Calibration

Submit details of the following equipment intended for use in the testing process:
a) Test chamber.
b) Air system.
c) Water spray system.
d) Pressure measuring apparatus.
e) Airflow-metering system.
f) Water flow-metering system.
g) Deflection measuring devices.
h) Calibration.
H11.1310 Air Permeability Tests

a) The prototypes shall be tested to determine the air infiltration per unit area for fixed panels, and
per unit joint length for any opening lights. A check for regions of concentrated air leakage shall
be made after the air permeability test has been completed and such areas marked upon the
prototype drawings.
b) Testing shall be carried out in accordance with BS EN 12153, for cladding, and BS EN 1026,
for windows and doors, to a test pressure class of 600 Pa as defined in BS 6375 and the
requirements of the CWCT Standard for Systemised Building Envelopes.
c) In addition, an air ex-filtration test shall be carried out on the prototype to check the
performance in relation to the whole building's air leakage test requirements, in accordance with
the requirements of the CWCT Standard for Systemised Building Envelopes and to meet the
criteria required by Local Building Regulations.
H11.1311 Façade Floor Air Leakage Testing

a) The joint between the façade cladding and the structural slab at each floor level shall be sealed
such that air shall leak through the façade floor joint at no more than 0.1 litres/sec. per linear
metre of façade at 50N/m².
b) The façade floor joint air leakage testing shall be carried out on Site by a specialist laboratory
such as CERAM, Taywood or BSRIA.
c) Allow for the testing of up to 10 sections of façade, each section comprising the building
module of façade. The test sections shall be selected by the CA. If the test fails, locate the leak,
seal it and retest the section until the test is passed. If more than two tests fail, a further 10
sections of façade shall be re-tested.
H11.1312 Weatherproofing and Watertightness Tests

a) Tests shall be carried out adopting both the static and the dynamic procedures set out below:
i) Static Test Method carried out in accordance with BS EN 12155, for cladding, BS EN
1027, for windows and doors, and the requirements of the CWCT Standard for
Systemised Building Envelopes for the static test method.
ii) Dynamic Test Method carried out in accordance with the requirements of the CWCT
Standard for Systemised Building Envelopes or equivalent European Standard ENV
13050, for testing for water penetration using the dynamics method.
iii) Resistance to water penetration when tested shall be in the test pressure class 600 Pa or
0.25 the design wind pressure, whichever is the greater, in accordance with the
requirements of the CWCT Standard for Systemised Building Envelopes for testing for
water penetration by the static and dynamic test method.
b) Performance under Testing:
i) There shall be no leakage into the internal face of the works at any time during the test or
within 15 minutes of completion of the test.
ii) At the completion of the test there shall be no standing water in locations intended to
drain.
H11.1313 Wind Resistance Tests

a) A serviceability test shall be carried out in accordance with BS EN 12179, for cladding, and BS
EN 12211, for windows and doors, as modified by the CWCT Standard for Systemised
Building Envelopes.
b) A safety test shall be carried out in accordance with the CWCT Standard for Systemised
Building Envelopes.
c) Test pressure: The peak test pressure shall be 1.5 times the design wind pressure for the
‘Safety’ test, and 1.0 times the design wind pressure for the ‘Serviceability’ test.
d) Performance under Testing:
i) At both positive and negative applications of the peak test pressure, there shall be no
permanent damage to framing members, glass or glazing panels or anchors. Framing
members shall not buckle, panels shall remain securely held, glass and glazing shall not
be damaged and gaskets shall not be displaced. The glass itself shall not deflect such
that edge cover is insufficient to restrain the glass under peak test pressure or such that
spacers become visible.
ii) After loading to the positive and negative peak test pressure, permanent deformation to
wall framing members shall not exceed 1/500 of the span measured between points of
attachment to the building one hour after the loading has been removed.
iii) Refer to clause H11.14** for maximum allowable deflections for glass retaining framing
sections. The glass itself shall not deflect such that edge cover is insufficient to restrain
the glass under peak test pressure or such that spacers become visible.
iv) The loads created by specified test conditions shall be accommodated safely, without
detriment to the overall design, structural integrity and performance of the works.
v) The permanent fixings of any component shall be capable of resisting the combined dead
load and maximum wind load with the required factor of safety in accordance with the
CWCT Standard for Systemised Building Envelopes and as appropriate to the relevant
materials used.

e) Tests shall also verify:

i) That all components shall return to their original positions under zero load, providing that
the elastic limit to the materials has not been exceeded.
ii) That in all cases, the deflection of members shall not exceed specified tolerances.
iii) That anchorage shall not show permanent signs of slackening off. The deflection of these
members shall not be sufficient to damage non-loadbearing member of the inner wall
assembly.
iv) That no noise shall occur due to movement of components.
H11.1314 Impact Testing

A soft body impact test shall be carried out in accordance with BS 8200, conforming to category B
requirements (See table 2).
H11.1315 Off-Site Test Sequence

a) The Testing Authority shall witness the installation and dismantling of the prototypes, record any
variations to the agreed details on a set of the prototype assembly drawings prepared by the
Contractor and shall also record the extent of water penetration into the system.
b) Test Sequence:
i) Preliminary testing: Prior to the full test sequence, the prototypes shall be pre-tested
under static pressure at 50% maximum design wind load, followed by water penetration
test at 50% of the pressure specified for final tests. Deficiencies observed in the samples
during testing shall be recorded, and appropriate corrections made.
ii) The testing sequence shall be followed in accordance with the CWCT Standard for
Systemised Building Envelopes Sequence B procedures.
iii) Further tests shall be carried out in accordance with the CWCT Standard for Systemised
Building Envelopes Discretionary Test procedures as necessary.
c) No test shall be carried out unless all previous tests in the sequence have been passed to the
satisfaction of the Testing Authority.
d) If any modification is made to the prototype, repeat testing shall be undertaken as detailed in
the relevant CWCT procedures. However, If any modification is undertaken that, in the opinion
of the independent testing authority or witness, invalidates earlier test results, the sequence
shall commence again at the first test. This requirement is not applicable to glass breakage
during the wind resistance safety test when replacement of a pane of glass may be carried out
without re-starting the whole sequence.
H11.1316 Acoustic Testing – Initial Advance Test

a) Identify the glass configurations and incorporate any acoustically enhanced configurations that
may be necessary to meet the Specification.
b) Immediately following the appointment of the curtain walling sub-contractor, arrange laboratory
acoustic tests of the proposed glass configurations using similar framing to that intended with
similar dimensions and mass per metre run of framing. These prototypes will not be used as
visual samples and will not include glass coatings or heat treatments, but are to be used to
confirm compliance with the specified acoustic data.
c) From initial results of acoustic testing, provide detailed acoustic assessment of each cladding
type for review.
H11.1317 Structural Silicone Testing and Maintenance

a) General:
i) Comply with the requirements of the Specification with respect to the testing of the
structural silicone application. Refer to Section Z25 for further requirements.
ii) Provide the CA with documentary evidence that the selection of sealant takes into
account any relevant recommendations by the sealant manufacturer as to the use of the
sealant.
iii) Compatibility: Submit to the CA test certificates to confirm compatibility of the sealant
used with all substrate materials including aluminium, finishes, glass, glass coatings,
gaskets, setting blocks, backing rods, etc. These certificates shall relate to tests carried

out by the sealant manufacturer.

iv) Silicone/sealants shall be tested up to 80ºc without any change in performance.
b) Submit to the CA adhesion test data of production samples as tested in accordance with
ASTM C 794. These shall establish adhesion performance over the temperatures specified in
the Specification.
i) Where the structural silicone bonds glass to the cladding framework, the weakest
element in the line of stress shall have a minimum strength of 600kPa or 6 times the
design strength, whichever is the greater in accordance with ETAG 01/015 or ETAG 002
documents which set out the requirements for use of structural silicone. This criterion
shall be proven with a statistical confidence of 99%. For each combination of substrate
and design conditions, provide a report from the sealant manufacturer for the tests
performed in the following manner:
ii) Assemble and fully cure under production conditions (not laboratory conditions) a
minimum of 12 samples. Each sample shall be a minimum of 150mm long. The sample
shall be made of actual substrate material, i.e. glass with actual coating (low E and/or
fritting), aluminium sections with finishes, etc. The joint geometry shall be accepted by the
CA.
• Double-sided tape or other spacer material shall be installed such that it does not
add to the silicone joint strength.
• Weather seals shall not be installed on the samples.
• After full cure the samples shall be totally immersed in tap water at room
temperature for 7 days.
• Samples shall be tested in a tensometer 25 hours after removal from the water
immersion tank.
• Each sample shall be subjected to a tensile load test. The crosshead speed shall be
50mm per minute. Continue testing until failure occurs or until 830kPa or 6 times
the design load, whichever is the greater, is applied to the samples. Report the
maximum stress and mode of failure including percentage area of cohesive failure
and any area of voids in the sealant for each sample. Adhesive failure area or void
cross section area parallel to the substrate face greater than 20% is unacceptable.
• A statistical analysis of results shall indicate a design stress of not less than 600kPa
or 6 times the design stress of the sealant, whichever is the greater, with a
confidence of 99% over the temperature range as described in the Specification.
• If the sample set does not meet the requirements of the above criteria, the design of
the failed element shall be revised and subjected to a re-test. This procedure shall
continue until the above requirements have been met.
• Prepare a report of the above testing. No fabrication shall commence until the
results have been accepted by the CA.
• Retain all test results with regard to the structural silicone glazing for a minimum
period of 15 years from project completion. These shall be made available to the CA
on request.
c) Maintenance:
i) Recommend a periodic maintenance regime for acceptance by the CA. This shall be
incorporated into the O&M manual. Recommendations shall include:
• Cleaning: Specify acceptable detergents, etc. and methods to be used.
• Details and frequency of close visual inspection requirements, including materials to
be employed.
• Inspection: Provide forms to be filled out periodically, each pre-dated with the
inspection date and an adequate quantity for the design life of the building. The
form shall state the full procedure for the inspection.
• Recommendations for periodic cut-out of structural seals and weather seals (if
appropriate) to check shore hardness and tensile properties of the seal.
ii) Each of the properties shall clearly state pass/fail criteria and indicate action required

when a failure is obtained as a result.
H11.1317 Site Hose Testing

A Site water hose test shall be carried out in accordance with the recommendations of the CWCT
Standard for Systemised Building Envelopes.
H11.1318 Testing of Fixings

As the work proceeds, allow for the bolts to be proof load tested as required and witnessed by the
Structural Engineer.
H11.1319 Thermal Cycling Tests

Not required.
H11.1320 Building Movements/Racking Procedure Tests

a) Carry out building movements/racking tests as follows:
i) Position – double floor height prototypes with racking applied to central floor.
ii) Number of cycles: 5 cycles in each direction.
iii) Magnitude: Refer to the Structural Engineer’s Specification in respect of seismic
requirements (Note seismic zone ** applies).
b) Following the building movement procedure carry out air permeability tests and static water
tests in accordance with the CWCT Standard for Systemised Building Envelopes as referred to
in earlier testing clauses.
H11.1321 Fire Tests

a) Where required, carry out fire tests to comply with the fire Strategy Report and the relevant
NFPA Standards, BS or EN in addition to any Abu Dhabi Civil Defence local requirements as
applicable.
b) Products tested to meet BS or EN standards may be acceptable subject to acceptance by the
CA.
c) All tests to be carried out by an accredited testing lab acceptable to the CA.
H11.1322 Results and Certificates

a) Tests and inspection results shall be submitted immediately they are available.
b) Submit certificates relating to the materials used in the work as confirmation of tests carried out
in accordance with the relevant British Standards, and/or other national standards as
appropriate.
c) Maintain, until the end of the defects liability period, records of all inspections and tests
performed, material certification, inspection and test plans, drawings, and any other
documentation to substantiate conformity with the Specification, including those carried out by
sub-contractors.
d) The records shall be stored in such a way that they are identifiable to the component to which
they refer and are retrievable.
e) The records shall be available for inspection by the CA and copies of records shall be given to
the CA upon request. At the end of the defects liability period they shall be submitted to the
CA.
H11.1400 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

General
H11.1401 General
a) Comply with the general performance of Section A.5000 and the following specific
performance requirements.
b) The works generally shall be designed, constructed and installed to BS 8200 and the
recommendations of the CWCT Standard for Systemised Building Envelopes.
c) Inclined overhead glazing shall comply with the requirements of the CWCT Standard for
Systemised Building Envelopes.

Structural Performance
H11.1402 Specific Movements

a) For details of structural movements and tolerances to be accommodated by the façade
systems, refer to the Structural Movements and Tolerances Report and the Structural
Engineer's specification and drawings as applicable and as prepared by the Structural
Engineer.
b) Design façade systems to accommodate the following structural movements:
i) Vertical differential deflection (floor to floor).
ii) Horizontal differential movement (floor to floor).
iii) Horizontal movement (long term shrinkage).
iv) Column shortening.
v) Building sway.
vi) Seismic sway.
vii) Post tension stress in the slabs.
c) Where curtain walling is continuous over more than one floor, provide a horizontal stack joint to
accommodate vertical building movement.
d) Design of the fixings for the curtain walling must be coordinated with the Structural Engineers
Project Common Tolerance and Movement Report due to the presence of post tension stress in
the slabs.
H11.1403 Deflections
a) The allowable deflection of any glazed element of the works, when carrying full design loads,
shall comply with BS 6262 as applicable.
b) Unless otherwise specified, the maximum allowable deflection for any general framing members,
panels, glass components shall be in accordance with the requirements of the CWCT Standard
for Systemised Building Envelopes and all relevant standards as applicable.
c) The allowable deflection of any element of the inclined overhead glazing assemblies, when
carrying full design loads, shall be in accordance with the recommendations of BS 6262, BS
5516: Parts 1 and 2 and the Centre for Window Cladding Technology (CWCT) Standard for
Systemised Building Envelopes as applicable.
d) The works shall not deflect under loading in any way that is detrimental to any element of the
works or adjacent structural or building elements.
e) All components, couplings and fixings shall be capable of accommodating all of the above
deflection without permanent distortion, deformation or failure.
f) The works shall accommodate defined differential structural movements arising from any loads
imposed by adjacent structures.
g) The magnitude of the allowable deflections shall be reduced if they are detrimental to any part
of the works, their support structure or internal finishes.
h) Calculations of deflections for structural aluminium shall recognise criteria contained in BS
8118: Part 1 limiting deflections.
H11.1404 Design Loads

a) The system shall be designed to withstand the loads as specified below without affecting the
system’s ability to meet the specified performance requirements and/or the exceptional loads
specified herein. Unless otherwise stated, the system shall also be designed to comply with all
prevailing relevant British Standards as appropriate, including, but not necessarily limited to BS
6180 and BS 6399.
b) When calculating design loads the worst combination shall be considered, taking account of
the fact that the pressure coefficients at various locations may determine more than one design
criterion.
c) Self-weight Gravity Loads: The works shall be capable of accommodating the self-weight of the
system including all of its framing and supporting system.

d) The Glazed Curtain Walling/ Cladding Systems shall be designed so that failure of any one
local element (e.g. bolt, anchor, of fixing component) will not result in progressive failure of the
curtain wall/ cladding.
e) Cast-in Inserts: Design to resist worst load combinations. For proprietary inserts, design to
manufacturers requirements.
H11.1405 Seismic Loads

The system to be designed to withstand the relevant seismic activity to comply with AAMA 501-4 and
to meet a post earthquake condition of ‘Operational’ as defined therein.
H11.1406 Imposed Gravity Loads

The works shall be capable of accommodating loads imposed by adjacent and/or attached elements
that bear onto, are suspended from or fixed to the system. Refer to the Design Drawings for
information on such elements and/or required load capacities. No elements from other trades shall be
fixed to and/or supported by the curtain wall, unless accurately specified, indicated on the Design
Drawings and/or agreed by the CA.
H11.1407 Live Loads

a) The works shall be capable of accommodating the following live loads without any reduction in
performance:
i) All loads resulting from movements of the building structure and cladding support
structure.
ii) Horizontally imposed loads in accordance with BS 6180 and BS 6399: Part 1 for all
relevant conditions and in compliance with Local Building Regulations including
requirements for containment (where balustrade loading is required).
iii) Façade projections to withstand maintenance loads without dislodgement or permanent
deformation.
iv) Horizontally applied loads acting on the surface of framing members and glazing arising
from maintenance and cleaning operations. The works shall sustain safely, without
reduction in performance and without permanent deformation to any component, a static
500N load applied horizontally through a square of 100mm sides on any part of the
framing.
v) Known impact loads, or transferred impact loads, that occur during its service life, without
deterioration in performance and without sustaining non-repairable damage.
vi) Loads imposed during replacement of panels/units.
vii) Wind loads.
viii) Horizontal and vertical loads of similar magnitude to those which are imposed upon
adjacent or attached elements. Refer to the Design Drawings for information on such
elements and/or required load capacities.
ix) Internal sills: Internal sills shall be designed to accommodate a man loading of 1.1kN
without permanent deformation.
b) Inclined glazing shall be capable of accommodating live loads based on BS 5516 without any
reduction in its performance. Refer to Section Z25 for further information.
H11.1408 Imposed Movements

The works shall be capable of accommodating loads imposed upon the system by defined
movements of its supporting structure and/or other adjacent elements.
H11.1409 Wind/Air Pressure Loads

a) The works shall withstand without permanent deformation, the effects of wind loads where
appropriate (e.g. external conditions or internal areas subject to external wind pressure). Refer
to clause A.5305.
b) Calculated pressure loads shall include the effect of internal air pressures within the building,
taking into account the presence of significant openings and positive and negative air pressure
within operating lift shafts, which might arise occasionally within the building enclosure.
c) Refer to the Wind Tunnel Test/Report prepared by the CA.

d) The loads created by wind loading as specified shall be accommodated safely, without
detriment to the overall design, structural integrity and performance of the works.
e) Make necessary provisions as required to eliminate vibration, noise and metal fatigue caused by
airflow to the screen cladding.
H11.1410 Thermal Movement

a) Allow for local thermal movements exerted due to the psychrometric data specified in Section
A.
b) The works, including all necessary support structure, shall be designed to accommodate
changes in dimension and shape of its components resulting from changes in service
temperatures and from differential surface temperatures between the inside and outside of the
building without any reduction in the specified performance. The design shall cater for all
temporary and permanent conditions envisaged for the works.
c) Surface differential temperature range for components of metal components shall be taken as -
5°C to + 120°C.
d) The annual surface temperature ranges for the materials used in the works shall be confirmed
during the Detailed Design period, both for external surface temperatures and internal
temperatures when the building is in normal use and when empty or out of use. Due regard
shall be made to the effects of orientation of the building towards the sun, in particular for
overhead and sloped glazing situations and thermal stress calculations and risk assessments
shall be submitted by the Contractor for review.
H11.1411 Inertial Loads

The works shall be capable of accommodating inertial loads arising due to the
acceleration/deceleration of moving sections including opening lights, doors and vents of the building
or enclosure.
H11.1412 Exceptional Loads

a) The system shall be designed to withstand exceptional loads as specified including seismic
loads (earthquakes). For such exceptional loads only, the system may be allowed to sustain a
degree of damage as specified.
i) Impact loads: As specified herein.
ii) Seismic loads: As specified in clause H11.1405.
iii) Loads associated with build up of sand as relevant.
H11.1413 Strength of Doors

a) Ensure that the doors, including ironmongery, meet the ‘heavy duty’ category as defined in DD
171 or an equivalent international standard. At the same time doors shall comply with and not
compromise the other stated performance criteria for the works.
b) Provide evidence to demonstrate that the doors, including ironmongery, have been tested to
meet the minimum acceptance criteria given in DD 171 for the following:
i) Slamming shut impact.
ii) Slamming open impact.
iii) Heavy body impact.
iv) Hard body impact.
v) Torsion.
vi) Download deformation.
vii) Closure against obstruction.
viii) Resistance to jarring and vibration.
ix) Abusive forces on door handles.
c) Glass in doors:
i) Comply with BS 6262.
ii) Impact performance to achieve class A (class 1B1) to BS 6206 and BS EN 12600.

d) Ensure that the maximum opening pressures required to open fire rated or non-fire rated doors
on disabled access routes are in accordance with the requirements of BS 8300.
Environmental Performance
H11.1414 Moisture Movement

a) The works shall withstand movement without permanent deformation or any reduction in the
specified performance:
i) Due to changes in the moisture content of its components, resulting from variations in the
moisture content of the air.
ii) Due to the expansion of absorbed or retained moisture caused by the temperature
extremes expected.
b) Allowance shall be made to control the flow of any water that may collect behind or within the
cladding and for directing this water to the outside, such that no water remains internally.
H11.1415 Thermal Performance Requirements

a) Detail the works to minimise cold bridging in any area of the system. The maximum thermal
permitted transmittance (U-value) for the various areas of the works shall be as follows:
i) U values shall be as specified for the relevant glass types.
ii) Through solid insulated areas, taking frames/connecting angles etc into account shall be
0.35W/ m²K or better.
b) The average U-value through the works shall comply with the above requirements and meet all
Statutory requirements as well as Local Building Regulations and the M&E requirements for
heat gain/loss as relevant.
c) Submit thermal calculations for the various components and the average thermal performance
of the proposed works to comply with the specified requirements.
d) Ensure that thermal movements shall not result in unacceptable levels of audible noise.
H11.1416 Solar Performance Requirements

a) General:
i) Data sheets for project specific glass build-ups in accordance with BS EN 410 (light
transmittance, radiant transmittance of glazing) with tolerances of ±3% for flat glazing,
shall be submitted in respect of solar and visible light performance confirming compliance
with the Specification. Facilities shall be maintained to evaluate and report on expected
solar performance under varying conditions of solar radiation and external/internal air
velocity.
ii) The works shall be designed to ensure that the glazing does not crack or distort or is
damaged in any way through differences of temperature on the surfaces of the glazing.
iii) All specified criteria are nominal values.
b) Confirm the total solar transmission (G-value) for each glass type specified for review by the
CA. Glass manufacturers and types shall be acceptable to the CA only if they meet the
performance and visual requirements defined by the Specification.
c) Individual GL Types:
i) Glass Type GL-01 shall be neutral body tint, solar control double glazed, insulated, safety
glass units meeting the following criteria:
• Light transmission factor: Not less than 70%.
• External light reflectance: Not greater than 10%.
• Total solar transmission (G-value): Not greater than 0.55
• Colour rendition index of glass: Not less than 95%.
• U-value: Not greater than 1.8W/m²K.
• High performance coating: No.
• Low E coating: Yes

• Safety glass requirement: [Inner pane and outer pane].

• Acoustic treatment to meet the requirements of the Acoustic Report.
ii) Glass Type GL-05 shall be fritted, body tinted, double glazed, high performance,
insulated, safety glass units with solar control to T1, T2, T3 podium meeting the following
criteria:
• Total solar transmission (G-value): 0.2.
• Colour rendition index of glass: To be as accepted samples.
• High performance coating: No
• Low E coating: Yes.
• Safety glass requirement: Inner pane and outer pane.
iii) Glass Type GL-20 shall be clear, double glazed, safety glass units with (mirror) reflective
coating, meeting the following criteria:
• Total solar transmission (G-value): Not greater than 0.20 (centre glass).
• High performance coating: Yes.
• Safety glass requirement: Inner pane and outer pane laminated safty glass.
iv) Glass Type GL-21 shall be clear (low iron), single glazed, heat treated laminated safety
glass units (in front of thermal tubes) meeting the following criteria:
• Total solar transmission (G-value): Not less than 0.89
• U-value: Not greater than6.0W/m²K.
• Low E coating: No.
• Safety glass requirement: Laminated safety glass.
v) Glass Type GL-22 shall be clear, double glazed, safety glass units with reflective coating,
meeting the following criteria:
• Total solar transmission (G-value): Not greater than 0.20 (centreglass)
• U-value: Not greater than 1.4 W/m²K.
• High performance coating: Yes.


vi) Glass Type GL-25 shall be clear, single glazed, laminated safety glass units ( back up
wall for abluftfenster ) meeting the following criteria:
• External light reflectance: Not Applicable
• Total solar transmission (G-value): Not greater than 0.90
• U-value: Not greater than5.7W/m²K.
• Low E coating: No.
• Safety glass requirement: Laminated safety glass.
vii) Glass Type GL-30 shall be double glazed, safety glass units with laminated safety glass
inner layer and laminated safety glass outer layer with photovoltaic cells within interlayer
or the outer pane, meeting the following criteria:
• PV filling ratio: PV cells with resin poured matrix. Refer to the Design Drawings for
the performance/filling ratio/spacings etc.
• Type of PV cells: Monocrystaline silicone.
• External light reflectance: Not Applicable
• Total solar transmission (G-value): Not greater than 10%
• Colour rendition index of glass: To be as accepted samples.
• Low E coating: Yes
• All inner panes of the double glazed units are to be safety glass to BS 6206 and BS
EN 12600.
viii) Glass Type GL-31 shall be safety glass with photovoltaic cells within laminated interlayer.
• PV filling ratio: PV cells with resin poured matrix. Refer to the Design Drawings for
the performance/filling ratio/spacings, etc.
• Type of PV cells: To be as GL-30.
ix) Values indicated are regarded as the minimum the glass must achieve.
H11.1417 Air Permeability/Infiltration

a) The Detailed Design shall minimise airflow from the outside to the inside of the building through
joints/junctions to control concentrated airflow.
b) The works shall resist the passage of air such that its air leakage rates, if measured in
accordance with the CWCT Standard, shall not be exceeded in both the initial and repeat tests.
c) The works shall have a maximum air infiltration rate of:
i) 1.5 m³/hr/m² for fixed lights.
ii) 2.0 m³/hr/per metre length for opening lights/smoke vents.

iii) 3.0m³/hr/per metre length of opening for framed and rebated doors.
d) Items i), ii) above shall be tested at a minimum pressure of 600 Pa when tested generally in
accordance with the CWCT Standard for Systemised Building Envelopes.
e) Air leakage shall be distributed and not concentrated at any one location.
f) Provide actual air leakage results from tests for acceptance.
g) Where appropriate, analyse details of pressure equalisation proposals for all areas of rainscreen
cladding taking into account variable external pressure gradient for acceptance by the CA.
H11.1418 Condensation
a) Except under extreme conditions where the relative humidity is in excess of that specified in
clause A.5402, condensation shall not form, either on internal or external surfaces of framing
members, glazing, solid panels or louvres, or interstitially within the construction of infill panels
forming a part of the works, such that it may lead to degradation of performance, damage or
staining under the psychrometric conditions specified.
b) Condensation shall be permitted in non-visible drained and ventilated rebates subject to
condensation not having a deleterious effect on performance or durability.
c) Provide a condensation risk assessment with the Tender return based upon the psychrometric
conditions specified, for review by the CA.
d) In conditions outside of the ranges given in A.5400, design the system so that the condensate
either:
i) Drains to the outside or;
ii) Sits in a collection point designed for this purpose, which allows the condensate to
evaporate harmlessly.
H11.1419 Capillarity
The Detailed Design, gaskets, seals, etc. shall take into account and eliminate any possibility of water
migration to the inside of the building due to capillarity.
H11.1420 Weather and Water Penetration Resistance

a) The works shall be weatherproof and watertight, ensuring the prevention of water leakage onto
the internal face of the works and any other part of the system that may be adversely affected.
b) The works, including flashings and junctions with adjacent parts of the building, shall be
weatherproof and watertight under all conditions with full allowance made for deflections and
other movements.
c) The Detailed Design of the works shall not be based on a single line of defence. The cavities
between the lines of defence shall be drained and ventilated to the exterior. Wet applied seals
for the purpose of preventing the ingress of water shall not be accepted with the exception of
the structural silicone seals or wet seals used for sealing the works against adjacent interfacing
systems.
d) The Detailed Design and construction of the works shall be such that all rigid or fixed joints shall
remain rigid and accommodate all specified thermal, building structure or other movements and
any applicable loads without compromising its watertightness. All movement joints shall also be
finally designed and constructed to accommodate such loads or movements without
compromising the glazing's watertightness.
H11.1421 Local Factors

a) Visit the Site in order to become familiar with local requirements. Local microclimatic conditions
shall be taken into account and grades of materials assessed as suitably durable for the
location shall be selected.
b) An assessment of microclimatic conditions shall be made with due allowance for any factors
likely to have an adverse effect on materials intended for the works. More appropriate materials
shall be substituted if adverse effects are predicted.
Acoustic
H11.1422 Acoustic Performance Requirements

a) The works shall effectively insulate the internal areas of the building from high levels of noise.

b) The works shall provide internal sound reduction between floors.

c) The works shall provide internal sound reduction between adjoining areas on the same floor.
d) Evidence shall be provided that the acoustic performance requirements given herein can be
achieved.
e) Refer to the acoustic consultants specification.
f) Each façade/cladding system shall achieve the required sound reduction indices (R) as
specified in the Acoustic Report when tested in accordance with BS EN ISO 140: Part 3.
H11.1423 Flanking Transmission

a) The works shall be tested for flanking transmission with a partition meeting the façade at a
mullion. Refer to the Acoustic Report and any other performance criteria as relevant.
b) Where required, the works shall be tested for flanking transmission at a junction with the
floor/ceiling slabs. Refer to the Acoustic Report and any other performance criteria as relevant
c) Any acoustic tests are to commence at a time agreed with the CA, in a recognised independent
laboratory, with a comprehensive test report being submitted, in writing, to the CA within three
weeks of completion of the tests.
d) Where existing test data is available from a recognised independent laboratory, it shall be
considered acceptable providing the tests have been carried out for the exact system being
offered. Test data for similar constructions may be accepted if supporting computations are
offered to account for any differences between the proposed and tested construction.
Fire
H11.1424 General
a) All elements of the works shall be either non-combustible or not easily ignitable with low flame
spread characteristics, and shall not produce excessive quantities of smoke or toxic gases.
Comply with NFPA 5000 and the Fire Strategy Report.
b) All materials and products used shall comply with Abu Dhabi Civil Defence local requirements.
H11.1425 Surface Spread of Flame

a) Comply with NFPA 5000 and the Fire Strategy Report.
b) All materials used internally and externally (excluding sealants and gaskets) shall have the
required surface spread of flame classification to comply with NFPA 5000 and the Fire Strategy
Report.
H11.1426 Fire and Smoke Stopping

a) Be responsible for the provision of all cavity barriers in the external wall and for fire stopping, as
required, at the junction of the external wall with all other fire-resisting elements of the structure,
to meet the requirements of the NFPA 5000, the Fire Strategy Report and Local Building
Regulations.
b) Provide fire rated sealing to all junctions with floor slabs and party walls.
c) All fire and smoke stops shall be positively fixed in position in such a manner that they shall not
become dislodged in the event of a fire. The fixing shall secure the stop in position for a period
at least equal to that required for the compartment wall or floor against which the works abut.
H11.1427 Fire Resistance

a) If fire resistance is required in the works for space separation purposes, comply with functional
requirement of NFPA, the Fire Strategy Report and the Local Building Regulations.
b) Where fire-resisting glass is required, comply with the specified fire ratings and Section Z25
and ensure that beadings, gaskets, etc. are suitable for the fire rating to be achieved.
c) Reaction to fire properties: The external surfaces of the cladding shall comply with functional
requirement of the NFPA, the Fire Strategy Report and Local Building Regulations.
d) Any insulation in the external wall construction that is exposed in a ventilated cavity shall be
non-combustible.
H11.1428 Joint System Required

Joints made within or between fire resistance-rated assemblies shall be protected with a joint system
that is designed and tested to prevent the spread of fire for a time period equal to that of the
assembly in which the joint is located. Such materials, systems, or devices shall be tested as part of
the assembly in accordance with the requirements of ASTM E 1966, Standard Test Method for Fire-
Resistive Joint Systems, or ANSI/ UL 2079, Standard for tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint
Systems.
H11.1429 Fire Stopping between Floors

a) There shall be 120 minute floor to floor fire separation at the perimeter of each level.
b) Submit details of suitable products, including fire tests information complying with the relevant
test methods.
c) Provide smoke barriers to mullion voids to prevent the spread of smoke between floors.
Durability
H11.1430 General
The performance criteria shall be satisfied for the full service life of the works, as stated in the
Specification, provided always that the maintenance has been carried out as specified.
H11.1431 Impact and Abrasion Resistance

a) The works shall resist abrasion from agreed cleaning methods and maintenance systems
without any noticeable change in surface appearance. Generally, surfaces shall be sufficiently
hard (including glass coatings) to resist all reasonable impacts from hand-held objects in
accordance with BS EN 356.
b) Impact tests shall be carried out to all assemblies adjacent to pedestrian areas in accordance
with the recommendations of BS 8200. Tests shall conform to category B requirements.
c) The extent of any damage determined through testing shall be recorded and, where possible,
quantified. Samples shall also be submitted to the CA.
H11.1432 Demountability
a) Elements of the works shall be individually and independently removable ensuring access for
maintenance and/or replacement of glazed units in the event of breakage.
b) The removal of glazed units shall not affect the performance or safety of adjacent or any other
part of the works. Provide a method statement for removal and replacement of glass panels for
acceptance.
Components
H11.1433 Primary Components

Primary components are all components with a predicted service life of not less than the design life of
the curtain wall without the need for maintenance (with the exception of glass), other than regular
cleaning. The following components shall be considered primary components:
a) All framing and its fixings and means of attachment to the structure.
b) Panels and their fixings.
c) Thermal insulation and vapour barriers.
d) Flashings, gutters, cappings, and similar metal weathering elements.
e) Support steelwork.
f) Sealants, which are concealed within the system and which cannot be inspected without
dismantling the works.
g) Finishes to metal components.
H11.1434 Secondary Components

a) Secondary components are all components with a predicted service life of less than the design
life of the curtain wall, assuming regular cleaning and maintenance in accordance with
information to be provided by the curtain wall supplier. The following components shall be
considered secondary components:
i) Internal linings.

ii) Window and door equipment.

iii) Gaskets and compression seals.
iv) Other sealants.
v) Glass and glazing components.
vi) Motors, actuators and ancillaries.
b) Secondary components shall be capable of replacement without dismantling the works, or
compromising the structural or weatherproof integrity of the system. Components shall be
capable of replacement without progressive dismantling of the works.
c) The predicted service life of secondary components shall be stated and guidance on the
required maintenance provided.
Services
H11.1435 Cables within Box Sections

a) As specified, aluminium box sections shall be capable of containing electrical cables serving
security/access equipment to doors, activators to opening vents, others, as indicated on the
Design Drawings. All wiring shall be concealed.
b) Openings for the installation of cables shall be provided by the Contractor, after discussion and
agreement with the CA.
H11.1436 Opening Lights

a) Unless specified otherwise, opening lights shall comply with BS 6375: Part 2 and with all the
performance criteria specified herein.
b) Opening lights shall not disengage from the fixed areas of the works when open or closed
under any of the specified loads.
c) When fastened in the closed position the opening lights shall not be capable of removal from
the fixed areas of the works except by deliberate action from the interior of the building or from
actuation by the BMS system (smoke pressure equalisation vents).
d) Hinge mechanisms for opening lights shall be such that electrical continuity is maintained for all
opening lights and any limitations in this respect shall be stated in the Tender.
Blinds
H11.1437 General
a) Blinds shall operate with minimal noise, smoothly and consistently for the service life as
specified.
b) All blinds shall be easily operated by a single person using the intended operating mechanism.
H11.2000 SYSTEMS, MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
H11.2100 SYSTEMS
Wall Cladding Systems
H11.2101 Framing to Screen Cladding

a) Solid Stainless Steel frames:
i) Solid stainless steel fabricated posts/framing as shown on the Design Drawings.
ii) Grade of stainless steel to be 1.4401 and of a designation to avoid the occurrence of
stress corrosion cracking.
iii) Profiles/dimensions as shown on the Design Drawings.
iv) Stainless steel to be painted. Paint type to be confirmed.
v) Refer to Section Z11 for stainless steel generally.
b) Working Drawings shall show the final design while strictly maintaining the design intent visual
requirements.
H11.2102 Cast Aluminium Screens to Cladding Systems

a) Refer to the Design Drawings for details of pattern types.

requirements.
c) Cast Aluminium:
i) Material: Of a suitable grade and alloy for casting purposes.
ii) Refer to Section Z11 for aluminium generally.
iii) Panels to be sufficiently thick sheets as required to satisfy the design intent and the
performance criteria.
iv) All edges polished and arrissed.
v) Aluminium to be PVDF
vi) coated.
vii) Panels to be cast to suit the required patterns.
d) Fixings: All fixings shall be concealed. All visible aluminium bracketry to be finished tomatch the
screen.
e) All non visible brackets, reinforcement, cleats, support metalwork etc to be either galvanised
mild steel, stainless steel or an appropriate structural grade of aluminium.
f) All screens to be demountable.
H11.2103 Insulated Backing Wall System
a) Studwork: Galvanised mild steel or stainless steel concealed studwork/framing at centres as
required forming structural inner wall with fixing rails and wind posts as required to support the
screen cladding. The Contractor shall design the studwork to comply with the requirements of
the Specification.
b) Insulation to be provided within the partition system (between studs/framing) as specified
herein to achieve the U-values required. Insulation to be of non-combustible mineral wool or
acceptable equivalent to meet the requirements of the Specification.
c) Outer lining: The outer layer shall comprise of a waterproof layer with lining comprising of one of
the following as shown on the design drawings.
i) Ensure that no fixings are protruding.
ii) Colour anodised aluminium panels.
iii) Veneered timber panels.
d) Inner Lining: 2 layers of 12.5mm plasterboard inner linings fixed to the metal framing.
e) All structural bracing shall be included to cater for the design loading criteria including
pattresses/fixing rails as required.
f) The backing wall system shall provide the breather membrane and vapour barrier to the overall
wall build-up as an integral part of the design. The breather membrane to be fixed to the outer
lining to provide a continuous weather proof membrane which shall be dressed as required to
take water away from the building/cladding.
g) Metal to metal contact shall be isolated to avoid noise emanating from the system under
differential wind loading.
h) The backing wall shall accommodate the required deflection in the structure without resulting in
damage to framing or panels and shall include adjustable bracketry as required. Refer to the
Structural Engineer's Movement and Tolerance Report.
i) The system shall include all clips, flashings, seals, trims, windpost steelwork including all
bracketry, fixings and interfaces necessary to complete the fabrication and installation.
j) The Contractor shall provide all connections, bracketry and fixings to the primary steelwork as
necessary. No visible fixings will be permitted.
H11.2104 Stainless Steel Louvres

a) Single bank shallow section louvre system integrated into the cladding system as required as
shown on the Design Drawings. Louvres to comprise vertical extruded stainless steel profiles to

satisfy the design intent as shown on the Design Drawings.

b) Louvres to provide class A rain defence to comply with the HEVAC standard and to incorporate
sand traps and insect mesh.
c) Stainless Steel louvre blades shall comprise single piece extrusions of profile depth/pitch to
meet the specified performance requirements with metal framing, end capping pieces,
connectors and support bracketry as required for fixing back to the supports.
d) Stainless steel to be grade 1440.1 and have a mirror polished finish.
e) Refer to the M&E specification for requirements for blanking panels, dynamic performance,
pressure drop and free area requirements for all louvers.
f) Refer to section L10 for performance requirements of louvers and sand traps, and section Z11
for stainless steel generally.
Glazing
H11.2105 Glass Types (Refer to section Z25 for general glass clauses)
a) GL-01: Neutral body tinted double glazed unit (solar control) with low reflectivity and good light
transmittance.
b) GL-20 Reflective solar control double glazed unit. Spacers to be aluminium and black in colour
(plastic not acceptable). Silicone black. Outer pane laminated annealed glass (2 sheets). Inner
pane to be heat strengthened glass. Reflective coating to face 2.
c) GL-21: Single glazing. Clear laminated low iron safety glass.
d) GL-22: Reflective solar control double glazed unit. Laminated heat strengthened glass (2
sheets). Inner pane to be heat strengthened glass. Reflective coating to cavity side to reflect
light/UV back on tubes. To have a high performance coating on face 2 and a low E coating on
face 3
e) GL-25: Single glazing. Laminated heat strengthened safety glass.
f) GL-30: Photo-voltaic double glazed units (overhead glazing). Laminated heat strengthened
glass to underside. Reflective coating to face 2, to be confirmed by the architect. Photovoltaic
cells placed within interlayer within outer pane.
g) GL-31 As GL-30 but safety glass with photovoltaic cells within laminated interlayer.
Blinds
H11.2106 Venetian Blinds

a) Raise and tilt mechanism to be electrically operated connected to the B.M.S. for remote
operation. The tilt function is required to be capable of being operated locally at each blind
location.
b) Blinds to be motorised automatically with system with 3 No (up, down or mid height) positioning
control including electro motor, necessary relays and any necessary transformer (as required).
c) Provide manual override in event of power loss and electronic manual override to allow
d) Aluminium components to have PVDF coat finish. Colour to be confirmed.
e) Upper Rail: Extruded aluminium profile (no roll-shaped aluminium strip or galvanised steel strip)
including all necessary stainless steel fixing brackets (powder coated finish) with concealed
spring spanner for rope guide. Turner bar made of electrolytically galvanised square steel
tubing. Maintenance-free, dust-tight, encapsulated bearing with turning roll and spool made of
plastic, segment turn for the prevention of the automatic adjustment of the blind slats.
f) Blind Slats:
i) Dimensions and profiles as shown on the Design drawings.
ii) Material: Aluminium.
iii) Perforations: None.
iv) Finish: Polyester powder coated or PVDF coated. Colour to be confirmed.
v) Slats to be punched as required for operating cords.

g) Guidess. To operate without the need for guide cords. To be confirmed following testing.
h) Lifting Strips: Specially coated polyester strip, or acceptable equivalent, UV resistant, low
expansion and low shrinkage, unbreakable and kink-proof.
i) Lower Rail: Extruded aluminium profile, powder-coated with plastic end-caps.
j) Drive: Concealed built-in, maintenance-free electrical central motor (230V, 50Hz) with built-in
limit switches and thermal protection switches. The motor is switched off at the lower end
position by means of a geared cam limit switch and at the upper end position by means of a
limit switch sensor.
k) The drive is required to be fitted with a suitable incremental transducer to suit.
l) Operation: Lifting and lowering of the light-guiding blinds to rest position by use of the up-down
switch. Turning of the blades with suitable mechanism indicating the respective direction. The
switch to be provided with direction arrows. If the upper or lower limit position is reached, the
limit switches built into the motor cause the automatic switching-off of the drive.
m) All switches shall be stainless steel with brushed 240 grit finish (grade 1.4401).
n) Switches to be integrated into the cladding mullions/framing as required. All wiring shall be
concealed.
o) Rope Guides: Transparently sheathed steel wire core or acceptable equivalent. The cords to be
fastened in the upper rail, and run through all the lamellae and the lower rail. Bottom fixing detail
to be fully concealed. Assembly of internal threaded end stop fixed to transom with dual thread
screw.
p) Corner blinds to be mitred.
q) Refer to the M&E documentation for the specification of controls.
r) All visible metal elements shall be new and free from visible defects or performance defects.
Finishes shal be free from any blemishes, tool or die marks, striations or defects of any kind.
s) Mechanisms shall incorporate overload devices to prevent damage from excessive operating
forces.
t) The works shall provide a robust, smoothly operating installation that meets the performance
requirements, irrespective of the blind's dimensions and shall, with routine maintenance, retain
its original appearance and performance throughout its design life.
u) All moving parts shall move freely and shall be self-lubricating.
v) The following information shall be supplied for every item component and/ or system:
ii) A full description of operating requirements, giving any special features.
iii) A full breakdown of the parts and the catalogue number of the constituent parts.
w) Provide all associated bracketry/ cleats and fixings to fix blinds to the primary structure/cladding
as required.
x) No product names, manufacturer's names or reference numbers or identifying marks shall
appear on the finished surface of any component.
y) Profiles shall be true to line, angle and curvature as indicated on the Design Drawings.
z) Refer to Section Z11 for aluminium and stainless steel generally.
H11.2107 Vertical Slat Blinds

a) Horizontal V shaped vertical slatted blind system as supplied by ’ABBA Solar Protections’ or an
acceptable equivalent, electrically operated connected to the B.M.S. for remote operation. The
open pattern function is required to be capable of being operated locally at each blind location.
b) Blinds to be motorised automatically with system with open/close function and 3 No sliding
positions (fully closed, open or mid way open) control including electro motor, necessary relays
and any necessary transformer (as required).
c) Provide manual override in event of power loss and electronic manual override to allow
d) Aluminium components to have PVDF finish. Colour to be confirmed.

e) Blind Slats:
i) Dimensions and profiles as shown on the Design drawings.
ii) Material: Aluminium/Steel.
iii) Finish:
• External: PVDF finish. Colour to be as the accepted sample.
• Internal: To be coordinated with interior design.
f) Drive: Concealed built-in, maintenance-free electrical central motor (230V, 50Hz) with built-in
limit switches and thermal protection switches.
g) The drive is required to be fitted with a suitable incremental transducer to suit.
h) All switches shall be stainless steel with brushed 240 grit finish (grade 1.4401).
i) Switches to be integrated into the cladding mullions/framing as required. All wiring shall be
concealed.
j) Refer to the M&E documentation for the specification of controls.
k) All visible metal elements shall be new and free from visible defects or performance defects.
Finishes shal be free from any blemishes, tool or die marks, striations or defects of any kind.
l) Mechanisms shall incorporate overload devices to prevent damage from excessive operating
forces.
m) The works shall provide a robust, smoothly operating installation that meets the performance
requirements, irrespective of the blind's dimensions and shall, with routine maintenance, retain
its original appearance and performance throughout its design life.
n) All moving parts shall move freely and shall be self-lubricating.
o) The following information shall be supplied for every item component and/ or system:
ii) A full description of operating requirements, giving any special features.
iii) A full breakdown of the parts and the catalogue number of the constituent parts.
p) Provide all associated bracketry/ cleats and fixings to fix blinds to the primary structure/cladding
as required.
q) No product names, manufacturer's names or reference numbers or identifying marks shall
appear on the finished surface of any component.
r) Profiles shall be true to line, angle and curvature as indicated on the Design Drawings.
s) Refer to Section Z11 for aluminium and stainless steel generally.
H11.2108 Floor Channel Profiles

a) Refer to the Design Drawings for dimensions and profile.
requirements.
c) Refer to Section E50 for precast concrete generally.
d) Fixings/Bracketry: Provide aluminium or steel bracketry as required with suitable corrosion
protection. All fixings and bracketry shall be concealed unless otherwise shown on the Design
Drawings.
H11.2109 Roof Channel/Guide track Profiles

a) Refer to the Design Drawings for dimensions and profile.
requirements.
c) Refer to Section Z11 for aluminium and steelwork generally.
d) The channel profile is required to be capable of accommodating wheels associated with the
travelling/sliding maintenance ladder/platform system and shall be designed to accommodate
the relevant point loads associated with this system. Refer to the relevant façade access report

for details of loads/wheels etc.

e) Fixings/Bracketry: Provide aluminium or steel bracketry as required with suitable corrosion
protection. All fixings and bracketry shall be concealed unless otherwise shown on the Design
Drawings.
f) Provide black coloured stainless steel plate lining to channel where wheel track will
run. Grade to be 1440.1.
H11.2200 MATERIALS
General
H11.2201 Fabric Specifications

a) For metalwork requirements refer to Section Z11 of the Specification.
b) For fixings/adhesives refer to Section Z20 of the Specification.
c) For sealants requirements refer to Section Z22 of the Specification.
d) For glass and coatings requirements refer to Section Z25 of the Specification.
e) For metalwork finishes requirements refer to Section Z30 of the Specification.
f) For powder coatings refer to Section Z31 of the Specification.
g) For PVDF coatings refer to Section Z32 of the Specification.
h) For anodising requirements refer to Section Z33 of the Specification.
i) For gasket requirements refer to Section Z36 of the Specification.
Frames
H11.2202 Glass Retaining Frames Generally

a) Unless otherwise specified, glass retaining frames shall be manufactured from fabricated
stainless steel, extruded aluminium as specified. Shop Drawings shall show the final extrusion
design while strictly maintaining the CA's visual requirements.
b) In certain areas identified in the Structural Engineers documentation the contractor is to allow
for additional support/strengthening by means of steel/aluminium inserts within the mullions and
transoms to accommodate additional dead loads, live loads, wind loads and non standard sized
and shaped panels.
c) Aluminium mullions to have concealed integral clips to prevent lateral deflection whilst under
load. Refer to the Structural Engineers documentation and the Design Drawings.
d) All corners shall be jointed and sufficiently flush, flat and true to comply with the specified
tolerances.
e) Frames shall be fully gasketed with vulcanised corners where in the same plane and forming the
air and vapour barrier. No butting on Site shall be permitted.
f) Unless otherwise agreed with the CA, frames shall be factory-glazed, delivered and installed in
one piece.
g) The frames shall safely and securely retain the glass by means of a combination of dry gaskets,
structural silicone and mechanical restraints along the horizontal edges. To be flush with the
glass surface as shown on the design drawings.
h) Provide concealed mechanical safety restraints for glazing to retain glazing in the event of SSG
bond failing. To be flush with the glass surface as shown on the design drawings. Mechanical
restraints are to allow for vertical movement of glazing panels.
i) All framing shall utilise the minimum cross section necessary to maintain rigidity and
performance.
j) Framing shall include a glazing chamber separated by two seals, one outside the glazing
chamber, the other at the back. The glazing chamber shall be drained to the outside, this
system shall comprise:
i) An outer seal designed to prevent water ingress into glazing or other chambers to
substantially inhibit water penetration and to prevent heavy wetting of the back seal.
Designs having full width gasket seals shall incorporate capillarity breaks to prevent the

ingress and entrapment of water between surfaces in continuous contact.

ii) A back seal. This seal shall act as an air seal to minimise air permeability up to limits as
specified. If subjected to light wetting in localised patches it shall prevent the ingress of
this water to the inside face of the works. (Note: Designs relying upon single stage seals
shall not be used).
iii) State, in the Contractor’s Proposals, the spacings of drainage outlets for acceptance by
the CA and demonstrate the adequacy and suitability of such spacings.
k) Framing for inclined glazing shall match the vertical curtain walling but designed for use as
overhead glazing with drainage channels as required within to take water to the outside of the
building.
H11.2203 Glass Retaining Frames (Structural Silicone Glazing System)

a) Provide a design for prefabricated, unitised, aluminium, stainless steel frames made of thermally
broken or separated extrusions/fabrications as specified, for the structural silicone glazed units.
b) Unless otherwise specified, the concept of the framing shall be a four-sided structural silicone
glazing system with minimal framing being visible from the outside.
c) Face of carrier frames to receive SSG bonded glazing shall not have finish surface coating
which may impair the bond.
d) The framing shall be based on the pressure equalisation principle incorporating an external skin
acting as a water and weather barrier and an internal skin providing the required air and vapour
tight seal. Special openings in the framing shall comply with current glazing recommendations in
size, spacing and location and shall be provided to the exterior of the frames in order to ventilate
around the double glazing units, creating a drainage system for any water or moisture. All
draining provisions shall be provided at the lowest level of the glazing rebates or framing system
cavities to positively prevent any residue water from remaining within.
e) Allow for all glazing frame members to consist of two separate profiles complying with all
structural and surface treatment requirements. Framing shall be assembled using composite
profiles with a proven continuous thermal break material. The thermal break system shall
minimise the thermal transmittance, noise transfer and shall inhibit condensation on any of the
internal surfaces of the framing members, the composite metal panels or the glazing under the
extremes of the design temperatures stated herein.
f) Where structural silicone is specified as the preferred means of panel fixation, it is the visual
intent achieved by this method of fixing that is required. Where secondary means of retention/
support are required to satisfy the performance requirements and/ or local statutory
requirements, these shall be minimal and inconspicuous. All means of retention/ support shall
be clearly indicated as part of the tender return and also after Detailed Design on the Working
Drawings for acceptance by the CA.
g) The framing profiles shall be detailed to allow for the secure attachment of continuous sealing
gaskets, vapour and air seals, gaskets within the glazing rebates as well as connections for
thermal break strips and provision for seals, corner cleats, brackets,butt joint spigots, clip-in
aluminium or stainless steel profiles etc. All of this shall be with due consideration to the
structural requirements, the specified type of surface treatment and to achieve the specified
solar shading, thermal transmittance and sound reduction values.
h) The framing profiles shall be factory assembled into unit frames by means of mitred corners,
mechanically jointed with cleats or with butted corners and the appropriate additional sealant.
The frames shall be structurally sound to fully comply with all applicable and specified wind and
dead load forces that may act on them, in particular during transportation and erection on Site.
The whole framing system shall be detailed to accommodate, without distortion or other
adverse effects, any differential structural and thermal movements.
i) Thermally broken or separated split mullion expansion joints shall be incorporated into the works
wherever required to allow for the thermal movement within the assembly. The outside
dimensions and appearance of these split mullions shall correspond exactly with the standard
frame profiles so that there is no visual distinction between these components. The split
mullions shall be rigid and able to safely withstand any additional forces which may act on the
units, either during transportation or erection on Site, taking into account structural
requirements, the surface treatment, thermal transmittance and sound reduction values. The
entire split mullion system shall be detailed to accommodate, without distortion or other adverse
effects, any differential structural and thermal movements.
j) Weather seals shall be provided at all interfacing connections. The vapour barrier shall always

be installed on the warm side of the thermal insulation to provide a continuous air and vapour
tight seal at all interfacing joints and intersections between the units and the building structure.
k) All framing shall be detailed in order that any necessary replacement of damaged glazing units,
as well as doors, windows and structural silicone glazed components, can be carried out from
outside the building with minimum disturbance to occupants, except for any internal glazing
systems.
H11.2204 Glass Retaining Frames with Dry Pressure Glazing System

a) Prefabricated, unitised, aluminium, stainless steel frames made of thermally broken or separated
extrusions/fabrications for the glazed units.
b) The concept of all the framing shall be detailed to receive a fully pressure equalised glazing
system. The principle shall incorporate an external skin surface acting as a water and weather
barrier and an internal skin surface as an air and vapour tight seal. Special openings shall
comply with the current glazing recommendations in size, spacing and location and be provided
to the exterior of the horizontal glazing and cladding in order to guarantee air ventilation around
the double glazing units and the insulated spandrel panels and to create a drainage system for
any water or moisture. All draining provisions shall occur at the lowest level of the glazing
rebates or framing system cavities to positively prevent any residue water from remaining within.
c) All glazing frame members consisting of two separate framing profiles shall comply with all
structural and surface treatment requirements. These framing extrusions shall be fixed to
composite framing profiles with a proven continuous thermal break material. The thermal break
system shall minimise the thermal transmittance and noise transfer while inhibiting condensation
on any of the internal surfaces of the framing members.
d) The framing profiles shall be detailed to incorporate any necessary glazing beads, continuous
sealing gaskets, vapour and air seals, gaskets within the glazing rebates, connections for
thermal break strips and provision for seals, connection spigots, corner cleats, clip-in metal
profiles, fixing brackets, etc. All of this shall be with due consideration to the structural
requirements, the specified type of surface treatment and to achieve the specified thermal
transmittance sound reduction values.
e) The thermally broken or separated framing profiles shall be factory assembled into unit frames
by means of mitred corners, mechanically jointed with cleats and the appropriate additional
sealant. The frames shall be structurally sound to fully comply with all applicable and specified
wind and dead load forces, being sufficiently rigid to safely withstand any forces that may act on
them during transportation and erection on Site. The whole framing system shall be detailed to
accommodate, without distortion or other adverse effects, any differential structural and thermal
movements.
f) Weather seals shall be provided at all interfacing connections. The vapour barrier shall be
installed on the warm side of the thermal insulation to provide a continuous air and vapour tight
seal at all interfacing joints and intersections between the window and cladding units and the
building structure and/or the precast elements respectively.
g) All aluminium window framing shall be detailed in order that any necessary replacement of
double glazing units can be carried out from outside the building except for internal glazing
systems.
h) Special thermal break provisions shall be employed in the case of the curved window frames to
achieve all of the specified performance requirements of these special window units. The
curved aluminium profiles shall display a uniform radius and shall be free of any rolling marks,
imprints, scratches or distortion.
i) All aluminium extrusions and components shall be composite profiles or units with integral
continuous thermal break provisions. Under extremes of design temperatures and relative
humidity, no condensation shall appear on any internal surface of the framing member, the
composite metal panels or the glazing.
H11.2205 Stainless Steel Framing/Profiles

a) Stainless steel to be grade 1.4401 stainless steel.
b) Visible stainless steel to have satin 240 grit brushed finish or a shot peened finish.
c) Ensure that stainless steel grades are selected to ensure that stress corrosion cracking does
not occur.
d) Refer to Section Z11 for stainless steel generally.

H11.2206 Solid Insulated Aluminium Faced Panels

a) Insulated aluminium faced panels integrated into the curtain walling system forming spandrel
panels and enclosures between concrete columns and mullions as shown on the design
drawings including gasketed joints. All fixings/bracketry to be conceale. Panels shall provide a
flat surface and be designed to prevent the ingress of moisture interstitially or into the building.
b) Insulation to be mineral wool (non-combustible) of suitable thickness and material properties to
meet the U-values, thermal performance as required and acoustic performance as required.
Refer to Environmental Consultant’s report and Acoustic Consultant’s report respectively.
c) Facings: Aluminium Alloy Sheet. Refer to Z11 for sheet aluminium requirements generally.
Panels shall be designed to span between supports as required. Finish type and colour to
match curtain walling framing.
d) Gaskets and all joints shall be fully sealed with double seals to satisfy the water penetration
H11.2207 Glass-To-Glass Corners

a) Where glass-to-glass corners are required, outer glass layer of the double glazed unit shall be
cantilevered and sealant bonded as required. Where the transoms cantilever horizontally to
support elements of the cladding provide inner stain less steel corner ties. Details shall
accommodate movements of the building without compromising the weather resistance and
watertightness. Corners shall stay rigid and maintain their appearance.
b) Glass to glass corners shall have an internal aluminium extrusion for stability and sealing
purposes.
Joints
H11.2208 Movement Joints

a) The requirement for any movement joints within the works shall be ascertained to accommodate
all movements stated herein. The works shall accommodate all movements of the joint in a
manner that does not compromise weather resistance and watertightness.
b) Maintenance of the works joints shall be by visual inspection. Externally and internally, vertical
movement joints shall appear as similar to the standard glazing system joint as possible. The
material used at the movement joint locations shall not be thermally broken or separated.
Windows
H11.2209 Opening Windows

a) Provide prefabricated, unitised aluminium/stainless steel frames incorporating opening
casements with structural silicone glazing, and/or gaskets as required comprising thermally
broken or separated framing components.
b) Where required, opening windows shall be fabricated using cantilevered front pane double
glazing with aluminium/stainless steel inner framing as required (referred to as frameless). The
glazing shall be supported using factory applied structural silicone jointing between back
framing and glazing. All opening vents shall open to the outside/inside as shown on the Design
drawings.
c) Opening windows/casements shall comprise manually and/or automatically operated, bottom or
top hung, opening out casements as shown on the Design Drawings, with concealed restrictor
stays being installed into the framing in lieu of the fixed light glazing, wherever indicated on the
Design Drawings. Smoke control provision shall be maintained in accordance with BS 5588:
Parts 5 and 11 and BS EN 12101: Part 6 and as required by the District Surveyor/Building
Control Officer and/or the Fire Brigade respectively.
d) Where required to be electrically opening, windows shall be fitted with electrically powered
actuators geared to open and close the windows automatically, and to retain them safely open.
Opening windows shall be provided with a local control panel, to be mounted below the false
floor, with control wiring from control panel to window actuator; all fire rated in accordance with
BS 5839 and BS EN 54. Panels shall include stand-by batteries for continuous operation of
vents for a 3-hour period in the event of loss of mains power.
e) Opening frames shall be mitred at the corners and sufficiently accurately cut to prevent the
display of unfinished metal at mitre joints.
f) Section profiles shall comply with glazing rebate depth, width and edge clearance specified by

the glass sealed unit manufacturer or, in the absence of such specific recommendation, with the
provisions of BS 6262. The sealed unit manufacturer’s fabricating tolerances shall be
accommodated. Frames shall be sufficient to restrain the glass under maximum positive and
negative wind pressures.
g) Include for all framing members of the opening casements to comprise two separate metal
profiles, to comply with all structural and surface treatment requirements. The framing to
comprise composite framing profiles with a proven continuous thermal break. The thermal break
system shall minimise the thermal transmittance noise transfer and shall inhibit condensation on
any of the internal surfaces of the framing members.
h) Where opening sections and curtain wall framing sections are required to align, the external
dimensions and appearance of the framing for the opening casements shall correspond exactly
to the perimeter sub-frames for the fixed light glazing so that no visual distinction between these
components can be made. The framing of the opening casements shall be fixed into the
supporting window frames by means of heavy-duty aluminium or stainless steel hinges and
concealed opening restrictor stays. The interfacing joint between the opening casements and
the window frames shall be provided with a minimum of two perimeter sealing gaskets inserted
into corresponding grooves in the aluminium profiles, creating an external rain barrier and the
internal airtight vapour barrier required for a pressure equalised window system. The space
between these gaskets shall be ventilated and drained to the outside of the assembly.
i) Special aluminium/stainless steel extrusions shall be installed into corresponding grooves in the
external side of the framing profiles of the opening casements to provide the loadbearing
bonding surfaces between structural silicone joint and the supporting framework.
j) Special aluminium/stainless steel extrusions shall be installed into corresponding grooves in the
external side of the glazing sub-frame profiles to provide the dead loadbearing support for the
cured silicone glass setting blocks.
k) Special aluminium/stainless steel extrusions shall be installed from the outside to the perimeter
glazing sub-frames to provide a slim perimeter mechanical safety restraint for the structural
silicone glazed double glazing units. This continuous external perimeter glass restraint framing
shall be detailed to provide minimal metal visible externally. The external surface of these
perimeter safety restraints shall be flush with the external surface of the double glazing units.
l) The extrusions for the framing of the opening casements shall be detailed to allow for the
secure installation of continuous sealing gaskets, vapour and air seals, gaskets within the
glazing rebates as well as connections for thermal break strips and provision for seals, corner
cleats, clip-in aluminium profiles, such as the special natural anodised aluminium extrusions for
the bonding of the structural silicone and the continuous perimeter aluminium safety rails for the
four-sided structural silicone glazing, heavy-duty aluminium or stainless steel hinges, concealed
stainless steel opening restraints, concealed multi-point locking devices with budget locks, etc.
All of this under due consideration of the structural requirements, the specified type of surface
treatment and to achieve the specified thermal transmittance and sound reduction values.
m) The thermally broken aluminium or separated profiles shall be factory assembled into opening
casement unit frames by means of mitred corners, mechanically jointed with cleats and the
appropriate additional sealant. The entire opening casement assemblies shall be structurally
sound to fully comply with all applicable and specified wind and dead load forces. They shall be
sufficiently rigid to safely withstand any additional forces that may act onto these assemblies, in
particular during transport and erection on Site. The opening casements shall be detailed to
accommodate, without distortion, water leakage, noise or other adverse effects and/or any
differential structural and thermal movements.
n) All opening casements shall be detailed in order that they may be removed from outside the
building in the event of replacement of damaged double glazing units, so as to create minimum
disturbance to the occupants of the building.
o) The heavy-duty hinges shall be manufactured from aluminium or austenitic stainless steel to fully
comply with all applicable and specified wind and dead load forces. They shall be sufficiently
rigid to safely withstand any additional forces which may act onto the opening casements whilst
being operated or when they are in their closed or open position.
p) Opening casements shall incorporate two fully concealed mechanical opening angle restrictors
with a built-in mechanism to hold the opening casement rigidly in its open position under the full
specified design wind load until the locking latch is manually released.
Doors
H11.2210 General

a) Refer to the Door and Ironmongery Schedule for ironmongery requirements. Interface with the
M&E requirements regarding all security access requirements.
b) Refer to the Fire Strategy Report for fire resistant requirements.
c) Generally all doors to be of a robust nature to conform with DD171, BS 8300 and PAS 24.
Where fire rated doors are required, these shall incorporate fire rated glazing and glazing
methods including fire rated seals.
d) All doors shall prevent unauthorised entry by removing hinges or locking devices.
e) The client shall advise on the mastering requirements.
f) Comply with the requirements of BS 8300.
g) All cables/ conduits to be integrated and concealed in door frames. Draw wires to be provided
for connections by others.
h) Manifestation for all doors to be as referred to in Section Z25.
i) All doors opening outwards unless otherwise shown on the Tender Drawings.
j) Door frames and associated glazing to achieve the required maximum air leakage rates,
weathertightness, acoustic performance and U-values as specified.
H11.2211 Frameless Glass Revolving Door Assemblies

a) Fully automatic frameless revolving doors. Glass drum to be frameless with rigid doorset
comprising 2 and 4 no. door internal leaves depending on door type, held at the top and bottom
pivot points by purpose made patch fittings. Horsehair weatherstrip along the entire door edge,
held by slimline stainless steel or aluminium edge capping's to be provided. All stainless steel to
be satin finished grade 1.4401 with 240 grit. All aluminium to be PVDF coated. RAL colour to
be confirmed.
b) The doors comprise of two or four leaves depending on door type rotating about a central
vertical axis in an anti clockwise direction. Rotating drum to be lockable depending on door
type.
c) Door type with two internal leaves and lockable rotating drum to have integrated sliding door
within central partition as shown on the Design Drawings.
d) The edges of the rotating leaves shall have easily exchangeable brush seals to ensure good
airtightness.
e) Where required, external door leafs shall incorporate a full height grade 1.4401 (316) stainless
steel 38mm diameter tubular vertical push bar connected to the glass and with grit 240
brushed finish. Internally doors to incorporate horizontal push bars also of grade 1.4401 (316)
stainless steel tubular section connected to the glass and with grit 240 brushed finish.
f) The glass door canopy shall be constructed to form a weatherproof canopy externally.
g) Soffit to be fully glazed constructed in two halves from minimum laminated safety glass, with a
central boss to house the bearing. Soffit fits directly onto the curved walls, and is secured by
purpose made stainless steel patch fittings.
h) Each curved glazed wall to be constructed from minimum clear laminated glass with slimline
protective end caps to the vertical edges. The glass is recessed into the matwell trim which is
installed at finished floor level.
i) No skirting shall be required.
j) Glass to the door wings to be clear toughened safety glass to BS EN 12600. Glass to the
curved walls to clear laminated safety glass to BS EN 12600. Glass to the soffits to be clear
clear toughened/ laminated safety glass to BS EN 12600.
k) Provide electromechanical drive with 3-phase asynchronized motor and frequency controller
activated by means of passive infra-red/ radar motion detectors (floor mounted).The fully
automatic drive mechanism shall be concealed floor mounted including built-in activators and
heavy duty motor, and shall incorporate safety cut-off features in case of emergency to BS
7036.
l) The revolving door operating system shall comply with the Local Building Regulations
requirements. When the rotating door section makes contact with a stationary or slow moving
object, the door shall automatically slow down or stop as necessary.

m) For security the door shall be able to be locked with key operated concealed lock to comprise
of patch lock to the bottom outer edge of two door leaves, locking into the floor, accessible and
operable only from the interior of the building.
n) Stainless steel matwell frame formed from profiles to be set to the radius of the door
incorporating recessed linear pattern 'brush off' matting. Matwell material to be extruded
aluminium or stainless steel strips (impact resisting and heavy duty) with inlaid coarse fibre
(coir) inlaid strips to match the matting system to be used in the entrance area.
o) All moving parts requiring lubrication shall have grease caps, which can easily be maintained
and shall not cause oil drips during operation.
p) All specified items for casting-in shall be designed, fabricated and delivered to Site in sufficient
time to cast-in to meet the programme. Check also that they are set out and placed to the
required tolerances, having due regard for concrete tolerances and deflections.
q) In addition, include, inter alia, the following:
i) All copings, sill caps and cappings.
ii) All metal and neoprene flashings inclusive of all necessary supports.
iii) All sealants, coating and seals required to provide both first and second line of protection.
iv) All weepholes, drainer channels and ways to provide a fully drained system.
v) Any steelwork and any other supporting system required.
vi) All miscellaneous steel and aluminium required by the revolving door system, including all
relevant shims, relieving angles, back angles, attachment clips, cramps, corbels, bolts and
other required devices as necessary for the proper support and attachment of the system
to the cladding and having due regard for normal in situ concrete tolerances at the base.
vii) Cutting chases, recesses, mortices, notches, drilling holes and perforations for fixing
devices and the like, securing in position fixing brackets for casting-in concrete, by others,
grouting-in and making good as necessary.
viii) All screws, fixings, bolts, nuts, washers, rivets, distance pieces, etc.
ix) All waterbars, flashing and all other seals at the junction with adjacent work, including all
due allowance for returning to the works to complete the installation of seals after the
adjacent works have been completed.
x) Weather-sealing at interfaces with any adjoining or abutting elements and structures.
H11.2212 Framed Glazed Doors

a) Where forming solid doors within the system, doors shall be robust 'heavy-duty' grade doors to
DD171 and PAS 24, with stainless steel (grade 1.4401) frames designed to prevent the
ingress of water and tested as specified for water penetration and air permeability.
b) Provide prefabricated, unitised aluminium frames incorporating single leaf doors with structural
silicone glazing, fabricated in thermally broken or separated aluminium extrusions.
c) Hinged doors shall be rebated and hung on grade 1.4401 stainless steel hinges and fully
weather-stripped at head, jambs and sills with compression seals. Pivoting doors shall
incorporate heavy-duty hung-pivot mechanisms to suit door design and to prevent ingress of
water.
d) Allow for thermally broken framing members for the leaf of the doors to suit the door weight and
size. The framing shall be assembled as composite framing profiles with a proven continuous
thermal break material. The thermal break system shall minimise the thermal transmittance and
noise transfer and shall inhibit condensation on any of the internal surfaces of the framing
members.
e) The leaf of the doors shall be fixed into the supporting glazed walling system by means of
heavy-duty hinges manufactured from stainless steel or with sliding door gear mechanisms as
specified. The interfacing joint between the door leaf and the door frames shall incorporate two
perimeter sealing gaskets inserted into corresponding grooves in the framing profiles to create
the external rain barrier and the internal airtight vapour barrier. The space between these
gaskets shall be ventilated and drained to the outside of the door assembly.
f) The metal framing for the framing of the leaf for the doors shall be detailed to allow for the
secure installation of continuous weather sealing gaskets within the framing.

g) All ironmongery shall be satin stainless steel, pull handles, locks, etc. to be agreed with the CA.
See also Section P21.
H11.2213 Ironmongery
a) Allow for co-ordination of all ironmongery with the security Contractor and provide ironmongery
and wireways as required. Doors shall include concealed door contact magnets to be
integrated into the design of the door for connection to the B.M.S. Provide Access Control as
required (refer to the M&E Specification for requirements). Conceal all wiring within framework.
Mount all access control equipment recessed flush into door frames as side panels. Develop
details with M&E and Security Sub-Contractors and agree with the CA.
b) External swing doors shall incorporate the following:
i) Concealed head mounted overhead door closers to minimum class C to BS EN 1154
with fully adjustable spring power and backcheck facility.
ii) D line satin stainless steel pull handles both inside and outside, 19mm diameter, as
scheduled in lengths as indicated on the Tender Drawings and Door/ Ironmongery
Schedules, using satin stainless steel (Allgood Ltd 'D line' or acceptable equivalent).
iii) Keyed locks of the pin tumbler, cylinder high security (anti-pick) type, with a minimum of 6
pins. Double cross cut or side-pin cylinders shall be removable when the door is open but
shall not be removable when the door is closed.
iv) Locking and latching devices shall be suited to the door design and shall comply with the
requirements of BS EN 12209 category B locks and latches.
v) Automatic power operated doors shall comply with BS 7036.
vi) Suiteing to be co-ordinated with suiteing requirements for the building as a whole. Refer
to Section P21.
c) Where required, make provision for doors to remain in defaulted 'open position' in the event of a
fire emergency.
Glazing
H11.2214 Systems Generally

a) Select all glazing materials and systems to comply with the performance requirements.
b) Final selection of glass, thicknesses, together with type/heat treatments and location of
interlayer and coatings, shall remain the Contractor's responsibility.
c) Glass and coatings shall be in accordance with Section Z25 of the Specification.
d) Safety manifestation: Refer to the Design Drawings and Section Z25 of the Specification.
e) Subject to final glass selection or unless otherwise specified or agreed with the CA, solar and
low e coatings to be deposited under vacuum by magnetron sputtering process and which shall
be located within the cavity of the double glazed unit.
f) Panes to be separated by 16mm black or dark coloured bent spacer tube, automatically filled
with desiccant.
g) Spacer tubes shall be permanently sealed to the glass by a primary sealant in PIB and the entire
structure to be provided with a secondary sealant in silicone.
h) The solar performance criteria stated herein shall be achieved to +/-2% and measured in
accordance with EN 410. Emissivity coatings shall be measured to comply with
EN673/EN1298 and with tolerance of +/-0.1W/m²K.
i) Cavities of double glazed units to be filled with dehydrated air.
H11.2215 Inclined Glazing

a) Inclined glazing shall comply with the Specification except that the rafter bars/transoms shall
drain directly to the outside at the bottom. Pressure plate fixing screws shall be sealed over with
low modulus clear silicone sealant.
b) The extrusion designers shall be consulted and their recommended torque settings used for
securing pressure plate fixing screws.
GRC

H11.2216 GRC Panels and screens to cladding system Generally

a) The panel units shall be manufactured to sizes indicated on the Working Drawings, and be
within the specified tolerance deviations.
b) Submit details of fixing proposals for review by the Architect.
c) Refer to the Design Drawings for details of pattern types.
d) Bird mesh/spikes are to be integrated in a discreet manner during manufacture. Locations as
shown on design drawings.
e) Working Drawings shall show the final design while strictly maintaining the design intent visual
requirements.
f) Note that double casting of some profiles will be necessary as shown on the design drawings.
g) GRC:
i) Sand: Local Silica sand to GRCA `Specification for the manufacture, curing and testing of
GRC products’, clause 2.3. Make provision for additional aggregate and natural mineral
pigments as may be required to achieve the desired colour if necessary. Ensure that all
aggregate is evenly distributed and suspended throughout the mix without heavy
aggregate particulates settling during curing.
ii) Cement: To BS EN 197: Part 1, CEM 1 Portland cement.
iii) Glass fibre:

• Type: Alkali-resistant continuous filament fibre. To be compatible with Portland
cement.
• Compliance: In accordance with GRCA ‘Specification for alkali resistant glassfibre
rovings and chopped strands for reinforcement of cements and concretes’.
• Content shall be determined in accordance with BS EN 1170.
iv) Mix design and grade shall be determined by the Contractor in accordance with GRCA
`Specification for the manufacture, curing and testing of GRC products’, clause 3.1, for
acceptance by the Architect.
v) Mechanical properties of the GRC to be consistent and suited to the various profiles,
shapes, spans etc as required to meet the performance criteria.
vi) Mixing water:
• To BS EN 1008.
• Water shall be clean and free of impurities that may affect colour, stability, setting or
strength of panels.
vii) Admixtures:
• Submit proposals of proposed types.
• Calcium chloride based admixtures shall not be used where GRC contains cast-in
steel components or fixings.
• Not to contain more than 0.1% chloride Ions.
viii) Pigments:
• Colouring Agents/Pigments: To ASTM-C979 (Standard Specification for Pigmets
for Integrally Coloured Concrete). Only natural mineral pigments shall be used and
must be an alkali and UV resistant, permanent and fade resistant integral through
colour to achieve colour of colour sample provided with Tender Documents. The
colour shall be as uniform and streak free as can be achieved using natural mineral
pigments. To be compatible with all other constituents of the mix such as
aggregates and Portland cement etc. No artificial pigments are permitted to be
added.
• The final selection of colour will be dependant upon the submitted samples
specified herein and the selection of the CA.
ix) Samples:

• Provide a range of samples defining the upper and lower limits of variations in
colour.
• Sample range shall demonstrate that even distribution of aggregate can be
achieved to prevent settlement during curing.
• Sample range shall demonstrate that control of colour and colour shading can be
achieved to reduce colour and colour shading fluctuations.
x) Surface coatings: Provide proposals for acceptance by the CA.
xi) Panels to be sufficiently thick sheets as required to satisfy the design intent and the
performance criteria.
xii) All surfaces to have eased corners.
xiii) GRC to have acid etched finish texture and colour to be selected from the range of
proposed samples by the Architect.
h) Fixings:
i) All fixings shall be concealed. Fixing methods to be selected to suit the expected thermal
and moisture movement, shrinkage, hydration and the nature of materials to be fixed to as
well as the performance criteria to be satisfied. Provide suitable stainless steel bracketry
as required.
ii) All dissimilar metals to be separated to prevent bi-metallic corrosion.
i) All screens to be demountable.
j) Curing:
i) Curing methods are to ensure sufficient strength is achieved to meet the design intent
and structural requirements.
ii) Panels must be kept continually moist during curing or the use of an acrylic thermoplastic
copolymer dispersion with the agreement of the CA.. Duration of curing times to be as per
the manufacturers instructions and suitable for the local conditions.
All reinforcement to be provided to GRC profiles as required to meet the performance requirements.
Provide continuous stainless steel edge framing (picture frame) to GRC panels for support purposes
cast flush into GRC as shown on the design drawings, unless it can be demonstrated to the CA that
this is not required.
Copings
H11.2217 Copings Generally

a) Aluminium coping system comprising fully welded and/or sealed pre-formed aluminium sheet
laid either side of BMU track, over ring beam to form monolithic weather tight barrier.
Incorporating a waterproof membrane underneath dressed down to roofing and cladding
waterproofing as required. Coping system to have finishes as specified for the cladding types.
Joints to occur as shown on the Design Drawings. Where not indicated they should be located
to coincide with cladding grid.
b) Joints to be fully gasketed with recessed/ folded interconnecting joints to provide a neat flush
external appearance. Gaskets shall not be visible at joints.
c) Aluminium sheet shall be sufficiently thick or have suitable rigidising backing board to provide a
visually flat surface and to eliminate excessive distortion and permanent deformation caused by
solar radiation (min. 3mm).
d) Gauge the selection of aluminium thickness/ profile and requirements for reinforcing, bracketry
and fixings to accommodate loads associated with wind loading as well as BMU maintenance
access traffic.
e) Provide special corner pieces for changes in direction as shown on the Tender Drawings.
f) The coping systems shall be weatherproof and watertight, thus ensuring the prevention of water
leakage onto the internal face of the works, and any other part of the system, which may be
adversely affected.
g) All coping systems to be designed and installed to accommodate thermal expansion.
h) Gaskets shall be made of ethylene propylene material (EPDM/ EP). The colour of all gaskets
shall be black.

i) Make provision for BMU track connection into primary structure and coordinate with BMU
contractor and structural contractor for all interfaces. Refer to the structural engineers report
and the façade/access maintenance equipment works package for loadings and interfaces etc.
Flashings
H11.2218 Flashings
a) As indicated on the Design Drawings, aluminium flashings shall be provided. They shall be
treated with anti-drumming insulation on the protected face if required.
b) Flashings shall be PVDF coated to match the cladding.
c) Externally exposed flashings shall have continuation and interconnecting joints fully complying
with the sealant manufacturer’s written recommendations for movement joints; simple butt
straps shall not be accepted.
Fixings
H11.2219 Fixings Requirements

Fixing components shall comply with all statutory requirements (and be to the acceptance of the
District Surveyor/ Building Control Officer/Structural Engineer) both as to strength and type and shall
be designed to carry all dead, live and wind loading under due consideration of any applicable
thermal movements. Select suitable components and fixings in accordance with the following:
a) Stainless steel fixing components for the works shall comprise components of high grade
austenitic stainless steel exterior quality to BS EN 10088, BS EN 10084, BS EN 10087, BS
EN 10095, BS EN 10048, BS EN 10051, BS EN 10250: Part 4 and BS EN ISO 9445 and BS
8298.
b) Fixing bolts, nuts, screws, washers, etc. shall be manufactured from high grade austenitic
stainless steel complying with BS EN ISO 3506: Parts 1 and 2. All screw fixings and
attachments shall be secured against vibrating loose.
c) All fixing brackets for the works shall comprise components of high grade austenitic stainless
steel exterior quality, grade 1.4401 to BS EN 10250: Part 4, BS EN 10084, BS EN 10095, BS
EN 10029, BS EN 10048, BS EN 10051, BS EN 10258, BS EN 10259 and BS 8298,
complying with all statutory requirements both as to strength and type and shall be designed to
carry all dead, live and wind loading under due consideration of any applicable thermal
movements.
d) Any sheet mild steel used in the fixing assemblies shall comply with BS 7668, BS EN 10029,
BS EN 10210 and BS EN 10025: Parts 1-4 and 6 and rolled sections shall be used wherever
practicable or appropriate. Steel sections used shall be hot-dip galvanised to the requirements
of BS EN ISO 1461 after all cutting, drilling of holes and welding has been completed.
e) All non-visible supporting aluminium sub-constructions shall be corrosion protected. Mill
finished aluminium shall not be used. Aluminium sub-constructions shall be separated from
concrete by bitumen paint or similar acceptable method. Austenitic stainless steel to BS EN
10088 may be used in lieu of aluminium for any supporting sub-constructions.
f) Ensure all fixings remain firm (i.e. do not loosen from their set positions) under vibration loads.
g) Refer to Section Z20 for fixings generally.
h) Details describing the design, materials, location and installation procedures of all anchorage
and fixing supports shall be fully described in the Shop Drawings.
i) Floor anchors cast into the concrete structure shall be non-corrosive.
j) Fixings shall be designed to ensure that they are not visible internally or externally in the
completed works, unless clearly shown on the Working drawings and accepted by the CA.
k) Visible fixings shall comprise hex-headed bolts with hex-headed nuts, ensuring that bolts are not
excessive in length.
l) Where EWS types run either full or double height and fixings/bracketry are visible refer to the
Design Drawings for appearance requirements. Fixings and bracketry to be either secret or
flush fitting and stainless steel to be grade 1440.1 satin brushed 240 grit. Refer to section Z20
for fixings generally and section Z11 for stainless steel generally.
H11.2220 Fixing Directly to Concrete Structure

a) In general, cast-in channels shall be the method of connecting the façade brackets to the

structure. To be coordinated with the Structural Engineers Specification.

b) Provide and install all fixing devices, including framing, bearing brackets, movement fixings, etc.
and carry out all necessary preparation work such as drilling, plugging, screwing, bolting,
cutting for anchor bolts or sockets to be cast in, making good, including grouting-in of anchor
bolts, and fixing whatsoever necessary.
c) All fixings shall be co-ordinated with the superstructure design
d) The Contractor shall provide proposed detailed design of fixings for curtain walling and
cladding showing how they will accommodate for the presence of post tension stress in the
slab.
e) Submit details of all fixings for review and acceptance by the CA.
f) The contractor shall provide suitable cast-in brackets/fixings as required. Refer to the structural
engineers documentation and liaise with the relevant superstructure contractor to finalise the
detailing and all interfacing requirements.
H11.2221 Fixing Directly to Steel Structure

a) Provide and install all fixing devices, including framing, bearing brackets, movement fixings, etc.
and carry out all necessary preparation work such as drilling, plugging, screwing, bolting,
cutting for anchor bolts or sockets, making good, including fixing whatsoever necessary.
b) All fixings shall be co-ordinated with the superstructure design
c) The Contractor shall provide proposed detailed design of fixings for curtain walling and
cladding showing how they will accommodate for the presence of post tension stress in the
slab.
d) Submit details of all fixings for review and acceptance by the CA.
e) The contractor shall provide suitable brackets/fixings as required. Refer to the structural
engineers documentation and liaise with the relevant superstructure contractor to finalise the
detailing and all interfacing requirements.
f) Visible fixings shall be countersunk, inverted hexagonal key operated bolts. Refer to Structural
Engineer’s specification.
Sealants and Gaskets
H11.2222 Sealants
a) Sealant shall not leak or bleed causing any discolouration and runoff staining below or above
horizontal joints shall be avoided either on stone facing or on elements.
b) Structural Silicone Sealants:
i) All glazing requiring structural silicone bonding shall be glazed under controlled factory
conditions without any need for Site applied structural bonding sealant, unless accepted
otherwise by the CA.
ii) Structural sealant glazing design shall limit the design tensile stress of sealants to
138kPa.
H11.2223 Gaskets
a) Gaskets shall be made of either Ethylene Propylene material (EPDM/EP) or of Silicone. The
colour of all gaskets shall be black.
b) All visible room side glazing gaskets shall have factory vulcanised corners. All other gaskets
shall have overlapping joints with appropriate sealant in between. It is a condition that the
internal sealant of the entire envelope system has a continuous vapour and air seal. This also
includes all interfacing connections.
Miscellaneous Materials
H11.2224 Metal Studwork

a) Metal studs shall be fabricated from galvanised mild steel (or stainless steel if not accessible for
maintenance) designed to suit the wind loading requirements and loads associated with the
outer screen cladding systems and surface fixed components as required.
b) The framing/ stud system shall be fully concealed with appropriate fixings to the primary
structure soffit/ floor/ walls, etc. ensuring compliance with the design requirements of the

Specification.
c) Framing to be designed to accommodate fixings related to any face fixed cladding systems.
Where fixings penetrate the breather membrane ensure that a water and vapour tight seal is
achieved.
d) Provide windposts as required, designed to meet the wind loading criteria specified.
e) Refer to Section Z11 of the Specification for steel generally.
H11.2225 Breather Membrane

a) Material: High performance reinforced membranes of foil or plastics, protected both sides by
rigid facings/linings to give a Class 0 spread of flame to meet the performance criteria
specified.
b) Fix carefully and neatly to provide a complete barrier to water, snow and wind blown dust.
Horizontal laps to be 100mm, vertical laps 150mm and staggered, to shed water away from the
substrate and structure.
c) Provide all sealing at junctions as required.
H11.2226 Vapour Barrier

Provide an suitable barrier fully continuous to warm side of insulation and fixed to the cavity side of
the backing wall system as shown on the Design Drawings.
H11.2227 Damp-proof Membrane

a) The membrane shall be impermeable, rot-proof and resistant to specified extremes of movement
and environmental temperatures. The membrane shall be vapour resistant, vapour permeable
and airtight where necessary.
b) Submit details of proposed materials for review.
c) The material shall be composed of elastomer base (EPDM), or equivalent.
d) Substrates to receive bonding shall be free from dust and grease, free of cavities, ridges and
sharp projections and be primed to receive adhesive as recommended by the membrane
manufacturer. Surfaces that are not suitable to receive membrane shall be reported to the CA.
e) Membrane shall be lapped at least 100mm and bonded according to the manufacturer’s full
recommendations.
f) Other materials/testing standards may be put forward for review by the CA.
H11.2228 Insulation
a) The insulation shall be inert, durable, rot-proof and vermin-proof and not be degradable by
moisture, extreme temperatures or water vapour.
b) The insulation shall not bulge, sag, delaminate or detach during its installation or in situ during
the life of the works.
c) Insulation shall be LPCB certified to LPS 1181.
d) Insulation shall have zero Ozone Depleting Potential (ODP), be CFC and HFC free and have a
Global Warming Potential (GWP) of less than five. Refer also to Section A.6000 of the
Specification.
e) Insulation shall be selected to meet the recommendations of ‘The Green Guide to Specification’
and shall have a minimal environmental impact when assessed using BREEAM/L.E.A.D
International criteria.
f) The selected insulation shall comply with all relevant British Standards and be BBA certified.
H11.2229 Standard Plasterboard

Aerated gypsum core plasterboard to BS 1230: Part 1, classification type 1, with exposed surface
suitable for decoration and tapered edges for smooth seamless jointing or square edge boards for
surfaces to be finished as required.
H11.2230 Fire Resistant Plasterboard

Gypsum plasterboard with glass fibre and additives in core to improve fire resistance to BS 1230:
Part 1, classification type 5 and tested to BS 476: Parts 6 and 7 with exposed surface suitable for

decoration and tapered edges for smooth seamless jointing. Board to be moisture resistant where
required.
H11.2231 Moisture Resistant Plasterboard

To BS 1230: Part 1, types 3 and 4 with moisture resistant core and moisture repellent paper facings.
Moisture resistant plasterboards (where specified as such) shall have moisture resistant liners with
additives, silicone or equivalent, to improve moisture resistance to absorb less than 5% of water by
weight in the total immersion test when tested in accordance with BS 1230: Part 1, and ASTM C
473 and less than 100g/ m² (BS 1230) of water in the surface water absorption tests.
H11.2232 Impact Resistant Plasterboard

Heavy-duty paper faced plasterboard with high density core to BS 1230: Part 1, classification type 5,
with exposed surface suitable for decoration and tapered edges for smooth seamless jointing.
H11.2233 Foilbacked Plasterboard

Moisture resistant gypsum plasterboard with a metallised polyester film backing water vapour control
layer. The plasterboard base shall be to BS 1230: Part 1 with moisture vapour resistance of backing
layer not less than 60 MNs/ g.
H11.2234 Acoustic Plasterboard

Dense gypsum core paper faced, taper edged acoustic plasterboard with a minimum weight of
10kg/m². To comply with EN 520 Type D.
H11.2235 External Grade Board

Suitable proprietary external grade boards to be proposed by the Contractor.
Cladding Support Structure
H11.2236 Supports – All Architectural Steelwork

Provide a structural steel cladding support structure, as necessary, having due regard for any
requirements in excess of that indicated on the Structural Engineer's Drawings and also any
requirements indicated on the Design Drawings. The structural steelwork shall comply with the
Structural Engineer's Steelwork Specification, including protective coatings.
H11.2300 FABRICATION
H11.2301 Fabrication of Curtain Walling Systems
a) Unless otherwise specified or agreed, curtain walling shall be fabricated as a unitised system.
b) Fabricate sections to accommodate and interface with work of other adjacent works by means
of rabbets, interlocks, miscellaneous angles, trim and filler sections, as required.
c) Component fastenings shall be concealed throughout, shall be of adequate strength, fabricated
from aluminium or stainless steel and shall be fusion welded where required. Jointing and
intersections of the metal shall be accurately cut and fitted to a tolerance of 1mm in true planes
with adequate concealed fastenings and sealed. Welds shall be ground smooth and flush,
buffed and polished so that they are indistinguishable from surrounding metal.
d) Reinforce mullions with aluminium or stainless steel sections as required. Secure aluminium
sections with adequate anchors to structure.
e) All gaskets shall be free from all contact and migration stain and compatible with all substrates,
sealants and finishes with which they have contact. Refer to Section Z36.
f) Provide inconspicuous, baffled weepholes to properly vent, and drain system cavities to exterior.
g) Fabricate glazing recess of sufficient depth to cover glass edge-seal. Refer to Section Z25.
H11.2302 Structural Glazing

a) Structural glazing shall only be carried out in the factory. No structural glazing will be permitted
on site, except for replacement of broken or sub-standard glass or for 'come back' work.
b) Primers and cleaners and their application shall be strictly as recommended and approved by
the silicone glazing manufacturer.
c) Identify each curtain wall panel by a number, record the date of assembly, silicone type and
batch, curing time, temperature and humidity within the plant at time of assembly.

d) Refer to Sections Z22 and Z25 and fabricate in accordance with Guideline for European
Technical Approved for Structural Sealant Glazing Systems (SSGS) ETAG No. 002.
H11.2303 Tolerances for Manufacture and Element Fabrication

a) Take into account the required erection tolerances during fabrication and ensure that the
Detailed Design accommodates these. These erection tolerances may impose tighter
fabrication tolerance requirements to ensure that the erection tolerances are achieved.
b) Assembly: The physical fitting together of any assembly of sub-elements shall be properly
allowed for in the Detailed Design of the corresponding sub-elements.
H11.2304 Welding Procedures

a) Welding for mild steel shall be in accordance with BS EN ISO 15614: Part 1.
b) Welding for stainless steel shall be in accordance with BS EN 1011: Part 3. Remove heat
marks using light abrasives, wire brushing or other suitable means in order to match specified
finish.
c) Welding for aluminium shall be in accordance with BS EN 1011: Part 4.
H11.2305 Tolerances for Manufacture

a) The following tolerances apply to each individual component:
i) Length/Width: Maximum allowed deviation is the lesser of 1.5mm up to 3000mm and
***3.0mm*** above 3000mm of design dimension.
ii) Thickness/Depth (extrusion tolerances nominally): Maximum allowed deviation is ±0.5mm.
b) Panel Flatness
i) The panels shall achieve the flatness criteria stated in clause H11.2306 by provision of
stiffeners as necessary or the acceptable composite build-up. On no account shall the
stiffening or other method of achieving the flatness tolerance be visibly apparent in the
completed works.
ii) The Contractor shall provide visual prototypes and full size samples of the cladding
panels for the CA’s review and acceptance.
H11.2306 Tolerances for Component Assembly

a) Assembly: The physical fitting together of any assembly of sub-elements shall be properly
b) Comply with the following tolerances during assembly of components:
i) Level of horizontal members: ±1mm from datum in 1500mm non-cumulative.
ii) Plumb of vertical members: ±1mm to the vertical in any 1500mm, non-cumulative.
iii) Squareness: Any diagonal length across the panel shall not deviate by more than the
lesser of ±3mm or ±0.075% of design dimension.
iv) Bow: The centre section of the element shall not bow by more than the lesser of 3mm or
0.075% of the length of the element measured from a straight line between the ends of
the element.
v) Straightness: Any surface or edge shall not deviate by more than 1/1000 or 1.5mm from
a 2m straightedge placed against it in a direction parallel to the long axis of the element.
vi) Flatness of panels/framing: Any surface shall not deviate by more than 1/1000 or 1.5mm
from a 2m straightedge placed against it in any direction.
vii) Twist: No section of the element may be twisted by more than 1° from the section at
either end of the element.
c) All finished metal surfaces shall be free from undulations and irregularities.
i) Twist: ±1.5mm - there shall be no warping of frame.
ii) Line of panel: ±2mm overall difference between adjacent standards.
d) Tolerances shall not be cumulative.
H11.2307 Tolerances for Manufacture of GRC Panels

a) Deviations in panel length, width and diagonal dimensions shall not exceed ±1mm.
b) The twist and warping shall not cause any point of the panel shall be more than 0.5mm out of
plane. The twist and warping shall not cause any point of the structural frame to be more than
2mm out of plane.
c) Alignment of joints between panels shall not exceed ±2mm.
d) Alignment of the faces between panels shall not exceed ±1mm.
H11.2308 Manufacture for GRC

a) The panels shall be manufactured off site in controlled factory environment to BS EN 1169.
b) Check the overall dimensions, straightness, squareness, twist and flatness of the moulds
immediately before each reuse and of each unit as soon as possible after demoulding. Make
adjustments to moulds as necessary.
c) All hand forming details shall be carried out before the material has achieved its initial set, to
ensure complete bonding.
d) Curing methods shall be adopted to achieve sufficient strength fro the demoulding process.
H11.2400 FINISHES
H11.2401 Colours
a) Colours to be to RAL colours or anodising colours and specified by the CA. PVDF and
polyester powder coatings (30% gloss/70% matt). Colours to be determined on the basis of
samples provided for acceptance by the CA.
b) All finishes shall be of sufficiently durable quality to suit the prevailing environmental conditions
including wind-blown sand. Refer to Section Z31 for polyester powder coatings, Section Z33
for anodising and Section Z32 for PVDF coatings.
H11.2500 ANCILLARIES
Lightning Protection and Earth Bonding
H11.2501 General
a) Bonding is required between individual sections of cladding, in accordance with BS 6651 and
BS EN 62305: Parts 1-4, to ensure continuity between adjacent sections, both vertically and
horizontally over the whole façade. Bonding between sections shall have a minimum cross
section of 50mm².
b) Bonding between the cladding and structural steelwork shall be carried out at intervals at no
greater than 10m horizontally and 20m vertically. The first level of bonding to the structural
steelwork shall be at the highest floor level of each part of the building.
c) Provide studs/bolts on the cladding for subsequent connections to be made by the lightning
protection contractor.
d) All straps/connections shall be concealed.
e) No straps shall be fixed along copings.
Fixing Brackets for Blinds
H11.2502 General
a) Fixing brackets shall be provided fixed to the framework as indicated on the Design Drawings.
b) Brackets shall be compatible with the blinds proposed for incorporation.
Cradle Restraints
H11.2503 Cradle Restraint Sockets

a) Include into the façade design the integration of stainless steel sockets provided by the Façade
Access Equipment sub-contractor, to act as cradle lateral restraints as required under BS EN
1808.
b) The locations and type of socket, including their mounting shall be advised by the Façade
Access Equipment sub-contractor.

H11.3000 SITE INSTALLATION
H11.3100 WORKMANSHIP
H11.3101 Generally
a) All works shall be true to detail with continuous profiles, free from marks, defects, flaws, steps,
waves, or damage of any nature.
b) Dimensions and levels of the structure shall be verified.
c) The glazing works shall be set out such that all framing members are installed in the correct
position, within tolerance, and in the correct relationship to the building structure.
d) All fixing bolts and anchors shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommended procedures.
e) Materials shall be kept dry until fixed.
f) Acceptance shall be obtained from the CA before drilling or cutting parts of the structure, other
than where shown on the Working Drawings.
g) Isolating tape, plastic washers or other suitable means shall be used to prevent bi-metallic
corrosion between dissimilar metals.
h) Bars shall be set out at evenly spaced centres, straight, parallel and truly aligned with other
features where shown on the Working Drawings.
i) The finished work shall be square, regular, true to line, level and plane with a satisfactory fit at all
junctions.
j) Ensure that all interfacing requirements relating to fixings are provided. Liaise with the primary
structural steelwork/ concrete sub-contractor in due time prior to fabrication of structural
steelwork/ concrete to ensure that fixing holes, brackets, lugs, etc. are provided in correct
locations to agreed tolerances suitable for fixing curtain walling system as required.
k) Ensure that any remedial works are carried out where damage to structural steelwork finishes or
corrosion protection occurs.
l) Ensure that all interface requirements are provided relating to lightning protection and earth
bonding.
m) Ensure that all interfaces with roof covering systems and associated flashings are
accommodated as indicated on the Design Drawings.
n) Ensure that interfaces with internal bulkhead ceiling linings are accommodated.
o) Ensure that all interfaces with internal partitions and floor slabs are accommodated including
requirements for providing continuity of fire and acoustic separation as required.
H11.3102 Blinds Generally

a) Install blinds to minimise the light leakage through the installation in the closed position.
b) Assemble the blinds completely in the fabrication shop prior to delivery to Site. Test each blind
for proper performance prior to packaging.
c) Secure the blinds with appropriate fixing brackets to withstand all operating forces. Accurately
level the head rail to ensure that the blinds hang vertically or parallel to the walls/ mullions, etc.
which require tolerances.
d) Adjust to provide an equally spaced, vertical and level system. Adjust the lift wires/ tapes to
ensure that the Blinds are parallel in the raised and halfway position.
e) Adjust the installation to ensure that the blinds hang correctly and operate smoothly with edges
aligned and correctly spaced. When operated, the Blinds must stop at the open, closed and
predetermined intermediate position with their bottom edges aligned and parallel to the floor.
f) Store installed blinds/ shades in their fully retracted position to avoid damage and accumulation
of dust and dirt until Practical Completion.
g) Retain the protective covering in position, for as long as is practicable. Each individual blind
shall be signed off as in working order with the CA.
H11.3103 Quality of GRC Finishes

a) The panel finishes shall be uniform in colour, texture and appearance, unless specified
otherwise.
b) Panel finish shall match the agreed Control Samples. Disregard and replace any units that do
not appear identical to the accepted samples.
H11.3200 TOLERANCES
H11.3201 Installation
a) The works shall be installed to meet the tolerances as specified below. These tolerances shall
be adhered to for the works in its completed installed condition. Make due allowance for any
structural movements and deviations including deformations caused by the installation itself
due, for example, to the effect of the self-weight of the cladding on its supporting structure. In
this respect, refer to the Project Common Movement and Tolerances Report document. In the
case of any doubt seek further advice from the Project Structural Engineer regarding the
deformations which shall be allowed for in the Detailed Design and installation.
b) Level: Set out following horizontal bands, each corner of the panel shall be placed to within
2mm of the design dimension to the corresponding Horizontal Location Reference Plane.
Further, the bottom edge of each cladding panel, based on the mean level of the respective
bottom corners, shall be placed to within ±1mm of the design dimensions from the
corresponding Location Reference Plane. Unless otherwise stated, the Location Reference
Plane shall be defined as the horizontal plane through the mean level of the tops of the primary
edge beam elements or slab edge to which each horizontal cladding panel band is
placed/suspended.
c) Plumbness: Each panel’s reference face (exterior face for external cladding, visible face for
single side exposure panels) shall be installed such that the respective offset distances of the
top and bottom edges of the panel to an adjacent true vertical line (plumbline) do not differ by
more than 2mm or 0.1% of the height of the panel, whichever is less.
d) Panel Plan Alignment: The panels shall be installed such that the distances of the respective
corners of the reference face to the cladding Location Reference Plane are within 3mm of the
Design Dimension and do not differ from each other by more than 2mm. This applies both to the
top and bottom edges of each panel. Unless otherwise stated, the Vertical Location Reference
Plane shall be defined as the mean plane of the edges of the primary edge beams or slab
edges corresponding to top and bottom widths of each cladding panel.
e) Transom alignment: The misalignment between the edge of a cladding panel and its supporting
transom shall not exceed 1mm.
f) Joints: Where adjacent elements are designed to have edges, lines or surfaces which line
through their common joint, the maximum allowed step across the joint is the lesser of ±2mm or
±10% of the joint width in any direction.
g) The works shall be erected plumb and in proper alignment and relation to established lines and
grades as shown on the Working Drawings. The erected system shall present true and accurate
lines and flat planes. Deviations from lines, planes and verticality shall be limited to long wave
formations of minimum wave length of 20m length with a rate of exchange not exceeding
1:1000 and a maximum amplitude of 3mm. All the above shall be measured from an optical or
laser reference line.
h) All tolerances stated shall be measured and monitored at a mean temperature to be agreed with
the CA. Before work begins on Site the proposed method of dimensional setting-out and cross-
checking with adjacent trades and elements, to satisfy the accuracy requirements, shall be
submitted to the CA. The checking of any setting-out or of any line or level by the CA, or his
representative, shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the
correctness thereof.
i) Alternative tolerances to those specified may be permitted at the CA's discretion, provided they
are agreed in advance of the manufacture of components.
j) Tolerances shall not be cumulative.
H11.3202 Site Erection

a) Horizontal Plan Position: For any element at any level whose position is defined in relation to a
primary reference grid, the maximum allowed deviation from the Design Dimension to that
reference grid is ±2mm.
b) Where a series of elements are arranged in an array of two or more, the maximum allowed

deviation of the horizontal distance between any two adjacent elements is ±2mm from the
corresponding Design Dimension.
c) Verticality: For any element connecting two or more reference levels, the maximum allowed
deviation of the relative plan position in any direction of that element at any two successive
levels is ±2mm from the corresponding Design Dimension.
d) Planarity: Any element or group of elements whose position is defined from a reference plane
shall not deviate from the Design Dimension of the reference plane by more than ±2mm
measuring perpendicular to the defined plane.
End of Section

APPENDIX A
Performance Testing for Special Cladding EWS-20c and EWS-40a

Information provided by Foster and Partners and BDSP.

Testing of EWS-40a
Verification, testing and fine tuning of parameters on a Physical Model
Introduction
A performance test is proposed for the Office Tower EWS-40a to verify performance predictions and tune physical
parameters. The performance test is not intended to verify aesthetic properties of the façade system and shall be
entirely separate from any specified requirements for aesthetic mock ups and tests. It should be noted that the
performance tests will need to be carried out in advance of the visual mock-ups.
The façade has the following features:
− an external double glazed unit (DGU) with high performance reflective solar coating and low E coating
− an internal single glazed back up wall which is openable to facilitate cleaning
− a blind in the cavity between the DGU and back up wall – it is likely that the blind will normally be fully lowered
and occupants will be given ‘tilt’ control only.
− the cavity is internally ventilated using exhaust air from the adjoining office space
The objectives of this configuration are as follows:
− Maximum views
− Limit solar gain with the reflective coating and ventilated cavity which removes heat at source
− Reduce peak cooling load in perimeter office areas and reduce energy required for cooling
− Maximize comfort at the perimeter by cutting down direct solar gain and reducing surface temperatures of the
room facing glass
The specific purpose of the test programme is to:
− Verify thermal performance predictions under design conditions, particularly overall heat gain (SHGF and G-
Value)
− Optimise cavity ventilation flow rates in relation to thermal performance
− Verify internal glass surface temperatures under design conditions
− Optimise mounting position of the blind in the cavity and its impact on thermal transmittance and comfort
− Ensure proposed ventilation inlet and outlet positions and sizes avoid blind ‘flutter’ and confirm there is no
requirement for blind guides
Whilst the test could also be used to confirm the required performance in terms of avoidance of condensation on
mullions and glass, this would require actual mullion sections and the added complication of replicating external
humidity as well as temperature. For the time being condensation checks will therefore NOT form part of this test
programme.
The Tenderer shall include in his Tender for laboratory testing in a facility that can provide the facilities and testing
described below and in particular can faithfully create the design conditions. The Tenderer may propose alternative
methodologies for the physical testing, such as field testing. However, a laboratory test is preferred for its ability to
control all parameters consistently during the test programme.
− The test shall be conducted in a climate chamber where the design internal and external conditions can be
created either side of the Abluftfenster. The key is to re-create near-design conditions without too many
compromises. The internal temperature shall be maintained by a recirculating fan coil with supply diffusers
located so as not to influence the test results. The design conditions to be created are:

− Internal temperature 22°C
− External temperature up to 50°C
− Simulated solar energy with similar short wave radiation spectrum at variable altitude and a
radiation flux up to 1,000 W/m²
− The laboratory shall accommodate a 3m length of façade
− The section of façade for testing shall faithfully replicate all physical features that could impact on the tests and
results. Ideally, this would be a true mock up with correct framing and mullion details but the development
programme may not allow this. Key physical components shall include:
− Actual glass configuration for DGU and inner back up wall – glass thicknesses, solar
coating, low E coating, spacing, etc
− Framing with equivalent dimensions and thermal properties to the final frame
− Blind matching the architect’s preferred blind – material, finish/reflectance, perforation and
position relative to the DGU/back up wall. Position of the blind within the cavity to be
adjustable.
− Ventilation inlets and outlets shall match the design proposals in terms of numbers, size,
location, etc.
− Ventilation flow rates through the cavity shall be capable of being varied in the range 4-20 l/s per linear metre
of façade. An extract fan and ductwork connected via a plenum to the top of cavity shall draw air into the
cavity from the ‘internal’ room. A separate supply ventilation system shall provide make-up air. The make-up
air will need to be cooled and supplied to the internal room so as not to influence the test results.
Testing of EWS-20c
Introduction
A performance test is proposed for the T1 Hotel and T2 Residential thermal tube panels to verify performance
predictions and tune physical parameters. The performance test is not intended to verify aesthetic properties of the
façade system and shall be entirely separate from any specified requirements for aesthetic mock ups and tests. It
should be noted that the performance tests will need to be carried out in advance of the visual mock-ups.
The test shall be carried out by the Cladding Contractor in conjunction with the preferred supplier of the solar thermal
tubes. The experience of the supplier with regard to thermal tube performance shall be used in finalising the details
and running of the tests.
Façade Panels
The thermal tube façade panels have the following features:
− an external ‘clear’ single glazed unit – minimum Solar Transmittance 75% - refer to Specification for full
performance data
− an internal ‘reflective’ double glazed back up wall which is openable to facilitate cleaning and maintenance –
refer to Specification for glass performance
− solar thermal tube arrays within the glazing cavity
− Panels are oriented as close as possible to ESE (-66.5°) and WSW (+66.5°) to achieve homogenous solar
collection ability over the year
The objectives of this configuration are as follows:

− Maximise solar energy collection
− Limit direct solar gain to the room behind
− Limit surface temperatures of room facing glass
Performance Requirements
The performance requirements for the system are as follows:
− Minimum specific collector output for ESE orientation – 725kWh per annum per m² panel aperture area (ie
excluding headers and fixings), excluding circulation line losses.
Testing
The specific purpose of the test programme is to:
− Verify thermal performance of the panel under design conditions, particularly overall heat gain (SHGF and G-
Value)
− Prove solar energy collection capability and demonstrate by testing and calculation that the specified
performance requirements will be achieved – for ESE orientation
− Extend the testing and calculations to provide an overall annual energy collection profile for the entire system
of solar collectors.
− Verify all glass surface temperatures under peak thermal design conditions with and without thermal tubes
operational
The Tenderer shall include in his Tender for laboratory testing in a facility that can provide the facilities and testing
described below and in particular can faithfully create the design conditions. The Tenderer may propose alternative
methodologies for the physical testing, such as field testing. However, a laboratory test is preferred for its ability to
control all parameters consistently during the test programme. The Tenderer shall provide a full method statement for
testing and calculations for approval.
− The test shall be conducted in a climate chamber where the design internal and external conditions can be
created either side of the façade panel. The key is to re-create near-design conditions without too many
compromises. The internal temperature shall be maintained by a recirculating fan coil with supply diffusers
located so as not to influence the test results. The design conditions to be created are:
− Internal temperature 22°C
− External temperature up to 50°C
− Simulated solar energy with similar short wave radiation spectrum at variable altitude and a
radiation flux up to 1,000 W/m²
− The laboratory shall accommodate a minimum 3m length of façade and a panel one storey high
− The section of façade for testing shall faithfully replicate all physical features that could impact on the tests and
results. Ideally, this would be a true mock up with correct framing and mullion details but the development
programme may not allow this. Key physical components shall include:
− Actual glass configuration – glass thicknesses, coatings, spacing, etc
− Framing with equivalent dimensions and thermal properties to the final frame
− Thermal tubes configured with pipework connections and pumping/water flow arrangement
to recommendations of thermal tube supplier.


Contents
H31 METAL PROFILED SHEET CLADDING/COVERING/SIDING ......................3

H31.1102 Scope of Works..............................................................................................................................................................................3
H31.1103 Particular Interfaces .......................................................................................................................................................................3
H31.1200 SYSTEM TYPES ................................................................................................................ 3

External Wall Cladding ................................................................................................................................................................. 3
H31.1201 Type PAN-43 Aluminium Panels ................................................................................................................................................3
H31.1300 SUBMITTALS AND TESTING .......................................................................................... 3

H31.1301 Tender Response ...........................................................................................................................................................................3
H31.1302 Pre-contract Samples ...................................................................................................................................................................4
H31.1303 Post Contract Samples ................................................................................................................................................................4
H31.1304 Mock-ups..........................................................................................................................................................................................4
H31.1305 Prototypes ........................................................................................................................................................................................4
H31.1306 Benchmark Requirements............................................................................................................................................................4
Testing............................................................................................................................................................................................... 4
H31.1307 Test Requirements .........................................................................................................................................................................4
H31.1308 Wind Resistance Testing .............................................................................................................................................................4
H31.1309 Waterproofing and Weathertightness Testing .......................................................................................................................5
H31.1310 Site Hose Test ................................................................................................................................................................................5
H31.1400 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS................................................................................ 5

Structural .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 5
H31.1401 General .............................................................................................................................................................................................5
H31.1402 Specific Movements ......................................................................................................................................................................5
H31.1403 Specific Live Loads........................................................................................................................................................................5
H31.1404 Wind Loads......................................................................................................................................................................................5
H31.1405 Thermal Movement.........................................................................................................................................................................5
Environmental .................................................................................................................................................................................. 5
H31.1406 Moisture Movement .......................................................................................................................................................................5
H31.1410 Condensation ..................................................................................................................................................................................6
H31.1411 Capillarity..........................................................................................................................................................................................6
H31.1412 Weather and Water Penetration Resistance ..........................................................................................................................6
Fire ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
H31.1414 Specific Fire Performance Requirements ................................................................................................................................6
Durability........................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
H31.1415 General .............................................................................................................................................................................................6
H31.1416 Impact and Abrasion Resistance................................................................................................................................................6
H31.1417 Demountability.................................................................................................................................................................................6
H31.2000 SYSTEMS, MATERIALS AND FABRICATION .................................................. 6
H31.2100 SYSTEMS ........................................................................................................................... 6

External Wall Cladding ................................................................................................................................................................. 6
H31.2101 Type PAN-43 Aluminium Panels ................................................................................................................................................6
H31.2200 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................ 7

H31.2203 Profile Fillers ....................................................................................................................................................................................7
H31.2204 Fire Resisting Profile Fillers .........................................................................................................................................................7
H31.2206 Isolating Tape ..................................................................................................................................................................................7
Cladding Support Structure........................................................................................................................................................ 7
H31.2207 Supports ...........................................................................................................................................................................................7
Fixings................................................................................................................................................................................................ 7
H31.2208 General .............................................................................................................................................................................................7
H31.2209 Mechanical Fixings .........................................................................................................................................................................7
H31.2210 Fixing Anchors.................................................................................................................................................................................7
Accessories ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 7
H31.2211 Accessories Generally ..................................................................................................................................................................7
Architectural Specification – T2-T3 External H31/1 Foster + Partners

H31.2300 FABRICATION ................................................................................................................... 7

Tolerances........................................................................................................................................................................................ 7
H31.2301 Tolerances for Manufacture .........................................................................................................................................................7
H31.2302 Tolerances for Component Assembly.......................................................................................................................................8
H31.2400 FINISHES/COLOURS....................................................................................................... 8
H31.2401 Colours..............................................................................................................................................................................................8
H31.2403 Anodising................................................................................................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
H31.2500 SUNDRIES.......................................................................................................................... 8
Lightning Protection and Earth Bonding .................................................................................................................................. 8
H31.2501 General .............................................................................................................................................................................................8
H31.3000 SITE INSTALLATION............................................................................................. 8
H31.3100 WORKMANSHIP ............................................................................................................... 8

H31.3101 Generally...........................................................................................................................................................................................8
Assembly of Components............................................................................................................................................................ 9
H31.3102 Assembly of Panels........................................................................................................................................................................9
H31.3104 Movement Joints .............................................................................................................................................................................9
H31.3105 Fixing Sheets Generally ................................................................................................................................................................9
H31.3106 Fastenings Generally.....................................................................................................................................................................9
H31.3107 Structure...........................................................................................................................................................................................9
H31.3108 Adjacent Finishes ...........................................................................................................................................................................9
H31.3109 General Sealants............................................................................................................................................................................9
H31.3110 Abutments ........................................................................................................................................................................................9
H31.3111 Sealing Laps ................................................................................................................................................................................. 10
H31.3112 Insulation........................................................................................................................................................................................ 10
H31.3113 Breather Membranes.................................................................................................................................................................. 10
H31.3114 Vapour Control Layers ............................................................................................................................................................... 10
H31.3115 Profile Fillers ................................................................................................................................................................................. 10
H31.3200 TOLERANCES .................................................................................................................10

H31.3201 Installation Tolerances................................................................................................................................................................ 10

H31 SHEET METAL CLADDING


Specific design and performance requirements are as defined in the particular trade sections.
Specification.
d) Where a particular material, product or supplier is indicated in the Specification, such material,
product or supplier shall be deemed indicative representing the CA’s design intent only. The
Contractor may complete the installation using that product, or such other confirmed as
acceptable by the CA in writing, but shall remain fully responsible for the Detailed Design and
performance of the works.

particular requirements with respect to the works, which include the following:
a) External wall cladding.
b) Roof cladding.
H31.1103 Particular Interfaces

manufacture.
H31.1200 SYSTEM TYPES

External Wall Cladding
H31.1201 Type PEN-43 Aluminium Panels

Profiled aluminium panel vertical cladding system.

Specification.
with dimensions.
i) Samples where specified.
ii) List of Tests included.
iii) QA/QC programme.
iv) List of proposed Shop Drawings.
v) Summary of deviations from the Specification.

vi) Outline technical specifications reflecting proposed materials/systems.

vii) A list of proposed suppliers and sub-contractors intended to be used.

Sufficient samples of the following, including relevant trade literature and technical specifications,
a) Samples of sheeting types 300mm x 300mm minimum size.
b) Samples of all finish types 300mm x 300mm minimum size.
c) Various extrusions a minimum of 300mm in length.

In accordance with Section A.4000, post contract samples of the following shall be provided:
a) Samples of sheeting types 1000mm x 1000mm minimum size.
b) Colour samples of all finish types 1000mm x 1000mm minimum size.
c) Various extrusions/flashings a minimum of 1000mm in length.
d) Fastening devices and anchors.
H31.1304 Mock-ups
A mock-up shall be provided in accordance with Section A.4000 as follows:
Single column of the works including all interfaces..
H31.1305 Prototypes
A prototype shall be provided in accordance with Section A.4000 as follows:
Single column of the works including all interfaces.

The following quality benchmarks shall be provided in accordance with Section A.4000:
First installed and accepted column.
Testing
H31.1307 Test Requirements

Include for testing by an accredited independent testing specialist or provide independently certified
test data to demonstrate compliance with the Specification for the following:
a) Movement testing.
b) Load testing.
c) Deflection testing.
d) Wind loads.
e) Thermal movement.
f) Moisture movement.
g) Condensation.
h) Capillarity.
i) Weather and water resistance.
j) Fire.
H31.1308 Wind Resistance Testing

a) Tests shall be carried out on the prototypes in accordance with BS EN 12179 as modified by
the CWCT Standard for Systemised Building Envelopes or other acceptable standard as
agreed with the CA.
b) Test pressure: The peak test pressure shall be 1.5 times the design wind pressure (150%) and

applied for a minimum of 10 seconds.

c) At both positive and negative applications of the peak test pressure, there shall be no
permanent damage to supports or cladding panels or anchors. Framing members shall not
buckle, panels shall remain securely held and gaskets/seals shall not be displaced.
H31.1309 Waterproofing and Weathertightness Testing

a) Test the weathertightness of the works using a suitable testing method as accepted by the CA.
b) Details of the test and a proposed method statement shall be submitted to the CA for
acceptance at least one month prior to the proposed testing on Site.
c) All tests shall comply with the rules and standards laid down by the appropriate testing
authorities.
H31.1310 Site Hose Test

Perform hose tests on 5% of all sealed joints in accordance with the procedures prescribed in the
CWCT Standard for Systemised Building Envelopes. Check for any leaks and perform repairs,
replacements and additional testing and inspections as necessary.

requirements.
Structural
H31.1401 General
The Contractor shall have a full understanding of the structural behaviour of the building and how it
affects the works.

a) The works shall withstand all movement of the structure under all design loads or combination
of loads without damage or reduction in performance.
b) Expansion and movement joints shall accommodate the appropriate range of movement.
H31.1403 Specific Live Loads

a) The works shall sustain safely, without reduction in performance and without permanent
deformation to any component, a static 500N load applied horizontally through a square of
100mm sides.
b) A horizontal line load applied to the works, due to the occupants, in accordance with BS 6180
and BS 6399: Part 1.
c) Snow loads calculated in accordance with BS 6399: Part 3.
H31.1404 Wind Loads

Design Wind Pressures: Refer to Section A.5300.

a) All components shall be designed to resist thermal movement resulting from the maximum and
minimum surface temperature differentials occurring. The design shall cater for all temporary
and permanent conditions envisaged for the works.
b) The works shall be capable of accommodating changes in dimension and shape of its
components resulting from the varying surface temperatures without any reduction in the
specified performance and appearance.
c) Thermal movement shall not result in audible noise.
Environmental

The works shall withstand movement without permanent deformation or any reduction in the specified
performance:
a) Due to changes in the moisture content of its components, resulting from variations in the


b) Due to the expansion of absorbed or retained moisture caused by freezing.
H31.1410 Condensation
No condensation shall take place either on internal or external surfaces under the temperature and
humidity conditions specified.
Water migration caused by capillarity shall be prevented to areas that are designed to remain dry.

The works, including flashings and junctions with adjacent components, shall be fully weatherproof
and watertight under all conditions with full allowance made for deflections and other movements.
Fire
H31.1414 Specific Fire Performance Requirements

Elements of the works shall be either non-combustible or not easily ignitable with low flame spread
characteristics, and shall not produce excessive quantities of smoke or toxic gases.
a) Surface spread of flame:
i) External areas shall meet unprotected limitations in accordance with ‘External Fire Spread’
of the Local Building Regulations.
ii) All materials used internally and externally shall have a Class 0 surface spread of flame
classification (unless otherwise specified) when tested in accordance with BS 476: Parts
6 and 7.
b) Fire and smoke stopping:
i) Provide all cavity barriers to meet the requirements of the Local Building Regulations .
ii) Fire and smoke stops shall be positively fixed in position in such a manner that they will
not become dislodged in the event of a fire.
Durability
H31.1415 General
a) The performance criteria shall be satisfied for the full design life of the works, provided always
that the maintenance has been carried out as specified.
b) Metal sheets shall not suffer bowing, dimpling, oil canning, sagging, pillowing, rippling, warp,
abrupt transitions and other visual deformation or irregularity.
H31.1416 Impact and Abrasion Resistance

a) Generally, surfaces shall be sufficiently hard to resist heavy impacts from hand-held objects
without any noticeable change to the surface appearance. The works shall resist abrasion from
cleaning methods and maintenance systems without any noticeable change in surface
appearance.
b) Impact tests shall be carried out on the works adjacent to pedestrian areas in accordance with
the recommendations of BS 8200. Tests shall conform to category B requirements.
a) Elements of the works shall be individually and independently removable for maintenance and/or
replacement of panels in the event of damage.
b) The removal of panels shall not affect the performance or safety of any other part of the works.
H31.2100 SYSTEMS
External Wall Cladding
H31.2101 Type PEN-43 Aluminium Panels

a) Aluminium panelling system forming vertical cladding of aluminium profiles bonded onto suitable
moisture resistant backing boards and fixed to a secondary support structure forming a façade
to the concrete columns, aluminium panels as shown on the Design Drawings.
b) Aluminium to be colour anodised.
c) Provide concealed/secret supports/bracketry as required and as shown on the Design
Drawings.
d) To be fixed to the concrete columns as indicated on the Structural Engineer’s drawings.
H31.2200 MATERIALS
H31.2203 Profile Fillers
Type(s) supplied by the manufacturer accurately matching sheet profile and perforated for ventilation
and drainage of condensation at centres of crowns/troughs as appropriate.
H31.2204 Fire Resisting Profile Fillers

Type(s) supplied by the manufacturer accurately matching sheet profile.
H31.2206 Isolating Tape

A type recommended for the purpose by the manufacturer. Apply to those surfaces of supports that
would otherwise be in contact with works or accessories after fixing.
Cladding Support Structure
H31.2207 Supports
Provide stainless steel/extruded aluminium cladding support structure, as necessary, having due
regard for any requirements in excess indicated on the Structural Engineer's drawings and also any
requirements indicated on the Design Drawings. The framing shall comply with the Structural
Engineer's specification.
Fixings
H31.2208 General
Refer to Section Z20 of the Specification.
H31.2209 Mechanical Fixings

a) Primary external fastenings: Stainless steel fasteners to BS 5427, grade 1.4401 (equal to BS
EN ISO 3506: Parts 1 and 2 grade A4 or acceptable equivalent) to BS EN 10088, or
b) Mild steel to BS 4190 and suitable for galvanising or other protective coating, or
c) Aluminium complying with BS EN 755: Parts 1-9, BS EN 573: Parts 3 and 4, BS EN 515 and
BS EN 12020: Parts 1 and 2 for brackets, rivets and shear pins.
H31.2210 Fixing Anchors

a) Refer to Section Z20 for fixings generally.
b) Fixing anchors shall be of dimensions not less than those recommended by their manufacturers.
c) Fixing anchors shall be capable of adequate three-dimensional adjustment to accommodate
building structure and cladding fabrication/installation tolerances.
d) All fixing anchors shall be stainless steel grade 1.4401 and shall be to the requirements of the
Local Building Control Officer.
Accessories
H31.2211 Accessories Generally

Cappings, closure pieces, flashings, trims, sills, gutters, fillers, spacers, tapes, sealants, fixings, etc.,
where not specified, shall be types recommended in writing by the manufacturer.
Tolerances
H31.2301 Tolerances for Manufacture

a) The following tolerances apply to each individual panel manufactured, assembled and ready for
installation:
i) Length/ Width: Maximum allowed deviation of side length shall be 1.5mm up to 3000mm
and 3.0mm above 3000mm of design dimension.
ii) Panel Thickness/ Depth: Maximum allowed deviation is ±0.5mm.
H31.2302 Tolerances for Component Assembly

iv) Bow: The centre section of the panel shall not bow by more than 0.5mm measured from a
straight line between the ends of the panel.
v) Straightness: Any surface or edge shall not deviate by more than 0.5mm from a 2000mm
straightedge placed upon it in a direction parallel to the long axis of the panel.
vi) Flatness: Any surface shall not deviate by 0.5mm from a straightedge placed against it in
any direction.
vii) Twist: No section of the panel shall be twisted by more than 0.5° from the section at
either end of the panel.
c) All finished metal surfaces shall be flat and free from undulations and irregularities:
H31.2400 FINISHES/COLOURS
H31.2401 Colours
a) Anodised aluminium shall be from the RAL range. CA to confirm.
b) Refer to section Z33 for anodising.
H31.2500 SUNDRIES
Lightning Protection and Earth Bonding
H31.2501 General
a) Provide bonding between individual sections of cladding, in accordance with BS 6651 and BS
EN 62305: Parts 1-4, to ensure continuity between adjacent sections, both vertically and
section of 50mm². Any bolts used for bonding shall be of a minimum size of M10.
b) Bonding between the cladding and structural steelwork shall be carried out at intervals at no
greater than 10m horizontally and 20m vertically. The first level of bonding to the structural
steelwork shall be at the highest floor level of each part of the building.
c) Provide studs/bolts on the cladding for subsequent connections to be made by the Lightning
Protection contractor.
H31.3101 Generally

a) All works shall be true to detail with continuous profiles, which shall be free from marks, defects,
flaws, steps, waves, or damage of any nature.
b) All elements of framework and components shall be stored on Site such that they shall not be
damaged, distorted or weathered unevenly.
c) All finished components shall be carefully packed in stillages or crates such that they are
suitably separated and protected to prevent scratching, scuffing or other surface damage.
d) Dimensions and levels of the structure shall be verified.
e) Setting out shall be such that all panels are installed in the correct position, within tolerance,
and in the correct relationship to the building structure.
f) All fixing bolts and anchors shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommended procedures.
g) Materials shall be dry until fixed.
h) Acceptance shall be obtained from the CA before drilling or cutting parts of the structure, other
than where shown on the Shop Drawings.
i) Isolating tape, plastic washers or other suitable means to prevent bi-metallic corrosion between
dissimilar metals shall be used.
j) The finished work shall be square, regular, true to line, level and plane, with a satisfactory fit at
all junctions.
Assembly of Components
H31.3102 Assembly of Panels

a) The panels shall be flat (1:1000) and assembled in order to achieve true straight lines, both
horizontally and vertically for the full width and height of the column.
b) There shall be no lipping across joints.
H31.3104 Movement Joints

The requirement for any movement/expansion joints within the works shall be ascertained in order to
accommodate all movements.
H31.3105 Fixing Sheets Generally

a) Cut sheets to give clean, true lines with no distortion. Remove burrs.
b) Holes for primary fastenings to be 1.5mm larger than diameter of fastening unless self-drilling
type with pilot point is used.
c) Remove all drilling swarf, dust and any other foreign matter before finally fixing sheets into
position.
d) Check fastenings on completion and adjust as necessary to ensure that they are watertight and
sheeting is secure but not buckled or distorted.
H31.3106 Fastenings Generally

Type(s), size(s), material(s) and finish(es) shall be as recommended for the purpose by the cladding
manufacturer, or in the absence of such recommendations, as recommended in BS 5427.
H31.3107 Structure
Check that the structure is in a suitable state to receive cladding before commencing fixing and
obtain acceptance from the CA.
H31.3108 Adjacent Finishes

Do not fix cladding until final coats of paint have been applied to outer surfaces of supporting
structure.
H31.3109 General Sealants

For general sealant application refer to Section Z22 of the Specification.
H31.3110 Abutments
Ensure a weathertight junction with flashings, which shall be correctly located and neatly dressed

down.
H31.3111 Sealing Laps

a) Sealant: Type(s) recommended for the purpose by sheet manufacturer.
b) Position in straight, unbroken lines immediately below fixing positions and parallel to edges of
sheets. Place into corrugations. Do not allow to stretch or sag into position.
c) Ensure continuity and effectiveness of seal, especially at corners of sheets. Do not
overcompress.
H31.3112 Insulation
a) The insulation board shall be attached to or supported within the works so as not to bulge, sag,
delaminate or detach during installation or in situ during the life of the works.
b) Install and secure as the work proceeds ensuring continuity between
supports/purlins/rails/spacers and leaving no gaps. Keep dry and do not compress.
c) Cut back or debond the minimum necessary and to a clean straight line ensuring there are no
gaps in insulation after fixing.
H31.3113 Breather Membranes

a) Lay over insulation as the work proceeds ensuring continuity.
b) Lap sides and ends of sheets not less than 150mm to shed water away from insulation.
c) Ensure that bottom edges overlap flashings, drips sills, etc. to allow free drainage to the
exterior.
H31.3114 Vapour Control Layers

a) Vapour control layers shall be fixed to ensure continuity of vapour control on the warm side of
thermal insulation.
b) Lay as the work proceeds ensuring continuity.
c) Lap sides and ends of sheets not less than 150mm and seal with adhesive tape.
d) Seal with adhesive tape to pipes, ducts, structural members, etc. that pass through.
e) Carefully check for tears and punctures and seal them with adhesive tape before covering.
H31.3115 Profile Fillers

a) Locate where indicated on drawings and wherever necessary to close off corrugation cavities
from the outside and inside of the building. Ensure a tight fit and leave no gaps.
b) Where sealed laps are specified, bed profile fillers in sealant on top and bottom surfaces but do
not obstruct channels for ventilation or condensation drainage.
c) Close cavities at hips/valleys with blocks cut from standard perforated profiled strips. Position
blocks at right angles to troughs, equidistant from edge of sheet in sawtooth formation and bed
in sealant on top and bottom surfaces. Ensure that seal is continuous from block to block.
d) Fix in positions shown on the Shop Drawings, leaving no gaps and using an adhesive
recommended by the profile filler manufacturer.
H31.3200 TOLERANCES
H31.3201 Installation Tolerances
a) Horizontal Plan Position: For any element at any level whose position is defined in relation to a
primary reference grid, the maximum allowed deviation from the Design Dimension to that
reference grid is ±2mm.
b) Where a series of elements are arranged in an array of two or more, the maximum allowed
deviation of the horizontal distance between any two adjacent elements is ±2mm from the
corresponding Design Dimension.
c) Verticality: For any element connecting two or more reference levels, the maximum allowed
deviation of the relative plan position in any direction of that element at any two successive
levels is ±2mm from the corresponding Design Dimension.
d) Planarity: Any element or group of elements whose position is defined from a reference plane

shall not deviate from the Design Dimension of the reference plane by more than ±2mm
measuring perpendicular to the defined plane.
e) Deviations from lines, planes and verticality shall be limited to long wave formations of minimum
wave length of 20m length with a rate of exchange not exceeding 1:1000, and a maximum
amplitude of 3mm. All the above shall be measured from an optical or laser reference line.
f) The width of any joint shall not deviate from the nominal width by more than ±1mm of the joint
width, whichever is the lesser. Any variation shall be equally distributed with no sudden
changes. The misalignment between joints shall not exceed 1mm.
g) Line and level shall be within ±2mm of the specified level. The cumulative slope between the
same locations on any panel shall not exceed 1 in 1000.
h) The works shall be erected such that no point on any panel is more than 1mm from its
theoretical plane. The cumulative slope between the same locations on any panel shall not
exceed 1 in 1000.
i) The dimensional and detailed provisions intended to accommodate the construction tolerances
of surrounding elements in order to ensure that all aspects of the works relate satisfactorily to
the works as a whole shall be stated and shown on the Shop Drawings.
j) All tolerances stated shall be measured and monitored at a mean temperature to be agreed with
the CA.
k) Before work begins on Site the proposed method of dimensional setting-out and cross-
checking with adjacent trades and elements, to satisfy the accuracy requirements, shall be
submitted to the CA. The checking of any setting-out or of any line or level by the CA, or his
representative, shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the
correctness thereof.
l) Alternative tolerances to those specified may be permitted at the CA’s discretion, provided they
are agreed in advance of the manufacture of components.
m) The works, when installed, shall not be subject to warping or twisting, shall be strictly rigid, firm,
free from vibration, knocking, rattles, squeaks and other noises when subject to the worst
combination of environmental conditions and wind loads.
n) Tolerances shall not be cumulative.
End of Section

Contents
H42 PRECAST CONCRETE CLADDING .................................................................3

H42.1102 Scope of Works..............................................................................................................................................................................3
H42.1103 Particular Interfaces .......................................................................................................................................................................3
H42.1200 SYSTEM TYPES ................................................................................................................ 3

H42.1201 Type EWS-17 Precast Concrete Cladding ............................................................................................................................3
H42.1300 SUBMITTALS AND TESTING .......................................................................................... 3

H42.1301 Tender Response ...........................................................................................................................................................................3
H42.1302 Pre-contract Samples ...................................................................................................................................................................4
H42.1303 Post Contract Samples ................................................................................................................................................................4
H42.1304 Mock-ups..........................................................................................................................................................................................4
H42.1305 Prototypes ........................................................................................................................................................................................4
H42.1306 Benchmark Requirements............................................................................................................................................................4
Testing............................................................................................................................................................................................... 4
H42.1307 Concrete Strength Testing ..........................................................................................................................................................4
H42.1308 Testing of Fixing..............................................................................................................................................................................4
H42.1309 Site Test – Water Tightness of backing waterproof layers. ................................................................................................5
H42.1400 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS................................................................................ 5

H42.1401 General .............................................................................................................................................................................................5
Structural .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
H42.1402 General .............................................................................................................................................................................................6
H42.1403 Specific Movements ......................................................................................................................................................................6
H42.1404 Specific Dead Loads .....................................................................................................................................................................6
H42.1405 Specific Live Loads........................................................................................................................................................................6
H42.1406 Deflections .......................................................................................................................................................................................6
H42.1407 Wind Loads......................................................................................................................................................................................7
H42.1408 Precast Concrete Cladding Elements ......................................................................................................................................7
Environmental .................................................................................................................................................................................. 7
H42.1409 Thermal Movement.........................................................................................................................................................................7
H42.1410 Thermal Performance Requirements .........................................................................................................................................7
H42.1411 Moisture Movement .......................................................................................................................................................................8
H42.1412 Thermal Performance Requirements .........................................................................................................................................8
H42.1413 Capillarity..........................................................................................................................................................................................8
H42.1414 Weather and Water Penetration Resistance ..........................................................................................................................8
H42.1415 Local Factors ...................................................................................................................................................................................8
Acoustic ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 8
H42.1416 General Performance ....................................................................................................................................................................8
H42.1417 Works Site Performance ..............................................................................................................................................................8
H42.1418 Interfaces between the Works and Other Elements .............................................................................................................8
H42.1419 Works Self-noise............................................................................................................................................................................9
Fire ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9
H42.1420 General .............................................................................................................................................................................................9
Durability........................................................................................................................................................................................... 9
H42.1421 General .............................................................................................................................................................................................9
H42.1422 Demountability.................................................................................................................................................................................9
Primary and Secondary Components ....................................................................................................................................... 9
H42.1423 Primary Components.....................................................................................................................................................................9
H42.1424 Secondary Components...............................................................................................................................................................9
H42.2000 SYSTEMS, MATERIALS AND FABRICATION .................................................. 9

Concrete Cladding System ......................................................................................................................................................... 9
H42.2101 Precast Concrete Cladding EWS-17.......................................................................................................................................9
H42.2102 Support System........................................................................................................................................................................... 10
H42.2200 MATERIALS ......................................................................................................................10

Concrete........................................................................................................................................................................................ 10
H42.2201 Moulds............................................................................................................................................................................................ 10

H42.2202 Concrete Generally..................................................................................................................................................................... 10

H42.2203 Reinforcement .............................................................................................................................................................................. 11
H42.2204 Concrete Mixes............................................................................................................................................................................ 11
Miscellaneous Materials............................................................................................................................................................. 12
H42.2205 Breather Membrane .................................................................................................................................................................... 12
H42.2206 Vapour Barrier .............................................................................................................................................................................. 12
H42.2207 Insulation........................................................................................................................................................................................ 12
Metalwork ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 12
H42.2208 Stainless Steel Generally .......................................................................................................................................................... 12
H42.2300 FABRICATION .................................................................................................................12

H42.2301 Sizes Generally ............................................................................................................................................................................ 12
H42.2302 Manufacturing Accuracy............................................................................................................................................................ 12
H42.2303 Quality of Finishes....................................................................................................................................................................... 13
H42.2304 Casting........................................................................................................................................................................................... 13
H42.2305 Curing of Units............................................................................................................................................................................. 14
H42.2306 Production Control Units(s)...................................................................................................................................................... 14
H42.2307 Inspection ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 14
H42.2308 Records.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 14
H42.3000 SITE INSTALLATION...........................................................................................14
H42.3100 WORKMANSHIP .............................................................................................................14

H42.3101 Construction Generally.............................................................................................................................................................. 14
H42.3102 Setting Out.................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
H42.3103 Storage .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
H42.3104 Accuracy of Erection .................................................................................................................................................................. 15
H42.3105 Final Fixings................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
H42.3106 Damaged Units ............................................................................................................................................................................ 15
H42.3107 Cleaning......................................................................................................................................................................................... 15

H42 PRECAST CONCRETE CLADDING


Specification.
product or supplier shall be deemed indicative representing the CA’s design intent only. The
Contractor may complete the installation using that product, or such other confirmed as

particular requirements with respect to the works, which include the following:
a) Precast concrete cladding.
b) Reinforcement, all bracketry and fixings.
c) Movement joints, grouting, seals, sealants, mortar pointing, etc. as required.
H42.1103 Particular Interfaces

manufacture.
H42.1200 SYSTEM TYPES

H42.1201 Type EWS-17 Precast Concrete Cladding
Precast concrete slab/ panel cladding system to columns externally and internally and forming ‘U’ or
‘L’ shaped monolithic units as shown on the Design Drawings

Tender Submittals

Specification.
with dimensions.
i) Method statement detailing the construction methods and sequencing including detailed
information indicating how the tolerances will be achieved.
ii) Details of formwork/moulds to be used, including proposed frequency of usage.
iii) Details of grouting, joint filler materials, temporary supports and fixings.

iv) The method statement to include details of proposals for repair of any damage to panels
including cleaning of installed panels which may be envisaged during all stages of
production and installation including all proposals for temporary protection and
transportation methods.
v) Samples where specified.
vi) List of Tests included.
vii) QA/QC programme.
viii) List of proposed Shop Drawings.
ix) Summary of deviations from the Specification.
x) Outline technical specifications reflecting proposed materials/systems.
xi) A list of proposed suppliers and sub-contractors intended to be used.

Provide samples in accordance with Section A.4000 as follows:
600mm x 600mm sample of all precast concrete types specified using proposed formwork and mix.

Provide post contract samples in accordance with Section A.4000 as follows:
a) Full size control samples of precast concrete panel with proposed finishes as specified
demonstrating the upper and low limits for use as reference panels for the project. Upper and
lower limits to be agreed with the CA and based on samples provided
b) Various samples of fastening devices and anchors, etc.
H42.1304 Mock-ups
Refer to Section H11 for mock up requirements.
H42.1305 Prototypes
A prototype in accordance with Section A.4000 shall be provided as follows:
To be confirmed.

Quality benchmarks in accordance with Section A.4000 shall be provided as follows:
First full 2 storey height bay of precast concrete cladding installed on Site representing finished work,
geometry, etc. in location to be agreed.
Testing
H42.1307 Concrete Strength Testing

a) Sampling and testing of the concrete shall be carried out in accordance with BS 8500: Parts 1
and 2, BS EN 206 Part 1 and the relevant parts of BS 1881. The Contractor shall provide
detailed sampling and testing proposals with his Tender for review.
b) As the works proceed, test results shall be submitted weekly for review.
H42.1308 Testing of Fixing

a) As the precast concrete panels are manufactured, the Contractor shall arrange for testing of the
primary bracketry and fixing to be carried out to selected panels to confirm compliance with the
Specification and the requirements of Building Regulations.
b) A selected number of panels as listed below shall have their fixings subjected to pull-out and
shear testings using the principles of BS 5080: Parts 1 and 2.
c) The primary fixings shall be subjected to test loading of design load times a factor of 1.1 for
both pull-out and shear. The direction of the test loads shall be consistent with the design
principles and shall allow for the most onerous design conditions.
d) The Contractor shall submit to the CA for review proposals for these tests, which shall be

suitably modified to allow for the primary bracket design.

e) The frequency of the panels to be tested shall be as follows:
i) 1 in every 5 panels manufactured.
f) The Contractor shall arrange for Test Reports to be produced at appropriate intervals by the
Independent Testing Authority and submitted to the CA for review. If any of the fixings show a
displacement (as defined by BS 5080: Parts 1 and 2) more than 0.1mm, this shall be brought
to the attention of the CA immediately.
g) Depending on the initial test results, the frequency of testing may be reviewed and modified
with prior agreement.
H42.1309 Site Test – Water Tightness of backing waterproof layers.

a) The Contractor shall carry out a site hose test to comply with AAMA site test (AAMA 501.2) or
equivalent standard prior to the cladding panels being installed.
b) Scope and Purpose: The field check is intended to determine the resistance to water
penetration of only those backing waterproofing materials and their joints in the wall which are
designed to remain permanently watertight.
c) Preparation of Wall:
i) Before the test is conducted, sufficient time shall be allowed to permit all chemically
curing sealants to achieve their proper cure as recommended by the sealant
manufacturer.
ii) Before the test is begun, the area shall be thoroughly washed using a mild, additive-free
detergent and then rinsed.
iii) Any opening joints in the test area, such as those around doors and opening lights, shall
be sealed with tape prior to testing, unless agreed otherwise.
d) The Contractor shall provide a method statement of exact testing procedure for acceptance by
the CA.
e) Extent of Testing: 10% area of all waterproofing layers installed shall be tested at locations to
be agreed with the CA.

requirements.
H42.1401 General
a) The external works elements shall be designed, constructed and installed to meet the
requirements of BS 8200 and BS 8297.
b) The supporting framework for precast concrete units shall be fixed back to the primary
structure, details of which are to be found in the Structural Engineer's specification and
drawings.
c) Requirements specified in this section apply to the entire works (unless otherwise noted),
including flashings and junctions with adjacent parts of the building. Full allowance must be
made for deflections and other movements.
d) The design shall take account of all structural criteria and ensure that the works take account of
all movements and tolerances, in both permanent and temporary conditions, in order to avoid
stress, deformation and failure.
e) Ensure that the structure to which the works is being installed, including tolerances and
deflections, are suitable to receive the works. This shall be monitored and verified throughout
the contract period.
f) Provide structural calculations, prior to manufacture, supporting design integrity and justifying
the selection of materials, fixings, etc.
g) All structural calculations prepared shall be submitted for checking to the CA. Such checking
shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligations in respect of the final detailed design.
h) Tolerances: To BS 5606, BS 8298, BS 8297 and as specified herein.

Structural
H42.1402 General
a) Refer to Section A, clause series A.5300.
b) The works shall be designed in accordance with BS 8110 to resist all dead and live loads and
in accordance with the Structural Engineer’s specification and drawings for the frame and
cladding.
c) Be responsible for ascertaining all dead and live loads imposed as relevant to the precast
concrete cladding system and its supports.
d) The design and detail of the Precast Concrete Cladding system shall accommodate all the
various tolerances and movements of the building structure. Movements of the building
structure will occur from the application of dead, live and wind loads plus moisture, shrinkage,
creep and thermal effects.
e) Provide structural calculations, prior to manufacture, supporting design integrity and justifying:
i) The selection of concrete mix and any reinforcing including compressive strength of
concrete.
ii) Methods of fixing and support bracketry.
iii) Fixing devices including pull out loading.
f) The Precast Concrete Cladding system shall resist all specified static and dynamic design
loads likely to be encountered without causing permanent deformation of components or the
failure of fixings, panels or seals and shall transmit such loads safely to the points of support.

a) The system shall be designed, fabricated, and installed to withstand all movements of the
building structure under all design loads or combination of loads without damage or any
reduction in the performance of the Precast Concrete Cladding system.
b) The Contractor shall have a full understanding of the advised behaviour of the building
structure, its movements and how it affects the works. In addition, the Contractor shall have
knowledge of the roof construction sequence, its predicted building behaviour during
construction and its relationship to the precast concrete cladding.
c) See Structural Engineer's specification.
d) Expansion and movement joints shall be designed to accommodate the maximum movements
that can be derived from the specified and determined design loads and movements. Under
maximum movements the joints shall meet all the performance requirements of the
Specification.
H42.1404 Specific Dead Loads

a) The system shall be designed to accommodate its own dead loading without causing
deflections or movements which adversely affect the system itself or the supporting structure.
b) At tender stage, specify the dead loading for the installed system. This shall be expressed as
the weight in kN/ m², also identify other dead and imposed loadings transmitted to surrounding
construction.
H42.1405 Specific Live Loads

The works shall be capable of accommodating the following live loads without any reduction in
performance:
a) Design the system including all fixings, anchors, etc. to withstand, without permanent
deformation, the effects of wind loads. Refer to Section A for wind loading requirements.
b) A minimum horizontal live load of 1.5 kN/ m, due to the occupants, acting at a height of
1100mm above the finished ground level or internal floor level shall be assumed.
c) Concrete Cladding shall provide bomb blast protection to the concrete structure so that
structural integrity is maintained.
H42.1406 Deflections
a) See the Structural Engineer's specification for deflections associated with the primary structure.

b) The precast concrete cladding shall not deflect under loading in any way that is detrimental to
any element of the Precast Concrete Cladding or the adjacent structural or building elements.
c) Co-ordinate the Detailed Design with that for all related works and accommodate the specified
movements, tolerances and deflections for structural elements as specified in the Structural
Engineering specifications and 'Tolerance Movement and Deflection Schedule'.
d) Deflection of works shall be limited to 0.003 x span at test pressure level calculated in
accordance with BS 6399: Part 2 (minimum 1200 Pa) combined with dead and imposed loads.
e) All components, couplings and fixings shall be capable of accommodating all of the above
deflection without permanent distortion, deformation or failure.
f) The works shall accommodate differential structural movements arising from any loads imposed
by adjacent structures.
g) The magnitude of the allowable deflections shall be reduced if they are detrimental to any part
of the works, their support structure or internal finishes.
H42.1407 Wind Loads

a) The system shall be designed and installed to resist the positive and negative effects of wind
loads.
b) Refer to clause A.5305. Calculated pressure loads shall include the effect of internal air
pressures within the building, taking into account the presence of significant openings that
might arise occasionally within the building enclosure.
H42.1408 Precast Concrete Cladding Elements

a) Composite precast concrete cladding elements are generally required to be supported by the
RC frame. The Contractor shall ensure that the support is adequate to prevent the Precast
Cladding system from deflecting, tipping or distorting in any way.
b) A minimum safety factor of 1.5 shall be used in the design of the system.
c) The ultimate strength of anchors, inclusive of the specified safety factor, shall be considered as
being developed completely by the mechanical action at the anchor. Adhesives will not be
allowed to contribute to the structural capacity of the anchor assembly.
d) The system installation and design shall accommodate the principles of back ventilation and
draining.
Environmental

a) All components shall be capable of accommodating thermal movement resulting from maximum
and minimum surface temperature differentials occurring:
i) The service temperature range for components of the works system shall be taken as -
5°C and +80°C.
ii) The design shall cater for all temporary and permanent conditions envisaged for the
works.
b) In addition, the works shall be capable of accommodating changes in dimension and shape of
its components resulting from the worst variation in temperatures between the outside and
inside of the building, without any reduction in the specified performance. Refer to the climatic
conditions as stated in clause A.5402 when finalising the design of the works.

a) Detail the works to minimise cold bridging in any area of the system. The maximum thermal
permitted transmittance (U-value) for the various areas of the works shall be as follows:
i) U values shall be as specified for the relevant glass types.
ii) Through solid insulated areas, taking frames/connecting angles etc into account shall be
0.35W/ m²K or better.
b) The average U-value through the works shall comply with the above requirements and meet all
Statutory requirements as well as Local Building Regulations and the M&E requirements for
heat gain/loss as relevant.
c) Submit thermal calculations for the various components and the average thermal performance

of the proposed works to comply with the specified requirements.

d) Ensure that thermal movements shall not result in unacceptable levels of audible noise.

performance:
a) Due to changes in the moisture content of its components, resulting from variations in the

Thermal expansion or contraction and other movements shall not result in audible noise.
Water migration caused by capillarity shall be prevented. Vertical joints to be designed to eliminate
capillarity. Joints to be open but designed so the substrate behind the concrete cladding is not
visible. Refer to Design Drawings for indicative design of open joints.

a) The works shall be absolutely weatherproof and watertight, ensuring the prevention of water
leakage onto the internal face of the works, and any other part of the system that may be
adversely affected.
b) The works, including flashings and junctions with adjacent parts of the building, shall be fully
weatherproof and watertight under all conditions with full allowances made for deflections and
other movements.
c) The Detailed Design of the works shall not be based on a single line of defence. The cavities
between the lines of defence shall be drained and ventilated to the exterior. Wet applied seals
for the purpose of preventing the ingress of water shall not be accepted, and all such seals and
gaskets shall be "dry".
d) The Detailed Design and construction of the works shall be such that all rigid or fixed joints shall
remain rigid and accommodate all thermal, building structure or other movements and any
applicable loads without compromising its watertightness. All movement joints shall also be
finally designed and constructed to accommodate such loads or movements without
compromising the works’ watertightness.
e) The works shall prevent airflow from the outside to the inside of the building (and vice versa)
through joints/junctions, etc. to around areas of concentrated airflow.
H42.1415 Local Factors
a) Visit the Site to become familiar with local requirements. Local microclimatic conditions shall be
taken into account and grades of materials assessed as suitably durable for the location shall
be selected.
likely to have an adverse effect upon materials intended for the works contract. More
appropriate materials shall be substituted if adverse effects are predicted.
Acoustic
H42.1416 General Performance

a) The works shall effectively insulate the internal areas of the building from high levels of noise.
b) Refer to Section A.5308 for requirements for acoustic performance.
c) Evidence shall be provided that the acoustic performance requirements given herein can be
achieved.
H42.1417 Works Site Performance

Ensure that the interfaces (including all movement and soft joints) between elements making up the
works are such that the laboratory sound insulation performances of all elements are not degraded.
H42.1418 Interfaces between the Works and Other Elements

Provide details of all interfaces allowing sufficient time for the CA to comment, and to allow such
comments to be implemented.
H42.1419 Works Self-noise

a) The works, including all interfaces, shall be constructed so that any necessary expansion joints
are designed to permit noiseless movement.
b) Air movement across the works shall not cause audible rattling, whistling or other attention-
catching noise inside the building.
Fire
H42.1420 General
a) The works shall achieve 120 minutes fire rating unless otherwise specified on the Design
Drawings.
b) The panel surfaces shall have Class 0 surface spread of flame, in accordance with BS 476:
Part 7.
Durability
H42.1421 General
The performance criteria shall be satisfied for the full design life of the works, as stated in the
a) Elements of the works shall be individually and independently removable.
b) The removal of works units shall not affect the performance or safety of adjacent or any other
part of the works.
Primary and Secondary Components
H42.1423 Primary Components

The following components shall be considered primary components:
a) Concrete cladding panels.
b) All supports and fixings.
c) Concealed sealants.
H42.1424 Secondary Components

a) The following components shall be considered secondary components:
i) Mortar jointing.
b) Secondary components shall be capable of replacement without dismantling the works.
c) The predicted service life of secondary components shall be stated and guidance on the
required maintenance provided.

Concrete Cladding System
H42.2101 Precast Concrete Cladding EWS-17

a) Provide U shaped and rectangular shaped precast concrete units in sizes and shapes as shown
on the Design Drawings. Precast concrete to be reinforced as required to suit the span, loading
and all performance requirements. Complete the Detailed Design of the cladding,
reinforcement, supports and fixings in accordance with the requirements of this Specification
and the recommendations of BS 8297 as relevant.
b) Provide thermal inslation with vapour control barrier and breather membrane around columns
behind cladding panels.
c) Provide open joints as shown on the Design Drawings.
d) Provide insulation, vapour control barrier and breather membrane behind.
e) Refer to Structural Engineer’s Report for minimum distance of fixing brackets from edge of

columns.
f) Cover to reinforcement: The Contractor shall determine the minimum cover to meet the relevant
standards.
g) Joints between panels shall be open as required to satisfy the performance requirements. Open
joints shall be nominal 20mm unless otherwise agreed.
h) Joints requiring to have mortar joints shall have lime mortar joints. The mortar shall be not less
than a 3:1 sand/ hydraulic lime Mix 'H' in accordance with Section Z21.
i) Sands shall be well graded crushed stone or similar with colour match to accepted samples to
suit joint thickness(es) of between 2-4mm and shall be washed and free from salts.
j) Refer to Section Z22 for sealants generally.
k) Fixings/ cramps and dowels shall be austenitic stainless steel grade 1.4401 (316) to BS EN
10088 and in compliance with BS 8298. Refer to Section Z11. To be fixed as Section Z20.
The Contractor shall be responsible for designing all fixings and support systems in accordance
with the design intent as indicated on the Design Drawings and in accordance with the
Structural Engineer's specification and drawings.
l) Sizes of panels shall be as indicated on the Design Drawings.
H42.2102 Support System

a) The supporting framework for precast concrete units shall be stainless steel grade 1.4401
(previously grade 316) to BS EN 10088. Refer to Section Z11.
b) The Detailed Design of all fixings and support systems shall comply with the Design Drawings
and the Project Common Movement and Tolerances Document.
H42.2200 MATERIALS
Concrete
H42.2201 Moulds
a) Casting deviations shall be readily controlled to comply with the Specification.
b) Maintain in clean, sound condition and inspect carefully for defects before each reuse.
Damaged moulds shall not be repaired and reused if this would impair the surface appearance
of the units.
c) Construct to prevent loss of grout.
d) Permit demoulding without damage to units.
e) Coat evenly with a suitable release agent, which shall not be allowed to touch the
reinforcement.
f) Moulds inspection: Inform the CA when each mould is complete and not less than 5 days
before commencing manufacture of units.
H42.2202 Concrete Generally

a) Cement:
i) To BS EN 197: Part 1.
ii) Colour: Grey/White to provide the accepted colour agreed through the submission of
samples.
b) Aggregate:
i) Provide fine and coarse aggregate from one source only.
ii) Colour range and gradation to match accepted sample.
iii) Fine aggregate:
• Manufactured sands from coarse aggregate or dust-free, silt-free, salt-free natural
sand to BS EN 12620.
• Variation in fineness modulus from mix design limited to ± 0.20% for facing mixes.
• Limit amount of organic impurities.

• Restrict deleterious reactive materials with alkalis in cement, in accordance with BS

EN 12620.
iv) Coarse aggregates for back-up mix:
• Normal weight aggregate to BS EN 12620.
v) Coarse aggregate for facing mix:
• Normal weight aggregate to BS EN 12620.
c) Pigment:
i) To conform to BS EN 12878.
ii) Synthetic mineral oxide, stable at high temperature, resistant to ultraviolet light and alkali
resistant.
iii) Colour: To match accepted sample.
d) Water: Clean, fresh and potable to BS EN 1008.
e) Admixtures:
i) Only use admixtures that have been tested and accepted in mix designs.
ii) Air-entraining admixture: To BS EN 934: Part 3.
iii) Water-reducing admixture: To BS EN 934.
iv) Calcium chloride or admixtures containing chloride ions or other salts are not permitted.
H42.2203 Reinforcement
a) Deformed bars shall be to BS 4449.
b) Galvanised finish shall be to BS EN ISO 1461 zinc coating applied before manufacturing.
c) Prestressing steel strands shall be to BS 4486.
d) Welded wire fabric shall be:
i) To BS 4483, fabricated of plain cold-drawn steel wire conforming to BS 4482.
ii) Furnished in flat sheets.
iii) Galvanised to BS EN ISO 1461 when fabric is within 38mm of panel face.
e) Steel wire shall be to BS 4482 and galvanised to BS EN ISO 1461.
H42.2204 Concrete Mixes

a) Mix Design:
i) Determine the design mixes for each type and class of concrete by either laboratory trial
batch method or Site experience methods in accordance with BS 8110 to suit the
specified finish.
ii) If the trial batch method is used, employ an independently accredited testing laboratory,
acceptable to the CA, for preparing and reporting the proposed mix designs. The testing
laboratory shall not be the same as that used for Site quality control testing.
iii) Use concrete of accepted mix designs only.
iv) Do not place the concrete until the design mix for the class and type of concrete is
accepted by the Structural Engineer.
v) Maximum cement content of 550kg/m³ shall not be exceeded.
vi) Provide as much cement as necessary to achieve the strength requirements and be
sulphate resisting where contact with the ground is made.
b) Strength and Durability:
i) Design compressive strength: 50 N/mm² minimum at 28 days and increased as required
to meet the design requirements.
ii) Admixtures: Use air-entraining admixture to provide a minimum of 3% and maximum of
8% air entrainment.

iii) Adjust the design mix to obtain the required colour, texture and grade of the surface
aggregate.
iv) Maximum water absorption for normal weight concrete not to exceed 5% by weight.
c) Batching and Mixing:
i) Plant shall conform to the requirements of BS 8500: Parts 1 and 2 and BS EN 206: Part
1.
ii) Volumetric batching of concrete is not permitted.
iii) Accurately measure the concrete components by weight within the tolerance limits of BS
8500: Parts 1 and 2 and BS EN 206: Part 1.
iv) The concrete temperature at the time of placement shall not exceed 29°C.
Miscellaneous Materials
H42.2205 Breather Membrane

a) Material: High performance reinforced membranes of foil or plastics, protected both sides by
rigid facings/linings to give a Class 0 spread of flame to meet the performance criteria
specified.
b) Fix carefully and neatly to provide a complete barrier to water, snow and wind blown dust.
Horizontal laps to be 100mm, vertical laps 150mm and staggered, to shed water away from the
substrate and structure.
c) Provide all sealing at junctions as required.
H42.2206 Vapour Barrier

Provide an suitable barrier fully continuous to warm side of insulation and fixed to the cavity side of
the backing wall system as shown on the Design Drawings.
H42.2207 Insulation
a) The insulation shall be inert, durable, rot-proof and vermin-proof and not be degradable by
moisture, extreme temperatures or water vapour.
b) The insulation shall not bulge, sag, delaminate or detach during its installation or in situ during
the life of the works.
c) Insulation shall be LPCB certified to LPS 1181.
d) Insulation shall have zero Ozone Depleting Potential (ODP), be CFC and HFC free and have a
Global Warming Potential (GWP) of less than five. Refer also to Section A.6000 of the
Specification.
e) Insulation shall be selected to meet the recommendations of ‘The Green Guide to Specification’
and shall have a minimal environmental impact when assessed using BREEAM/L.E.A.D
International criteria.
f) The selected insulation shall comply with all relevant British Standards and be BBA certified.
Metalwork
H42.2208 Stainless Steel Generally

a) Refer to Section Z11.
b) Where indicated on the Design Drawings fixings shall be of grade 1.4401 (316) stainless steel
and recommended for the purpose in accordance with BS EN 10095, BS EN 10029, BS EN
10048, BS EN 10051 and BS EN ISO 9445.
H42.2301 Sizes Generally
The works units shall be worked to sizes indicated on the Design Drawings and be within the
recommended deviations. They shall hold out reasonably square at the back, i.e. without corners
broken away whereby the strength of the fixings system may be impaired.
H42.2302 Manufacturing Accuracy

a) Standard: To BS 8297, table 11 and to allow compliance with installation tolerances specified

herein.
b) Check the overall dimensions, straightness, squareness, twist and flatness of the mould(s)
immediately before each reuse and of each unit as soon as possible after demoulding. Make
adjustments to the moulds as necessary.
H42.2303 Quality of Finishes

a) All works elements shall achieve the following finish requirements:
i) Cement to be as per the accepted sample with a class of finish equivalent to “special
class” (i.e. quality grading) to BS 8110: Part 1.
ii) The finish type shall be a dense, smooth, even coloured, blemish-free concrete surface at
least equivalent to a type B (i.e. finish type category) surface finish to BS 8110: Part 1
.Finish to be confirmed.
b) The finishes shall be uniform in colour and appearance throughout the Contract.
c) Components having arrises or faces that are broken, chipped, cracked, crazed, honeycombed,
irregular, inconsistent, stained or otherwise marred such that their appearance or performance
is significantly impaired shall not be accepted.
d) Submit finished samples to the CA for acceptance prior to manufacturing. Finished samples of
works units that have been submitted and accepted by the CA shall be used as reference for all
works units prior to being passed for inclusion into the works to the acceptance of the CA.
e) The outer face of the works shall have a smooth formed finish to match the fine smooth finish
for in situ concrete. Propose suitable formwork materials for acceptance by the CA.
f) Discard and replace or correct any precast units that do not appear identical to the accepted
samples.
g) Precast units may be rejected for the following reasons:
i) Exceeding specified installation tolerances.
ii) Chipped, spalled, cracked or otherwise damaged during construction operations.
iii) Exposed to view surfaces that develop surface finish deficiencies.
iv) Other defects as listed include:
• Ragged or irregular edges.
• Excessive air voids on exposed surfaces.
• Casting lines evident from different placements.
• Visible form joints or irregular surfaces.
• Stains on panel surfaces.
• Non-uniformity of colour and texture.
• Areas of back-up concrete bleeding through facing concrete.
• Foreign material embedded in face.
• Visible repairs.
• Reinforcement shadow lines.
• Visible cracks.
h) Where a skim coat of white concrete is required this shall be of a sufficient thickness to
obliterate any grey concrete and meet the performance requirements of the Specification.
H42.2304 Casting
a) Provide face mix for full panel depth when more than one major face or edge is exposed.
b) Cast ‘U’ and ‘L’ shaped panels in a single casting so as not to have a visible casting joint.
c) Where only one face of the precast component is exposed, use a single facing mix throughout
the entire thickness of the unit or place the facing mix and back-up mix consecutively in forms
as follows:
i) Use Portland cement and aggregate specified for the facing mix and use Portland cement

and aggregate mix to meet the design performance criteria for the back-up mix.
ii) Place and consolidate the facing and back-up mixes to achieve a monolithic panel
construction.
iii) Depth of facing: 44mm minimum.
d) Cast units in an enclosure to maintain a controlled ambient temperature. Mix concrete to
distribute fine and coarse aggregate evenly.
e) Place to prevent concrete segregation in forms.
f) Manufacture units to required profiles and size. Execute work accurately to specified tolerances
and free of broken edges. Manufacture edges straight and with clean accurate arrises.
g) Ensure that exposed edges and ends match the finish and texture of the face of the panel.
h) Identification: Mark each panel with an identification mark corresponding to the Shop Drawings
and date cast.
H42.2305 Curing of Units

a) Maintain units in forms at a minimum temperature of 10°C.
b) Strip forms when the concrete has attained a compressive strength of at least 10 N/mm² or the
strength required for handling, whichever is greater. After stripping, keep the surfaces of the
precast units damp and at a minimum temperature of 10°C.
c) Protect the units from exposure to weather until the concrete strength is 24 N/mm² minimum.
d) Cure members under identical conditions.
e) During curing, store units in a manner to prevent bowing, warpage or other distortions and
damages.
H42.2306 Production Control Units(s)

The first unit produced of each of the type(s) shall be inspected by the CA, and if its appearance is
acceptable, it shall be clearly marked and kept safely at the factory as a control standard for the
appearance of subsequently produced units.
H42.2307 Inspection
Carefully inspect all completed units and check for match with accepted sample(s) or control unit(s)
and for compliance with the Specification before dispatch to Site. Make arrangements with the CA
for the inspection of completed units in the factory.
H42.2308 Records
a) Keep complete records for each unit including the following information:
i) Unique identification number.
ii) Correlation with records of mixes, including batch numbers.
iii) Date of each stage of manufacture.
iv) Dates and results of all tests, checks and inspections.
v) Dimensions related to specified levels of accuracy.
vi) Specific location in the finished work.
vii) Details of any damage and making good.
viii) Any other pertinent data, e.g. if the unit is an accepted production control unit.
b) Records shall be available for inspection on request.
H42.3101 Construction Generally
Conform to the procedures of the British Precast Concrete Federation and BS 8297.

H42.3102 Setting Out

Shop Drawings shall be provided showing levels and other data required for setting out components.
Be responsible for setting out the works as indicated on the Shop Drawings.
H42.3103 Storage
Store precast concrete units clear of the ground, protect from inclement weather and keep dry.
Prevent soiling, chipping and contamination by salts and other deleterious substances.
H42.3104 Accuracy of Erection

Ensure that:
a) The structure, including any fixing inserts, has been surveyed fully before commencing erection.
b) Each unit is clearly marked with its identification symbol relative to its position within the wall
layout. Production and storage of units shall be arranged so that delivery in an accurate
sequence for Site fixing is possible.
c) At the time of handover, the visual requirements of the units are as follows:
i) The units shall be horizontal/vertical, where indicated on the Design Drawings.
ii) The vertical joints shall be of equal size and at the centres indicated on the Design
Drawings.
iii) The horizontal joints shall be of equal size and be level.
iv) The units shall present true and accurate straight lines and flat planes within the plane of
the elevation.
v) The gap between the works and cladding support structure shall be constant.
d) Set out joint centres for a complete elevation at one time, unless otherwise agreed with the CA.
Erect units using temporary spacers to suit the survey results and ensure generally consistent
joint widths.
e) Within the length of any joint (including in-line continuations across transverse joints) the
greatest width shall not vary by more than ±2mm. Any variation to be evenly distributed with no
sudden changes.
f) The average width of an individual joint between panels compared with nominal design width of
joint shall not vary by more than ± 2mm.
g) Panel edges at a joint out of parallel shall not taper by more than 3mm in overall height of joint
between panels.
h) A jog in alignment of a panel edge from one panel to another shall not exceed 2mm.
i) The offset in planes between vertical faces of adjacent panels across any joint shall not exceed
2mm.
j) The finished work shall have a satisfactory appearance, being square, regular, true to line, level
and plane with a satisfactory fit at all junctions, all to acceptance.
H42.3105 Final Fixings

a) Obtain acceptance of the appearance of each elevation before tightening fixings, filling bed
joints and dowel pockets or sealing joints.
b) Tighten threaded fastenings to torque figures recommended in writing by the manufacturer. Do
not overtighten restraint fixings intended to permit lateral movement.
c) Dowel bars and recessed lifting devices shall be filled with a polyester mix, well tamped in.
H42.3106 Damaged Units

Do not repair without acceptance. Such acceptance shall not be given where the units are badly
damaged or where the proposed repair would impair appearance or performance.
H42.3107 Cleaning
a) Clean any dirt or blemishes from exposed surfaces.
b) Wash and rinse in accordance with the precast manufacturer’s recommendations.
c) Protect adjacent surfaces from damage due to cleaning operations.

d) Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could alter the character of exposed finishes.
End of Section

L10 LOUVRES AND LOUVRED DOORS.................................................................3
L10.1000 SCOPE, SUBMITTALS, TESTING AND PERFORMANCE ............................. 3
L10.1100 SPECIFICATION AND SCOPE ....................................................................................... 3

L10.1101 Descriptive Works..........................................................................................................................................................................3
L10.1102 Scope of Works..............................................................................................................................................................................3
L10.1103 Particular Interfaces .......................................................................................................................................................................3
L10.1200 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS/TYPES.................................................................................. 3

Louvres.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 3
L10.1201 General .............................................................................................................................................................................................3
L10.1202 Type LVR-01 Aluminium Louvres...............................................................................................................................................3
L10.1205 Type EDR-05 Louvred Door........................................................................................................................................................4
L10.1206 Type EDR-27 Double Bi-Fold Louvred Loading Bay Door. ................................................................................................4
L10.1300 SUBMITTALS AND TESTING .......................................................................................... 4

L10.1301 Tender Response ...........................................................................................................................................................................4
L10.1302 Pre-contract Samples ...................................................................................................................................................................4
L10.1303 Post Contract Samples ................................................................................................................................................................4
L10.1304 Mock-ups..........................................................................................................................................................................................4
L10.1305 Prototypes ........................................................................................................................................................................................5
L10.1306 Benchmarks .....................................................................................................................................................................................5
Testing............................................................................................................................................................................................... 5
L10.1307 Test Requirements .........................................................................................................................................................................5
L10.1400 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS................................................................................ 5

Structural .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 5
L10.1401 General .............................................................................................................................................................................................5
L10.1402 Deflections .......................................................................................................................................................................................5
L10.1403 Wind Loads......................................................................................................................................................................................5
L10.1404 Inertial Loads ...................................................................................................................................................................................5
Environmental .................................................................................................................................................................................. 5
L10.1405 Thermal Movement.........................................................................................................................................................................5
L10.1406 Moisture Movement .......................................................................................................................................................................5
L10.1407 Atmospheric Conditions...............................................................................................................................................................5
L10.1413 Weather and Water Penetration Resistance ..........................................................................................................................5
L10.1414 Local Factors ...................................................................................................................................................................................6
Acoustic ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 6
L10.1415 Acoustic Performance Requirements .......................................................................................................................................6
Fire ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
L10.1416 General .............................................................................................................................................................................................6
L10.1417 Surface Spread of Flame..............................................................................................................................................................6
Durability........................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
L10.1419 General .............................................................................................................................................................................................6
L10.1421 Impact and Abrasion Resistance................................................................................................................................................6
L10.1422 Demountability.................................................................................................................................................................................6
L10.2000 SYSTEMS, MATERIALS AND FABRICATION .................................................. 7
L10.2100 SYSTEMS ........................................................................................................................... 7

Louvres.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 7
L10.2101 Aluminium Louvres Types LVR-01, LVR-03, LVR-04...........................................................................................................7
Louvred Doors................................................................................................................................................................................. 7
L10.2102 Type EDR-05 Louvred Door........................................................................................................................................................7
L10.2103 Type EDR-27 Bi-Fold Louvred Loading Bay Door................................................................................................................7
L20.3107 Ironmongery .....................................................................................................................................................................................8
L20.3104 Protection of Components...........................................................................................................................................................8
L20.3105 Protection of Components after Installation............................................................................................................................8
L20.1407 Opening Pressures ........................................................................................................................................................................8
L20.1408 Security of External Doorsets/ Door Assemblies...................................................................................................................8
L10.2200 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................ 8
Architectural Specification – Tower 2 and L10/1 Foster + Partners

Tower 3- Wall and Rooflight System
Tender Issue
27/07/07
Metalwork ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 8
L10.2201 Aluminium .........................................................................................................................................................................................8
L10.2202 Mild Steel..........................................................................................................................................................................................8
Sealants and Gaskets ................................................................................................................................................................... 8
L10.2203 Sealants ............................................................................................................................................................................................8
L10.2204 Gaskets.............................................................................................................................................................................................8
Support Structure/ Fixings........................................................................................................................................................... 8
L10.2205 Support Structure ..........................................................................................................................................................................8
L10.2206 Fixings................................................................................................................................................................................................8
L10.2300 FABRICATION ................................................................................................................... 9

L10.2301 Tolerances for Manufacture .........................................................................................................................................................9
L10.2302 Tolerances for Component Assembly.......................................................................................................................................9
L10.2400 LIGHTNING PROTECTION AND EARTH BONDING .................................................. 9

L10.2401 General .............................................................................................................................................................................................9
L10.3000 SITE INSTALLATION...........................................................................................10
L10.3100 WORKMANSHIP .............................................................................................................10

L10.3101 General Requirements ............................................................................................................................................................... 10

Tender Issue
27/07/07
L10 LOUVRES AND LOUVRED DOORS

L10.1000 SCOPE, SUBMITTALS, TESTING AND PERFORMANCE
L10.1100 SPECIFICATION AND SCOPE

L10.1101 Descriptive Works
Specification.
product or supplier shall be deemed indicative representing the Architect’s design intent only.
The Contractor may complete the installation using that product, or such other confirmed as
L10.1102 Scope of Works

a) Louvre systems.
b) Louvred doors and ironmongery.
L10.1103 Particular Interfaces

manufacture.
L10.1200 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS/TYPES

Louvres
L10.1201 General
shown on the Design Drawings. Louvres to comprise extruded aluminium profiles to satisfy the
design intent as shown on the Design Drawings with PVDF finish externally. Refer to Section
Z11.
b) Louvres to provide class A rain defence to comply with the HEVAC standard and to incorporate
sand traps and insect mesh.
c) Aluminium louvre blades shall comprise single piece extrusions of profile depth/pitch to meet
the performance requirements with aluminium framing, end capping pieces, connectors and
support bracketry as required for fixing back to the curtain wall mullions.
d) The aluminium extrusions shall be to BS EN 573: Parts 1-3, BS EN 515 and BS EN 755: Parts
1-9.
e) Refer to the M&E specification for requirements for blanking panels, dynamic performance,
pressure drop and free area requirements for all louvres.
f) Provide blanking plates to all non-active louvres. Blanking plates to be PVDF finished matt
black. Refer to the M&E specification and drawings for requirements for blanking panels.
L10.1202 Type LVR-01 Aluminium Louvres

Tender Issue
27/07/07
Custom made aluminium louvred wall system and framing with sand traps and incorporating louvred
door EDR-05. Provide blanking panels as required. Refer to the M&E specification for details of
ventilation requirements/blanking panels. The external louvres to comprise extruded aluminium blades
at 45 degree angle including insect/vermin mesh behind. Finish to louvres to be colour anodised.
Anodising colour to be advised.

Same as LVR-01 but louvres blades to have different profile as shown on the Design Drawings and
without louvred door EDR-05.

Same as LVR-03 but without sand traps.
L10.1205 Type EDR-05 Louvred Door

Aluminium louvred door with ironmongery integral to LVR-01.
L10.1206 Type EDR-27 Double Bi-Fold Louvred Loading Bay Door.

Aluminium bi-fold louvered loading bay door to have same visual appearance as LVR-01.
L10.1300 SUBMITTALS AND TESTING

Tender Submittals
L10.1301 Tender Response

Specification.
with dimensions.
i) Free area performance and dynamic air flow data for all louvre systems proposed.
ii) Samples where specified.
iii) List of Tests included.
iv) QA/QC programme.
v) List of proposed Shop Drawings.
vi) Summary of deviations from the Specification.
vii) Outline technical specifications reflecting proposed materials/systems, etc.
viii) A list of proposed suppliers and sub-contractors intended to be used.
L10.1302 Pre-contract Samples

Provide 4 samples of the following, including relevant trade literature and technical specifications,
a) Samples of framing and louvre blade minimum 300mm long for each Type.
b) Samples of metal finishes proposed.
c) Typical ironmongery components in the proposed materials and finishes to include operating
handle, hinge and locking device.
L10.1303 Post Contract Samples

In accordance with Section A.4000, 4 post contract samples of the following shall be provided:
a) Samples of framing and louvre blade minimum 300mm long for each Type.
b) Samples of metal finishes proposed.
c) Typical ironmongery components in the proposed materials and finishes to include operating
handle, hinge and locking device.
L10.1304 Mock-ups
Tender Issue
27/07/07
A mock-up shall be provided in accordance with Section A.4000 as follows:

An arrangement of components and systems forming a visual and conceptual model of the works
including interfaces with adjacent components and structure.
L10.1305 Prototypes
Subject to previous testing results being provided. Provides prototypes for testing if required.
L10.1306 Benchmarks
The following quality benchmark shall be provided in accordance with Section A.4000:
The first fully installed and completed part of the works.
Testing
L10.1307 Test Requirements

Include for testing by an accredited independent testing specialist or provide independently certified
test data to demonstrate compliance with the Specification.
L10.1400 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

Comply with the general performance of Section A of the Specification and the following specific
performance requirements.
Structural
L10.1401 General
When calculating loads the worst combinations shall be considered, taking account of the fact that
the pressure coefficients at various locations may determine more than one design criterion.
L10.1402 Deflections
The maximum in-plane deflection of any main framing member due to dead and live loads shall not
exceed 1/500 of the span or 3mm, whichever is the lesser.
L10.1403 Wind Loads

Generally: The works shall be designed to withstand without permanent deformation, the effects of
wind loads. The works shall not depart from fixings under the design wind loads.
L10.1404 Inertial Loads

The works shall be capable of accommodating inertial loads arising due to the
acceleration/deceleration of moving sections including opening doors.
Environmental
L10.1405 Thermal Movement

a) All components shall be designed to resist thermal movement resulting from the maximum and
minimum surface temperatures occurring. The design shall cater for all temporary and
permanent conditions envisaged for the works.
b) The service temperature range for components of the works shall be taken as 0°C and to
80°C.
L10.1406 Moisture Movement

performance:
a) Due to changes in the moisture content of their components, resulting from variations in the
L10.1407 Atmospheric Conditions

All works shall be fully capable of resisting the prevailing atmospheric conditions.
L10.1413 Weather and Water Penetration Resistance

Louvres to provide class A rain defence to comply with the HEVAC standard and to incorporate sand

Tender Issue
27/07/07
traps and insect mesh.
L10.1414 Local Factors

a) Visit the Site in order to become familiar with local requirements. Local microclimatic conditions
shall be taken into account and grades of materials assessed as suitably durable for the
location shall be selected.
likely to have an adverse effect upon materials intended for the Contract. More appropriate
materials shall be substituted if adverse effects are predicted.
c) Louvres to incorporate sand trap baffles as required to meet the performance requirements.
Sand trap ventilators to have the sand elimination efficiency of the following:
Collection efficiency %
Air face velocity Sand grade (microns)
(m/s) Fine Medium Coarse Overall
106 - 150 212-250 355-435 106-710
0.4 88 94 99 95
0.8 57 74 95 77
1.6 24 40 77 52
2.4 2 17 57 21
3.3 0.2 2 38 11
d) Free area: Nominally 50% free area (aerodynamic coefficient of 0.15).

e) All external aluminium to be colour anodised. All internal metalwork to be PVDF coated. Non-
Acoustic
L10.1415 Acoustic Performance Requirements

Refer to the Acoustic Consultant’s documentation.
Fire
L10.1416 General
All elements of the works shall be either non-combustible or not easily ignitable with low flame spread
characteristics and shall not produce excessive quantities of smoke or toxic gases.
L10.1417 Surface Spread of Flame

All materials used shall achieve a Class 0 classification when tested in accordance with BS 476:
Parts 6 and 7 and shall comply with the requirements of the Fire Strategy documentation. Aluminium
blades shall not deform in temperatures up to 300ºc so as to cause an obstruction and decrease
extraction performance when louvres are used for heat and smoke extraction in the event of a fire.
Durability
L10.1419 General
The performance criteria shall be satisfied for the full design life of the works, as stated in the
L10.1421 Impact and Abrasion Resistance

a) The works shall resist abrasion from agreed cleaning methods and maintenance systems
without any noticeable change in surface appearance. Generally, surfaces shall be sufficiently
hard to resist all reasonable impacts and the effects of wind blown sand.
b) Impact tests shall be carried out on all works assemblies in accordance with the
recommendations of BS 8200. Tests shall conform to category B requirements.
c) The extent of any damage determined through testing shall be recorded and, where possible,
quantified. Samples shall be submitted to the CA.
L10.1422 Demountability
a) Elements of the works shall be individually and independently removable ensuring access for
maintenance.

Tender Issue
27/07/07
b) The removal of units shall not affect the performance or safety of any other part of these, or
adjacent, works.
L10.2000 SYSTEMS, MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
L10.2100 SYSTEMS
Louvres
L10.2101 Aluminium Louvres Types LVR-01, LVR-03, LVR-04.

shown on the Design Drawings. Louvres to comprise extruded aluminium profiles to satisfy the
design intent as shown on the Design Drawings with colour anodised finish. Refer to Section
Z11.
b) Aluminium louvre blades shall comprise single piece extrusions of profile depth/pitch as
indicated on the Design Drawings with aluminium framing, end capping pieces, connectors and
support bracketry as required for fixing back to the curtain wall mullions.
c) The aluminium extrusions shall be to BS EN 573: Parts 1-3, BS EN 515 and BS EN 755: Parts
1-9.
d) Refer to the M&E specification for requirements for blanking panels, dynamic performance,
pressure drop and free area requirements for all louvres.
e) Provide blanking plates to all non-active louvres. Blanking plates to be PVF4 finished matt black.
Refer to the M&E Specification and Drawings for requirements for blanking panels.
Louvred Doors
L10.2102 Type EDR-05 Louvred Door.

a) Louvred doors to comprise material and finish to match the louvre system.
b) Ironmongery to be discreet stainless steel (grade 1.4401).
c) To be manually operated with lock mechanism.
d) Dimensions: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
e) Coordinate all interfaces with curtain walling.
L10.2103 Type EDR-27 Bi-Fold Louvred Loading Bay Door.

Double bi-fold louvred electronically operated loading bay door with same external visual appearance
as LVR-01 to be of Standard Industrial Duty as defined by DSMA (Door and Shutter Manufacturers’
Association) CP 201.
a) Dimensions: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
b) Coordinate all interfaces with curtain walling.
c) Proportion of ventilation area: Refer to M&E documentation.
d) To have removable guides as required.
e) The system shall include a PUR seal between the building structure and guide gear.
f) The system shall include a lintel seal and primed barrel.
g) Operation: Direct drive operator, 400V, 3 phase current, IP 54, emergency crank handle to ZH
1/ 494 pt.4.4.3 with integral safety device. TUV-tested and maintenance free.
h) Control unit: A70R vario with 24V control voltage, safe extra-low voltage, protection category
IP65, with 'OPEN-STOP-CLOSE' push button on the control unit cover. Lockable, with
optoelectronic closing edge safety device.
i) Conformance: BS EN 12453 and DSMA (Door and Shutter Manufacturers' Association) CP
201.
j) Finish:
i) Externally: Anodised finish to match finish of LVR-01.
ii) Internally: Manufacturer's standard protective paint finish.

Tender Issue
27/07/07
L20.3107 Ironmongery
Assemble and fix carefully and accurately using fastenings with a matching finish supplied by the
ironmongery manufacturer. Prevent damage to ironmongery and adjacent surfaces. At completion
check, adjust and lubricate as necessary to ensure correct functioning.
L20.3104 Protection of Components

Do not deliver to Site components, which cannot be put immediately into suitable dry, covered
storage with a dry floor. Stack on bearers, separated with spacers to prevent damage by and to
projecting ironmongery, beads, etc.
L20.3105 Protection of Components after Installation

Ensure that all exposed components have protective coverings during storage and after installation to
protect factory applied finishes. Exposed finishes shall also be protected during on-Site operations.
L20.1407 Opening Pressures

Ensure that the maximum opening pressures required to open fire rated or non-fire rated doors on
disabled access routes are in accordance with the requirements of BS 8300.
L20.1408 Security of External Doorsets/ Door Assemblies

The external doorsets shall have certification illustrating conformance with the following:
a) Security Rating 2 as defined within LPS 1175 SR1, as certified by the Loss Prevention
Certification Board.
b) PAS 23-1 and PAS 24-1.
L10.2200 MATERIALS
Metalwork
L10.2201 Aluminium
a) Aluminium sheeting to be of thickness to suit performance criteria. Unless specified otherwise,
aluminium sheeting shall be a minimum of 3mm thick and satisfy the requirements of BS EN
485: Parts 1-4, BS EN 515 and BS EN 573: Parts 1-4.
b) Refer also to Section Z11.
L10.2202 Mild Steel

a) All mild steelwork shall comply with BS 5950: Part 1 and BS EN 1993: Parts 1-5, unless stated
otherwise.
b) Refer also to Sections Z11 and Z30.
Sealants and Gaskets
L10.2203 Sealants
Refer to Section Z22.
L10.2204 Gaskets
a) Gaskets shall be made of either Ethylene Propylene material (EPDM/ EP) or of Silicone. The
colour of all gaskets shall be black.
b) Refer to Section Z36.
Support Structure/ Fixings
L10.2205 Support Structure

Provide a structural steel support structure, as necessary, having due regard for any requirements in
excess of structural steel indicated on the Structural Engineer's drawings and also any requirements
indicated on the Design Drawings. The structural steelwork shall comply with the Structural
Engineer's steelwork specification, including protective coatings.
L10.2206 Fixings
Fixing components shall comply with all statutory requirements (and be to the acceptance of the
District Surveyor/ Building Control Officer/Structural Engineer) both as to strength and type and shall

Tender Issue
27/07/07
be designed to carry all dead, live and wind loading under due consideration of any applicable
thermal movements. Select suitable components and fixings in accordance with the following:
a) Fixing components for the works shall comprise stainless steel components of high grade
austenitic stainless steel exterior quality to BS EN 10088, BS EN 10084, BS EN 10087, BS
EN 10095, BS EN 10048, BS EN 10051, BS EN 10250: Part 4 and BS EN ISO 9445 and BS
8298.
b) Any sheet mild steel, cleats, angles, fixing brackets, etc. used in the fixing assemblies shall
comply with BS 7668, BS EN 10029, BS EN 10210 and BS EN 10025: Parts 1-4 and 6 and
rolled sections shall be used wherever practicable or appropriate. Steel sections used shall be
hot-dip galvanised to the requirements of BS EN ISO 1461 after all cutting, drilling of holes and
welding has been completed.
c) All non-visible supporting aluminium sub-constructions shall be corrosion protected. Mill
finished aluminium shall not be used. Aluminium sub-constructions shall be separated from
concrete by bitumen paint or similar acceptable method. Austenitic stainless steel to BS EN
10088 may be used in lieu of aluminium for any supporting sub-constructions.
d) Fixing bolts, nuts, screws, washers, etc. shall be manufactured from austenitic stainless steel
complying with BS EN ISO 3506: Parts 1 and 2. All screw fixings and attachments shall be
secured against vibrating loose.
L10.2300 FABRICATION
L10.2301 Tolerances for Manufacture
b) The following tolerances apply to each individual component:
i) Length/Width: Maximum allowed deviation is the lesser of 1.5mm up to 3000mm and
3.0mm above 3000mm of design dimension.
ii) Thickness/Depth (extrusion tolerances nominally): Maximum allowed deviation is ±0.5mm.
L10.2302 Tolerances for Component Assembly

iv) Bow: The centre section of the element shall not bow by more than the lesser of 3mm or
0.075% of the length of the element measured from a straight line between the ends of
the element.
v) Straightness: Any surface or edge shall not deviate by more than +1.5mm from a 2m
straightedge placed against it in a direction parallel to the long axis of the element.
vi) Flatness: Any surface shall not deviate by more than +1.5mm from a 2m straightedge
placed against it in any direction.
vii) Twist: No section of the element may be twisted by more than 1° from the section at
either end of the element.
c) All finished metal surfaces shall be flat and free from undulations and irregularities.
L10.2400 LIGHTNING PROTECTION AND EARTH BONDING

L10.2401 General

Tender Issue
27/07/07
a) Bonding to metal components shall be provided in accordance with BS 6651 and BS EN

62305: Parts 1-4, to ensure continuity between adjacent sections, both vertically and
section of 50mm². Any bolts used for bonding shall be of a minimum size of M10.
b) Bonding to structural steelwork shall be carried out at intervals at no greater than 10m
horizontally and 20m vertically. The first level of bonding to the structural steelwork shall be at
the highest floor level of each part of the building.
c) Provide studs/bolts for subsequent connection.
e) No straps shall be fixed along copings.
L10.3000 SITE INSTALLATION
L10.3100 WORKMANSHIP
L10.3101 General Requirements
a) The works shall be erected plumb (or at the angles prescribed) and true in proper alignment
and relation to established lines and grids as shown on the Shop Drawings. The erected system
shall present true and accurate lines and flat planes. Deviations from lines, planes and verticality
shall be limited to long wave formations of minimum wave length of 20m length with a rate of
exchange not exceeding 1:1000, and a maximum amplitude of 3mm. All the above shall be
measured from a laser reference line.
b) Joints between panels: The actual width of any joint shall not deviate from the nominal width by
more than ±2mm or 10% of the joint width whichever is the lesser. Any variation shall be
equally distributed with no sudden changes. The misalignment between joints shall not exceed
2mm.
c) Level: The works shall be within ±2mm of the specified level. The cumulative slope between the
same locations on any panel shall not exceed 1 in 1000.
d) Plumbness: The works shall be erected such that no point on any panel is more than 3mm from
its theoretical vertical/diagonal plane. The cumulative slope between the same locations on any
panel shall not exceed 1 in 1000. The vertical plane shall be within ±2mm of the theoretical
plane position.
e) A method statement detailing proposals to achieve the specified tolerances shall be submitted
with the Tender. This shall demonstrate a clear understanding of the construction programme,
the effects of the building structure and construction method and the fabrication method of the
panels.
f) Sufficient analysis of the erection sequence shall be undertaken to ensure that the installation
tolerances stated above shall be met to the acceptance of the CA.
g) Dimensional Checking: Before work begins on Site the proposed method of dimensional
setting-out and crosschecking with adjacent trades and elements to satisfy the accuracy
requirements shall be submitted to the CA. The checking of any setting-out or of any line or
level by the CA, or his representative, shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for the correctness thereof.
h) Alternative Tolerances: Alternative tolerances to those specified may be permitted at the CA's
discretion, provided they are agreed in advance of manufacture of components.
i) The Shop Drawings shall provide for sufficient tolerance in manufacture of the works in order to
accommodate manufacturing tolerances of interfacing elements.
j) The tolerances stated herein shall be adhered to. No revisions to the tolerances to cater for
inadequate control shall be permitted.
k) Full details shall be submitted to the CA for review of the proposed methods for achieving and
constantly monitoring the fabrication tolerances during all stages of the work. Detailed records
of the constant control and tolerances achieved shall be submitted to the CA.
l) The works, when installed, shall not be subject to warping or twisting and shall be strictly rigid,
firm, free from vibration, knocking, rattles, squeaks and other noises when subject to the worst
combination of environmental conditions and wind loads.
m) All tolerances stated shall be measured and monitored at a mean temperature to be agreed with
Tender Issue
27/07/07
the CA.
n) No rainwater ponding shall be permitted on any element of the works.
End of Section

Tender Issue
27/07/07
Contents
Z11 METALWORK........................................................................................................2
Z11.2000 MATERIALS/PRODUCTS AND FABRICATION ............................................... 2
Z11.2100 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................ 2

Z11.2101 Metal Components.........................................................................................................................................................................2
Z11.2102 Mild Steel..........................................................................................................................................................................................2
Z11.2103 Aluminium .........................................................................................................................................................................................2
Z11.2104 Stainless Steel ................................................................................................................................................................................3
Z11.2106 Zinc ....................................................................................................................................................................................................4
Z11.2200 WORKMANSHIP ............................................................................................................... 4

Z11.2201 Fabrication Generally.....................................................................................................................................................................4
Z11.2202 Cold Formed Work ........................................................................................................................................................................4
Z11.2203 Adhesive Bonding ..........................................................................................................................................................................4
Z11.2204 Thermal Cutting of Stainless Steel ............................................................................................................................................4
Z11.2205 Welding/Brazing Generally..........................................................................................................................................................4
Z11.2206 Brazing ..............................................................................................................................................................................................5
Z11.2207 Finishing Welded/Brazed Joints.................................................................................................................................................5
Z11.2208 Applying Coatings..........................................................................................................................................................................5
Architectural Specification – T2-T3 External Z11/1 Foster and Partners

Z11 METALWORK
Z11.2000 MATERIALS/PRODUCTS AND FABRICATION
Z11.2100 MATERIALS
Z11.2101 Metal Components
a) The Detailed Design of sections, material thicknesses and the dimensions shown on the Design
Drawings shall be maintained within specified tolerances.
b) All materials and components shall be durable and to the minimum standards set out in the
Specification, together with the relevant British Standards.
c) For each material or component, the total quantity shall be obtained from the same supplier or
manufacturer unless otherwise agreed with the CA.
d) All inaccessible steel shall be properly protected against corrosion for the design life of the
Works.
e) All support systems shall be of adequate thickness and strength, to meet the structural
requirements and eliminate risk of distortion in finished surfaces.
f) Protection shall be provided until handover to avoid any blemishes on the finished elements.
g) All exposed metalwork shall be finished in accordance with the relevant British Standards.
Unless otherwise specified, concealed items shall be mill finished aluminium in internal
conditions only, or hot dip galvanised steel in accordance with BS EN ISO 1461. Any cut
edges shall be treated to ensure that the level of protection is maintained.
h) Adequate measures shall be taken to prevent bi-metallic corrosion between dissimilar metals
and to isolate aluminium components from cementitious surfaces. To this end attention is drawn
to publication PD 6484 'Commentary on corrosion at bi-metallic contacts and its alleviation'.
Z11.2102 Mild Steel

a) All mild steelwork shall comply with BS 5950: Part 1, unless stated otherwise.
b) Fabrication of steelwork shall be in accordance with the Specification.
c) Before and after making permanent connections in frames and other structural elements, which
are assembled before delivery to Site, the fit shall be checked for accuracy.
d) Welding procedures shall be such that distortion is reduced to a minimum and local distortion
rendered negligible in the final fabrication. Corrections, if necessary, shall be undertaken by a
method which has been agreed to by the CA.
e) No welds other than those shown on the Shop Drawings, even for temporary attachments or
repairs, shall be acceptable unless agreed in advance by the CA. If welded temporary
connections are agreed upon, then the welding and removal of the connection shall be in
accordance with BS EN 1011: Parts 1 and 2.
f) Vent holes in hollow sections shall be sealed in a manner that shall prevent the ingress of
moisture. The proposed method of achieving this requirement shall be submitted for review by
the CA.
g) External visible lines and depressions caused by the internal welding of hollow section
steelwork shall be positioned in the works so as to be non-visible.
Z11.2103 Aluminium
a) All extruded aluminium alloy members shall be fabricated from the appropriate grade of
aluminium alloy complying with BS EN 754: Parts 3-5 and BS EN 755: Parts 1-9 unless
otherwise specified.
b) Unless specified otherwise, aluminium sheeting shall be a minimum of 3mm thick and satisfy the
requirements of BS EN 485: Parts 1-4, BS EN 515 and BS EN 573: Parts 1-4.
c) Only appropriate grades, strengths and thicknesses of aluminium shall be used to ensure that
all structural and finishing requirements of the Specification are met. The wall thicknesses of

aluminium extrusions shall be sufficient to ensure their rigidity in the lengths required in the final
installation.
d) All aluminium fixing brackets and cleats shall be manufactured from the appropriate grade of
alloy to the requirements of BS EN 515, BS EN 573: Parts 3 and 4, and BS EN 755: Parts 1-9.
If visible, they shall be finished to match the metal panels and framing members.
e) All exposed aluminium shall be protected with low tack adhesive film during construction and
prior to handover.
f) Where aluminium is to be anodised, aluminium sheeting and flat panels shall be manufactured
using alloy grade J57S, or acceptable equivalent, and aluminium extrusions shall be
manufactured using alloy grade 6063, or acceptable equivalent.
g) Aluminium panels shall be manufactured such that the grain on each runs in the same direction.
h) Issue “Die Drawings” to the CA for review. These shall be considered as Shop Drawings. The
“Die Drawings” shall indicate polished surfaces and shape.
i) Aluminium extrusions containing score lines resulting from poorly polished surfaces shall not be
acceptable.
j) Aluminium sheets shall not suffer bowing, dimpling, oil canning, sagging, pillowing, rippling,
warp, abrupt transitions or other visible deformation or irregularity.
Z11.2104 Stainless Steel

a) Unless otherwise specified, stainless steel shall be austenitic and non-magnetic to BS EN
10088. Specific grade designations shall be either as specified in the relevant sections of the
Specification or, where not identified specifically, selected to meet the performance criteria
specified for the particular element or components.
b) Stainless steel fasteners, bolts, screws, nuts and other fixings shall be to BS EN ISO 3506:
Parts 1 and 2. The property class of fastenings shall be selected to meet the performance
requirements as specified.
c) Stainless steel shall be produced to meet the minimum dimensional tolerances specified in BS
EN 10095, BS EN 10029, BS EN 10048, BS EN 10051 and BS EN ISO 9445 as appropriate.
d) Unless otherwise specified, welds to visible areas of stainless steel shall be ground smooth to
achieve a seamless surface. Heat tints shall be removed using light abrasives, pickling paste,
wire brushing or similar to achieve continuity with the specified finish. Areas difficult to access
shall be manually finished if necessary.
e) All welds shall comply with BS EN 1011: Part 3 and the definitions given in BS 499: Part 1 and
Part 1 Supplement. Distortion due to thermal movement shall be minimised using jigs or other
methods as appropriate during welding. Welding methods and consumables shall be chosen as
most appropriate to the type, thickness, shape and location of joints to meet the performance
levels required and have mechanical properties at least equal to the original base metal. In
addition, consumables shall have an equal or superior corrosion resistance to the base metal
being welded. All welding recommendations required to meet other relevant standards as
specified shall also apply. Electrodes for manual metal arc welding shall comply with BS EN
1600.
f) Stress corrosion or cracking shall not occur and all necessary precautions in the fabrication and
installation of stainless steel elements/materials shall be undertaken, avoiding the simultaneous
presence of any of the following:
i) Tensile stresses.
ii) Residual stresses after cold working or welding.
iii) Aggressive local environmental conditions.
iv) Metal temperatures that in conjunction with the above may induce stress corrosion
cracking.
g) Stainless steel castings:
i) Shall comply with BS EN 10283 and BS 3146: Part 2.
ii) Shall be of austenitic stainless steel and the casting alloy shall be determined by the
Contractor to meet the requirements of the Specification but shall be equal or superior to
grade 1.4408 with respect to corrosion resistance.

iii) Shall be manufactured using the lost wax process or such other process as may be
proposed by the Contractor and accepted by the CA.
iv) Exposed feeder ports and die lines shall not be acceptable in the finished castings.
v) The surface finish of the castings shall be determined by the submission of samples for
review and acceptance by the CA. Samples once accepted should be the standard
required for all subsequent castings to be used in the works.
vi) The surface roughness of the casting surface prior to any subsequent finishing process
shall be SCRATA A2 (Steel Castings Research and Trade Association) or better.
vii) Make allowance for two post production finishing processes to be utilised. The processes
shall be agreed with the CA and shall include blast finishes (including bead blasting) and
electropolishing or acid pickling.
h) Stainless steel fixings and support brackets for natural stone cladding shall comply with BS
8298.
i) Stainless steel wire, cold-forged fasteners and similar components shall comply with BS EN
10263: Part 5.
j) Stainless steel for wall ties and other components associated with masonry construction shall
comply with BS 5628: Part 3 and BS EN 845: Part 1.
k) Stainless steel shall be protected where possible using appropriate adhesive film, to the film
manufacturer’s written recommendations.
l) If stainless steel has not been protected by adhesive film, thoroughly clean prior to presentation
to the CA for acceptance.
Z11.2106 Zinc
Zinc-copper-titanium alloy shall be in accordance with BS EN 988. The use of Zinc in fully-supported
roofing shall be in accordance with BS EN 501.
Z11.2200 WORKMANSHIP
Z11.2201 Fabrication Generally
a) Fabricate components carefully and accurately to ensure compliance with the Design and the
Specification.
b) Do not permit contact between dissimilar metals in components that are to be fixed where
moisture may be present or occur.
c) Finished components shall be rigid and free from distortion, cracks, burrs and sharp arrises.
Moving parts shall move freely and without binding.
d) Unless specified otherwise, mitre corner junctions of identical sections.
Z11.2202 Cold Formed Work

Use brake presses or cold rolling to produce accurate profiles with straight arrises.
Z11.2203 Adhesive Bonding

a) Prepare surfaces of metals to receive adhesives by degreasing and abrading mechanically or
chemically.
b) Use adhesives to manufacturer’s written recommendations.
c) Form bond under pressure.
Z11.2204 Thermal Cutting of Stainless Steel

After cutting, grind off material that is liable to corrode.
Z11.2205 Welding/Brazing Generally

a) Thoroughly clean surfaces to be joined.
b) Ensure accurate fit using clamps and jigs where practicable. Use tack welds only for temporary
attachment.
c) Make joints with parent and filler metal fully bonded throughout with no inclusions, holes,
porosity or cracks.

d) Prevent weld spatter falling on surfaces of materials that will be self-finished and visible in
completed work.
e) Remove all traces of flux residue, slag and weld spatter.
f) Metal arc welding shall be to BS EN 1011: Parts 1 and 2, or other methods subject to review
by the CA.
Z11.2206 Brazing
To BS EN 14324.
Z11.2207 Finishing Welded/Brazed Joints

a) Visible butt joints in completed work shall be smooth, flush with adjacent surfaces.
b) Visible fillet joints in completed work shall be executed neatly. Grind smooth where specified.
Z11.2208 Applying Coatings

a) Apply after fabrication is complete and all fixing holes have been drilled, unless otherwise
specified.
b) Before applying coating remove all paint, grease, flux, rust, burrs and sharp arrises.
c) Make good all defects that would show after application of coating and finish surfaces smooth.
End of Section

Contents
Z20 FIXINGS/ADHESIVES..........................................................................................2
Z20.2100 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................ 2

Z20.2101 Fixing Generally...............................................................................................................................................................................2
Z20.2102 Powder Actuated Fixing Systems ..............................................................................................................................................2
Z20.2103 Screw Fixings ..................................................................................................................................................................................2
Z20.2104 Packings Generally ........................................................................................................................................................................3
Z20.2105 Types of Nail ....................................................................................................................................................................................3
Z20.2106 Masonry Nails ..................................................................................................................................................................................3
Z20.2107 Plugs Generally...............................................................................................................................................................................3
Z20.3000 SITE INSTALLATION............................................................................................. 3
Z20.3100 APPLICATION .................................................................................................................... 3

Z20.3101 Adhesives .........................................................................................................................................................................................3
Z20.3102 Fixings................................................................................................................................................................................................3
Z20.3103 Powder Actuated Fixing................................................................................................................................................................3
Z20.3104 Screw Fixings ..................................................................................................................................................................................4
Z20.3105 Packings Generally ........................................................................................................................................................................4
Z20.3106 Nail Fixing .........................................................................................................................................................................................4
Z20.3107 Plugs Generally...............................................................................................................................................................................4

Z20 FIXINGS/ADHESIVES
Z20.2100 MATERIALS
Z20.2101 Fixing Generally
a) All fixings shall be of sufficient strength, appropriate to their location, and are provided at
adequate positions so as to ensure the performance of the elements being attached. The fixings
shall be suitable and used solely for the purposes intended by the manufacturer in order to
satisfy the requirements of the Specification.
b) Unless otherwise specified, observe the following requirements:
i) Durability - fixings shall be selected such that adequate protection against any corrosion
likely to occur in their position of use is provided for the service life specified.
ii) Rigidity - fixings shall be used which are suited to the likely stresses, movements and
vibrations in use.
iii) Appearance - unless otherwise specified, fixings shall not be visible; where fixings are
visible these shall match or suit the items being fixed or comply with the Design Drawings.
iv) Removable items that require accessibility or removal shall be fixed with hidden screws
and/or bolts, unless otherwise specified.
c) Use fixings that are suitable for their intended purpose and adequate to comply with the
requirements stated in the Specification.
d) All visible bolts, screws, nuts, anchors and other fixings shall be of adequate strength for their
designed purpose and shall, unless specified otherwise, be manufactured from the most
appropriate grade of austenitic stainless steel or other materials as specified. Where specified,
structural steel fixings shall comply with the grades specified.
e) Supply all necessary and appropriate fasteners, fixings, bearings, brackets, etc. necessary for
the safe and proper installation plus associated flashings and closures.
f) All fixings shall conform to all statutory requirements in respect of strength and type.
g) Adequate measures shall be taken to prevent bi-metallic corrosion between dissimilar metals
and to isolate aluminium components from cementitious surfaces. To this end attention is drawn
to publication PD 6484 'Commentary on corrosion at bi-metallic contacts and its alleviation'.
h) Generally, fixings within aluminium framing components shall not be visible, with the exception
of capping pieces fixed to vertical mullions.
i) Visible fixings shall be restricted to the assembly of non-visible elements to support steelwork,
using round-headed Allen bolts into a proprietary system.
j) Any steel sub-frame assemblies shall be galvanised and effectively weatherproofed to avoid
exposure to the external environment.
k) Provide cast-in channel fixings in concrete and fixings directly made to structural steelwork.
l) All fixings shall be tested in accordance with BS 5080: Parts 1 and 2 by an independent
Testing Authority acceptable to the CA.
Z20.2102 Powder Actuated Fixing Systems

a) Do not use powder actuated fixing systems without acceptance.
b) Tools shall be to BS 4078: Part 2 and Kite mark certified.
c) Fasteners, accessories and consumables shall be types recommended by the tool
manufacturer.
Z20.2103 Screw Fixings

a) Screws: To BS 1210.
b) Washers and screw cups, where specified, shall be of the same material as the screw.

Z20.2104 Packings Generally

a) Provide suitable, tight packings at fixing points to take up tolerances and prevent distortion.
b) Use non-compressible, rot-proof, non-corrodible materials positioned adjacent to fixing points.
Z20.2105 Types of Nail

Nails shall be to BS 1202.
Z20.2106 Masonry Nails

Do not use without acceptance.
Z20.2107 Plugs Generally

Use proprietary types selected to suit the background, loads to be supported and conditions
expected in use.
Z20.3000 SITE INSTALLATION
Z20.3100 APPLICATION
Z20.3101 Adhesives
a) Surfaces to receive adhesive shall be sound, unfrozen and free from dust, grease and any other
contamination likely to affect bond. Where necessary, clean surfaces using methods and
materials recommended by the adhesive manufacturer.
b) Surfaces shall be sufficiently smooth and even to suit the gap-filling and bonding characteristics
of the adhesive. Prepare as necessary.
c) Operatives shall observe both the manufacturers’ and statutory requirements for storage and
safe usage of adhesives.
d) No adhesives shall be used in unsuitable environmental conditions or beyond the
manufacturer’s recommended maximum shelf life or open-pot time periods.
e) Adhesives shall be applied using recommended spreaders/applicators to ensure correct
coverage. Bring surfaces together within the recommended time period and apply pressure
evenly over the full area of contact surfaces to ensure full bonding.
f) Surplus adhesive shall be removed using methods and materials recommended by the adhesive
manufacturer and without damage to affected surfaces.
g) Adhesives and sealants with a low VOC content in line with (SCAQMD) rule #1168.
Z20.3102 Fixings
a) Carry out all necessary preparation work such as drilling, plugging, screwing, bolting, cutting for
anchor bolts or sockets to be cast-in and for making good, including grouting-in of anchor bolts
and fixings where necessary.
b) The method of fixing shall not damage anything being fixed or anything receiving fixings.
c) Welding shall not be permitted, unless accepted by the CA.
d) Fasteners shall be installed with a co-ordinated purpose design tooling system that
incorporates a mechanical depth locator to ensure consistent depth setting and facilitates
perpendicular installation. The fastener manufacturer shall be capable of providing on-Site
instruction in the use of the fastener installation tooling system.
e) All fixings shall comply with Section 2 of Approved Document A of the Building Regulations and
any subsequent amendments thereto.
f) Submit QA/QC procedures for inspection of fixings to the CA to include, but not be limited to,
checking each fixing for correct torques, depth of mortices, alignment, etc.
g) Ensure that no lock-up stresses are generated.
Z20.3103 Powder Actuated Fixing

a) Tools shall be used in accordance with BS 4078: Part 1. Operatives shall be trained and
certified as competent by the Contractor.
b) Ensure that operatives take full precautions against injury to themselves and others.

c) Remove all unspent cartridges from the Site when no longer required.
d) Apply zinc rich primer to heads of fasteners used externally in external walls or in other locations
subject to dampness.
e) Use top hat section plastic washers to isolate cartridge-fired nails from stainless steel
components fixed externally, in external walls or in other locations subject to dampness.
Z20.3104 Screw Fixings

a) All screws shall have clearance holes. Screws of 8 gauge or more and all screws into hardwood
shall have pilot holes about half the diameter of the shank.
b) Before using brass, aluminium or other soft metal wood screws, pre-cut the thread with a
matching steel wood screw.
c) Do not hammer screws unless specifically designed to be hammered.
d) Countersink screw heads not less than 2mm below timber surfaces that will be visible in the
completed work, unless specified otherwise.
Z20.3105 Packings Generally

Ensure that packings do not intrude into zones that are to be filled with sealants.
Z20.3106 Nail Fixing

a) In joints, use not less than two nails and opposed skew nailing unless specified otherwise.
b) Drive nails fully in without splitting or crushing the material being fixed.
c) Punch nail heads below surfaces that will be visible in the completed work.
Z20.3107 Plugs Generally

Locate plugs accurately in correctly sized holes in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
End of Section

Contents
Z22 SEALANTS.............................................................................................................2
Z22.2000 MATERIALS/PRODUCTS..................................................................................... 2
Z22.2100 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................ 2

Z22.2101 Types and Method .........................................................................................................................................................................2
Z22.3000 SITE INSTALLATION............................................................................................. 3
Z22.3100 WORKMANSHIP ............................................................................................................... 3

Z22.3101 Application .......................................................................................................................................................................................3

Z22 SEALANTS
Z22.2000 MATERIALS/PRODUCTS
Z22.2100 MATERIALS
Z22.2101 Types and Method
a) Sealant shall be suitable for the purpose intended, and used strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
b) Sealants shall not be in any way a potential health hazard. Maintain full up-to-date records of all
current published research and legislation in this respect. Obtain information from the sealant
manufacturer regarding storage, handling, use and disposal of sealants.
c) Wet applied sealants shall only be used in the locations shown on the Design Drawings or
Shop Drawings or as and where agreed with the CA, provided that all the requirements of the
Specification are satisfied.
d) Sealants shall be the most appropriate type and grade suitable for the intended application.
e) Written confirmation from the sealant manufacturer shall be obtained and submitted to the CA
for consideration as to the suitability of the sealant for the application intended.
f) Submit proposals and reference samples to the CA of the type and colour of the sealant prior
to ordering.
g) Sealant colour shall be agreed with the CA. State the period during which the sealant shall not
change in appearance or colour. Any discolouration of sealant during this time shall not be
acceptable.
h) The chemical composition of the sealant and primers, where any, shall be compatible with the
joint substrate, and with adjacent surface treatments or building components with which they
may come into contact.
i) Determine the appropriate hardness, compressibility or consistency of sealants in consultation
with the manufacturer, considering the joint movement and exposure for the size of joint. Upon
request, furnish information concerning theoretical joint movement related to the anticipated
temperatures at which sealants shall be installed and cured.
j) Demonstrate to the satisfaction of the CA that the sealant joints can accommodate and are
compatible with any movements to which they may be subjected.
k) Sealants shall have the lowest modulus of elasticity which is consistent with the degree of
exposure to wear, abrasion and vandalism. Any sealant exposed to traffic shall have strength
and modulus sufficiently high to resist damage by traffic, including indentation.
l) Sealants that are likely to stain, discolour or bleed into adjacent building materials shall not be
used. Provide independent testing evidence to this effect.
m) Where the sealant location involves special requirements, comply with the following:
i) Where the sealant is used in trafficked surfaces and/or requires to be fuel resistant, it
shall comply with BS EN 14188: Part 1 for hot applied sealants and BS EN 14188: Part
2 and BS 5212 for cold applied sealants.
ii) Where the sealant is required to achieve a period of fire resistance, provide independent
UK performance certification of the proposed sealants to show the sealant satisfies the
required fire resistance requirement.
iii) Where sealants are in contact with drinking water, provide evidence of compliance with
UK water quality standards.
iv) Resistance to permanently wet service environments.
n) Sealant performance shall be verified by provision of current independent test certificates.
o) Manufacturers’ product descriptions shall confirm compliance with performance standards
including the BS EN ISO 11600 coding and be confirmed on the package labels, in the
technical data sheets and on any certificates demonstrating performance capability.

p) Sealants complying with the Specification shall be manufactured within an independently

assessed BS EN ISO 9000 series quality system. Each pack supplied shall have a batch
number and date of manufacture.
q) An on-Site test procedure as recommended by the manufacturer, shall be used as a means of
assessing the extent of sealant cure and/or adhesion to joint surfaces
r) Sealants with a low VOC content in line with (SCAQMD) rule #1168.
Z22.3000 SITE INSTALLATION
Z22.3100 WORKMANSHIP
Z22.3101 Application
a) Carefully prepare surfaces to receive sealant, using correct de-greasing solvents, primers and
bonding agents as necessary.
b) Where sealants are applied, either on or off Site, they shall be in accordance with BS 6213, BS
6093 or BS 8000: Part 16 and BS EN ISO 11600 as appropriate.
c) The application of sealants shall be in accordance with the supplier's/manufacturer's written
preparatory and application procedures and the Code of Practice prepared by the British
Adhesives and Sealant Association Manual of Good Practice or acceptable equivalent
organisation.
d) Excess sealant shall be removed and all joints shall be neat and clean. Only liquids approved by
the sealant manufacturer shall be used to tool freshly applied sealants.
e) Sealant shall be evenly applied without bubbles in joints.
f) Sealants shall be adequately protected during the curing process to avoid contamination or
damage from other activities or conditions on Site.
g) Joint fillers, when placed in the joint, shall provide a gap consistent with the required depth of
sealant. The cross section of sealant in the joint shall be of 2:1 width to depth unless otherwise
accepted. Joint fillers shall be as follows:
i) Compatible with the sealant used and surrounding construction elements.
ii) Formed from closed cell foam.
iii) Non-adhering to cured sealant.
h) Applicators shall operate within an approved BS EN ISO 9002 scheme.
i) Only materials meeting the Specification requirements and stored under appropriate conditions
shall be used for installation.
End of Section

Contents
Z25 GLASS AND COATINGS....................................................................................2
Z25.2100 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................ 2

Z25.2110 Types of Glass.................................................................................................................................. 2
Z25.2111 Glazing Generally ...........................................................................................................................................................................2
Z25.2112 Safety Glass ....................................................................................................................................................................................3
Z25.2113 Annealed Glass...............................................................................................................................................................................4
Z25.2114 Laminated Glass.............................................................................................................................................................................4
Z25.2115 Toughened Glass ...........................................................................................................................................................................4
Z25.2116 Heat Strengthened Glass ............................................................................................................................................................6
Z25.2117 Wired Glass.....................................................................................................................................................................................6
Z25.2118 Fire Resistant Glass.......................................................................................................................................................................6
Z25.2119 Curved Glass (Tolerances)..........................................................................................................................................................6
Z25.2120 Coatings and Tinting ....................................................................................................................... 7
Z25.2121 Glass Coatings Generally ............................................................................................................................................................7
Z25.2122 High Performance Glass Coatings............................................................................................................................................7
Z25.2123 Glass Body Tints ............................................................................................................................................................................8
Z25.2130 Unitised Systems.............................................................................................................................. 8
Z25.2131 Double Glazed Units .....................................................................................................................................................................8
Z25.2132 Visual Quality Testing....................................................................................................................................................................8
Z25.2140 Structural Sealant Glazing .............................................................................................................. 9
Z25.2141 Type and Method............................................................................................................................................................................9
Z25.2150 Rooflights/Horizontal and Inclined Glazing ................................................................................ 10
Z25.2151 Type and Method......................................................................................................................................................................... 10

Z25 GLASS AND COATINGS

Z25.2100 MATERIALS
Z25.2110 Types of Glass
Z25.2111 Glazing Generally

a) Glass manufacture shall comply generally with BS EN 572 for float (annealed glass), BS EN
1096 for coated glass, BS EN 1863 for heat strengthened glass, BS EN ISO 12543 for
laminated glass and BS EN 12150 for toughened glass. Visual quality testing for dimensional
requirements and visual defects of the respective glass types shall, as a minimum, be as cited in
these standards, unless specified otherwise.
b) All glass types shall be cut to accurate sizes with clean cut, arrised edges. Damage such as
shark teeth, serration hackle, sharp flare, flake chips, rough chips, feathered edges, shells or
other imperfections shall not be acceptable if detrimental to the visual and performance criteria
of the glass. Glass delivered to Site shall be of the required size. No cutting or nipping of glass
shall be allowed on Site. Variations in manufacture and performance of the glass shall not affect
its colour or appearance, while all glass of the same type shall be visually consistent in
appearance and colour at all times, having due regard to the direction and angle of view within
manufacturing tolerances and the agreed range of samples or observations of previous
installations of the same type of glass.
c) All glass shall be of the type specified in the relevant BS EN series range, while the glazing shall
be carried out in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
d) All glass panes within frames shall be installed to give the necessary edge cover and clearance
to ensure a permanent and safe installation. Glass panes with damaged edges, including
shelling and impact markings, shall not be fixed into the building under any circumstances.
e) Provide a warranty from the glass manufacturer, which states that the glazing systems comply
with the manufacturer's requirements, and indicates the life expectancy of the glass, interlayers,
spacers and other components.
f) Distortion shall be kept to an absolute minimum with no local defects (such as tong marks)
producing irregular reflections being allowed. All glass shall be manufactured and processed in
accordance with quality control procedures to BS EN ISO 9000 and are independently
maintained.
g) Stresses in glazing: Ensure that no glass or glazing combination develops stresses that may
lead to damage of glass, glazing materials, components and/or framing systems:
i) Conduct a thermal stress analysis and make due allowance for any thermally treated or
edge working of annealed glass which may be required.
ii) Take into account shading stresses that might occur from adjacent components, including
solar shading devices.
h) The method of glazing adopted shall take account of the manufacturing tolerances in the glass,
thus minimising the effects of distortion resulting.
i) All glass shall be capable of replacement without undue difficulty. Provide a method statement
showing the method of removing damaged glass and any associated metal framework and of
installing new components.
j) Provide glass with a colour rendering index (Ra) as specified, both for the transmittance and the
reflected spectrum and provide detailed reflected and transmitted spectrum data for the
purpose of identifying/anticipating the possible problems with colour reflection. Demonstrate
this by provision of full size samples of each glass type, which are to be viewed under
representative lighting conditions and accepted prior to material manufacture.
k) Provide all glass from a single supplier unless agreed otherwise by the CA and provide
certification proving the origin of the glass.
l) Ensure that glass does not contain impurities, which would detract in any way from the

performance of the glazing system.

m) All exposed glass edges shall be ground and arrised.
n) All glass shall be free from bubbles, smoke vanes, air holes, scratches or any other visible
defects unless described as acceptable elsewhere in the Specification.
o) Mirror glass is not acceptable unless described as acceptable elsewhere in the Specification.
p) Where combinations of glass types are used in a unit, the least stringent criteria for viewing
shall be used in accordance with the relevant standards.
q) Prior to placing an order for any glazing materials, obtain all necessary confirmation and/or
calculations in writing from the glass manufacturer, on all aspects of the glazing systems for
review, as but not limited to the following:
i) Ventilating and draining provisions of the glazing rebates.
ii) Thickness of individual glass panes and of insulating glass units due to consideration of
the wind loadings specified.
iii) Snow and access loads for horizontal/inclined glazing conditions with consideration of the
wind loadings specified.
iv) Determination as to whether or not heat strengthening or toughening of glass will be
required.
v) Thickness and number of PVB interlayers (laminated glass).
vi) Thermal and shading performance of insulating glass units.
vii) Thermal safety of insulating glass units.
viii) Hardness, location, shape and dimensions of setting blocks and glazing gaskets.
ix) Depth and width of glazing rebates.
x) Expansion, tolerances, glass bite and clearance to meet all specified performance
requirements.
Z25.2112 Safety Glass

a) Select safety glass categories for use in critical locations as defined and recommended in BS
6262, BS EN ISO 12543, Parts 1, 3, 4, 5 and 6, pr EN ISO 12543: Part 2 and BS EN 1279 as
required to comply with the Building Regulations, Local Authority requirements and other
relevant Health and Safety requirements. The selection of the glass type and thickness shall be
undertaken to meet the performance requirements of the Specification and to minimise the risk
to persons both during construction and during the service life of the works. The risk of failure
and the consequences of failure shall be documented and prepared by the Contractor for
review.
b) All safety glass shall be ‘Kite’, or other internationally recognised standard, marked and labelled
in accordance with the relevant standards and shall meet the requirements of the Local Building
Regulations for safety glass, in a consistent position on the glass as agreed with the CA.
c) Annealed float glass used as safety glass shall comply with BS 6262 and BS 6206 and BS EN
12600 including any labelling requirements.
d) Safety glass shall be tested to meet the requirements of BS 6206 and BS EN 12600.
e) Where it is necessary to meet the requirements of BS 6262, the Building Regulations and any
other health and safety requirements, manifestation shall be provided. The type of manifestation
shall be agreed with the CA and samples provided for acceptance.
f) Manifestation:
i) Location: As required by Approved Document N.
ii) Application:
• Factory applied: Ceramic fritting, screen printed.
• Site applied: Acid etched/vinyl adhesive backed film/etchlite/sand blasting.
iii) Colour: As defined in the particular requirements.
iv) Setting out: Carefully set out to scan across panels to give a consistent rhythm and

spacing across the length of the façade.
Z25.2113 Annealed Glass

a) Unless otherwise specified and accepted in advance by the CA, all sheet glass shall be
manufactured by the float process. Other sheet glass shall not be acceptable without the prior
written agreement of the CA.
b) Untinted glass sheets shall provide a clear, undistorted vision and reflection.
c) The tolerances on thickness shall be as reproduced in BS 952: Part 1.
d) The tolerances on cut sizes for different thicknesses of material shall be as BS EN 572: Part 2.
e) Visual quality testing of annealed glass for dimensional requirements and visual defects shall be
in accordance with BS EN 572: Part 2.
Z25.2114 Laminated Glass

a) Utilise expertise and experience for the selection of glass in order to comply with the
performance requirements of the Specification.
b) Laminated glass shall be in accordance with BS 952, BS EN 572, pr EN ISO 12543: Part 2
and BS EN ISO 12543: Parts 1, 3, 4, 5 and 6.
c) Laminated glass shall consist of a number of sheets of flat glass with a suitable interlayer to suit
the solar performance requirements, or methyl metacrylate resin interleaving between each
layer. Interlay material shall be capable of withstanding temperatures of at least 100 degrees
celsius. The layers can be clear, translucent or coloured depending on the design intentions of
the glazing. The glass may be annealed, heat strengthened or heat soak toughened, as required
to meet the performance requirements of the Specification.
d) The Design Drawings shall show the visual requirements of the CA. Final selection of glass type
and thickness of each layer, together with type, opacity, density and location of interlayer and
coatings shall be accepted by the CA prior to ordering materials.
e) All glass shall meet the colour and quality standards set by the Control Samples.
f) Laminated glass edges shall be sealed with materials compatible with the interlayer.
Delamination of the laminated glass for any reason is not acceptable.
g) Visual quality testing of laminated glass shall be carried out at a distance of 2000mm from the
viewed surface of the glass observing it perpendicularly (the matt screen being on the other
side of the glass) in accordance with BS EN ISO 12543: Part 6. Defects that are disturbing
when viewed shall be marked.
Or
h) Visual quality testing of laminated glass shall be carried out at a distance of 1000mm from the
viewed surface of the glass at a viewing angle which corresponds to the normal usage of the
room and carried out under diffuse daylight conditions (e.g. overcast sky), without direct
sunlight or artificial lighting.
i) The bottom supported edges of laminated glass panes shall be cut flush over the width of the
pane to provide even distribution of vertical load to the setting blocks.
Z25.2115 Toughened Glass

a) The use of toughened glass shall be justified by risk assessment and/or calculations, with the
general aim of minimising its use.
b) All toughened glass shall be heat soaked to DIN 18516: Part 4 paying particular attention to
temperature and duration of treatment. Prior to heat soaking, provide written reports to
demonstrate oven and thermocouple calibration and temperature tolerances. Demonstrate that,
despite temperature tolerances, the glass temperature in all parts of the oven was maintained at
or above 290° C ±10° C for 8 hours. Provide detailed records of heat soaking for each batch
prior to delivery to site. Alternatively, if the calibration equipment of the oven permits then the
regime detailed in Draft Standard BS EN 1279: Part 1 may be adopted.
c) The glass shall conform to BS EN 12150 and the following requirements in the horizontal
toughening process:
i) Maximum overall bow: 0.003mm per millimetre measured along the glass edge.
ii) Maximum local bow: The maximum deviation for flatness from peak to trough shall not

exceed 0.3mm per 300mm or 0.15mm at the edge.

iii) Rollerwave: Glass shall be sized to provide for the consistent and horizontally aligned
orientation of ripples throughout the Works. The maximum deviation for flatness from peak
to trough shall not exceed 0.08mm. In any event, state in the Tender submission
proposals to control the extent of rollerwave, if any. Provide full size samples of all
specified heat treated glass to signify the range of rollerwave throughout the Works, prior
to commencing production of the glass.
iv) Edge dip: 0.25mm maximum.
d) Visual quality testing of toughened glass for dimensional requirements and visual defects shall
be in accordance with BS EN 12150: Part 1.
Or
e) Visual quality testing of toughened glass shall be carried out at a distance of 1000mm from the
viewed surface of the glass at a viewing angle which corresponds to the normal usage of the
room and carried out under diffuse daylight conditions (e.g. overcast sky), without direct
f) Exposed edge working shall be flat ground with small ground arris and have a frosted
appearance. Small shells and/or chips, exceeding a maximum diameter of 2mm, shall be ground
out prior to toughening.
g) The surface compressive stress shall be demonstrated by non-destructive testing, to be
controlled at the Works at >=120N/mm².
h) All glass shall be cut to accurate sizes and delivered to the Site in the required sizes. No on-
Site cutting or nipping shall be allowed. The glass shall be clearly marked to show its intended
final position and orientation.
i) Ensure that glass heat treatment requirements are satisfactory to meet wind, impact, thermal or
other loads anticipated in the Works. The manufacturer of the toughened glass shall be made
aware of its intended use in the construction. Any drilling and notching shall be carried out with
the agreement of the manufacturer of the toughened glass and prior to the toughening being
carried out. All toughened glass shall be tempered on a roller heath furnace eliminating tong
marks and shall conform to BS 6206 and BS EN 12600 (Class A /Class 1B1).
j) Ensure that the toughening process does not produce iridescence, distortion, roll marks or
ripples in the glass which are unacceptable to the CA. Such anticipated imperfections shall be
demonstrated by the provision of full size samples prior to commencement of glass production.
The CA will examine the samples provided and reasonably advise what is acceptable and what
is unacceptable. All glass produced for the Works shall comply with the acceptable samples as
a minimum standard.
k) Prior to commencement of manufacture, advise the CA of the glass supplier and the premises
where fabrication and processing shall be carried out.
l) Prior to installation of the toughened glass, ensure that all documentary evidence is in place and
demonstrate with such evidence that the glass has been heat soaked for the prescribed
periods. Such evidence shall also include, as a minimum, the following:
i) Source of supply and evidence of batching.
ii) Dates and records of toughening/heat soaking of all glass.
iii) Certification that the glass shall meet the performance requirements of the Specification.
iv) Records to include details of all units that failed during the heat soak test.
m) The CA shall be given the opportunity of visiting the glass manufacturer’s premises during
fabrication and/or processing.
n) The toughening process shall not create any stresses in the glass that are visible within the
limits specified.
o) The toughening process shall not affect the appearance of the coating.
p) No cooling jet marks shall be visible on the finished surface of the toughened glass.
q) Any discolouration or distortion caused by the toughening process shall be unacceptable
outside of roller wave distortion and glass bow specified.
r) Take all reasonable measures to control the toughening process so as to avoid the occurrence

of anisotropy at the time of manufacture. Glass shall be rejected if it does not fall within the
range of agreed samples.
Z25.2116 Heat Strengthened Glass

a) Unless otherwise specified, all heat strengthened glass shall comply with the requirements of
BS EN 1863.
b) Visual quality testing of heat strengthened glass for dimensional requirements and visual
defects shall be in accordance with BS EN 1863: Part 1.
Or
c) Visual quality testing of heat strengthened glass shall be carried out at a distance of 1000mm
from the viewed surface of the glass at a viewing angle which corresponds to the normal usage
of the room and carried out under diffuse daylight conditions (e.g. overcast sky), without direct
d) When subject to a fracture test in accordance with BS 6206 and BS EN 12600, the fracture
characteristics shall be similar to annealed glass and therefore, heat strengthened glass shall
not be considered as a ‘safety’ glass. If heat strengthened glass is proposed for use in a
situation that requires a safety glazing material, it shall be laminated.
Z25.2117 Wired Glass

a) Wired glass shall comprise “polished wired glass” as defined in BS 952: Part 1 and BS EN
572: Part 1.
b) Glass shall be annealed.
c) Glass shall be of the thickness specified and, unless otherwise specified, with 1.3mm
‘Georgian’ wire embedded within the glass thickness.
d) Tolerances on wired glass thickness shall be to the minimum specified in BS 952: Part 1 and
the length, breadth and squareness as specified in BS EN 572: Part 3 for polished glass and
BS EN 572: Part 6 for patterned glass.
Z25.2118 Fire Resistant Glass

a) Fire resisting glass shall provide the fire ratings specified, tested to BS 476: Parts 20 and 22.
b) Fire resisting glazing shall also be classified as safety glass to BS 6206 and BS EN 12600,
minimum category Class B/ Class 2B2.
c) Fire resisting glazing shall incorporate fire rated beading and fixing methods to match the fire
rating specified. It shall also be tested or certified or assessed as being equal to the relevant
parts of BS 476.
d) Unless otherwise specified, wired glass shall not be used. Glass shall be clear, with fire
resisting properties as specified above.
e) Submit technical/product information on all fire resisting glass proposed for review by the CA. It
is recognised that the glass will not necessarily meet the visual quality requirements set out in
the Specification. Submit details of the visual quality and dimensional limits of any proposed fire
resistant glass for review by the CA.
f) Where insulation is specified in addition to stability/integrity this shall be in accordance with
Building Regulations Part B tested to the relevant parts of BS 476.
Z25.2119 Curved Glass (Tolerances)

a) The maximum variation in curved form shall be ±4mm from the theoretical form.
b) The maximum variation in adjacent glass edges when installed shall be 1mm per 1000mm.
c) The maximum difference between curved adjacent glass edges when installed shall be 3mm.
d) All curved glass panels shall be continuously curved from edge to edge for the full radius with
no straight returns.
e) The maximum allowed deviation of the length and width of sheets shall be ±4mm for
dimensions up to and including 2000mm and ±4.5mm for dimensions over 2000mm.
f) The maximum allowed deviation of the diagonal dimension of any sheet shall be ±7mm for
dimensions over 2000mm.

g) The maximum allowed deviation of the top and bottom edges (i.e. the curved edges) measured
on the face of the glass and perpendicularly to the curvature shall be ±3mm.
Z25.2120 Coatings and Tinting
Z25.2121 Glass Coatings Generally

a) Submit to the CA detailed proposals in respect of coatings.
b) Surface coatings: A highly uniform, low reflection and durable quality is required of any surface
modified glass. Such coatings shall be consistent in colour, durable and sufficiently hard on
exposed surfaces to avoid damage.
c) Visual quality testing of coated glass for dimensional requirements and visual defects shall be in
accordance with BS EN 1096: Part 1.
d) Ceramic frit coatings:
i) Tolerances for positioning and sizes of prints shall comply with optical quality determined
viewing from a distance of 3000mm using daylight without direct sunlight or direct
spotlight, perpendicularly to the glass, for no more than 20 seconds.
ii) Apply smoothly and consistently over the whole, or part, of each glazed area as indicated
on the Design Drawings. Use a screen printing application method unless otherwise
agreed.
iii) Fuse into the surface of the glass, thus providing a permanent layer (with the exception of
the exposed internal surface).
iv) The coatings shall have similar sheen, chromaticity and luminosity, to give non-discernible
colour difference when viewed by eye and illuminated by a standard light source, and shall
colour match. All ceramic fritting shall be opaque and to a colour to be agreed with the
CA.
v) Extent: Unless noted otherwise, the frit pattern shall extend to the glass edges. There shall
be no clear border.
e) Requirements for coatings/surface modified glass:
i) A highly uniform, low reflection and durable quality is required of any surface modified
glass. Such coatings shall be neutral in colour, durable and sufficiently hard on exposed
surfaces to avoid damage. For the purposes of the Specification, neutral shall be defined
as a colour having no unacceptable hue quantified by range of samples and being
capable of refracting light without chromatic aberration when viewed from any direction.
ii) Unless otherwise agreed, all low E coated glass shall be produced from a single source
on a single process.
iii) All glass coatings shall be provided from a single manufacturer/supplier unless agreed
otherwise by the CA.
f) Coatings/Treatments/Interlayers shall not crack, disintegrate or corrode in any way under the
extremes of conditions outlined in the Specification.
g) Advise the CA, prior to commencement of the glass coating, the name of the supplier and
applicator, together with the location of the premises where this work shall be carried out.
Z25.2122 High Performance Glass Coatings

a) Coated glass shall comply with BS EN 1096 as relevant.
b) Panes of glass with coatings shall be examined for defects in accordance with BS EN 1096:
Part 1, viewed from a distance of 3000mm from the outside face of the glazing, for both the
main area and the edge area of the glass panes.
c) Acceptance criteria of coated glass defects for uniformity, stain, spots/pinholes, clusters and
scratches shall be in accordance with BS EN 1096: Part 1.
d) Where soft coatings are used in double glazed units the glass shall be edge stripped on the
coating side to a width corresponding to the width of the spacer bar (complete with butyl strip)
such that when the panes are sealed together no discolouration to the coating by the butyl strip
occurs around the perimeter of the double glazed unit. The occurrence of a red or blue line
around the perimeter of the glass panes shall be deemed unacceptable.
e) Where soft coatings are applied to glass panes they shall be suitably protected up until time of

installation with the double glazed unit and all handling of glass shall be carried out using
protective cotton or surgical gloves so as not to damage the surface of the coating with
fingerprints. After protection is removed from the coated glass panes the panes must be
installed into the double glazed units and sealed within the recommended time by the coating
manufacturer, to avoid any atmospheric deformation of the surface.
f) Provide samples minimum 1200mm x 1200mm in size of any coated glass types for review by
the CA.
Z25.2123 Glass Body Tints

a) Provide evidence from the glass manufacturer that the correct body tinting has been
incorporated at the appropriate stage into the materials used by the glass manufacturer when
this has been specified on the Design Drawings.
b) Provide evidence that the correct surface modified tinting has been applied by the glass
manufacturer, where this has been specified on the Design Drawings.
Z25.2130 Unitised Systems
Z25.2131 Double Glazed Units

a) Unless otherwise specified, double glazed units shall be hermetically sealed units complying
with BS 5713 or BS EN 1279. Double glazed units shall utilise panes of unequal thickness,
unless otherwise specified. The outer panes shall be thicker to minimise the effects of pillowing.
b) Spacers shall be of adequate rigidity for their purpose, be continuous, with bent corners and
shall have welded joints sealed to ensure the integrity of the seal and to provide a consistent
moisture seal around the entire perimeter of the unit. They shall accommodate the seal and
contain desiccant, allowing both to operate at maximum efficiency.
c) Spacers shall separate glass panes and the units shall have a mechanically applied primary
polyisobutylene seal between glass and spacer. This shall provide a continuous vapour-proof
barrier to a minimum width of 2mm and a secondary two part silicone seal to the perimeter of
the units to carry wind loads.
d) Spacers shall be black where exposed. Silicone seals to edge to be black or grey to be
confirmed by the CA. Provide samples for acceptance by the CA.
e) Drainage of water along edge seals shall not be permitted.
f) All double glazed units shall be assembled in controlled temperature and humidity conditions.
Breather tubes shall be used, if necessary, during manufacture and transportation. These shall
be thereafter removed and the units sealed prior to manufacture.
g) With regard to mechanically restrained glazing systems, the manufacturer shall confirm the
maximum compression allowable on the edge of the units.
h) State the maximum concavity and convexity that will occur under the ambient climatic conditions
and barometer pressure differentials anticipated by the requirements of the Specification.
Ensure that the double glazed units are flat (with a maximum deviation of 1/1000 at the centre
of the glass pane when measured diagonally) when finally installed.
i) The bottom supported edges of laminated glass panes within vertical double glazed units shall
be ground flush over the width of the pane to provide even distribution of load to the setting
blocks.
j) Double glazed units shall carry a test certificate/report carried out by an independent authority,
showing compliance with BS EN 1279: Part 2.
Z25.2132 Visual Quality Testing

Visual quality testing of insulated glass units of float glass shall be carried out at a distance of
1000mm from the viewed surface of the glass at a viewing angle which corresponds to the normal
usage of the room and the following discrepancies, or better, shall be allowed per unit:
a) Rebate zone (width 18mm – no limit on discrepancies, with the exception of mechanical
damage to the edges):
i) External shallow damage to the edge or conchoidal fractures, which do not affect the
glass strength and which do not project beyond the width of the edge seal.
ii) Internal conchoidal fractures without loose shards, which are filled by the sealant.
iii) Unlimited spots or patches of residue, or scratches.

b) Edge zone - area around edge with width (w)/10 or height (h)/10 respectively:
i) Inclusions, bubbles, spots, stains, etc.:
• Pane area not less than or equal to 1m²: Maximum 4 cases, each not less than or
equal to 3mm diameter.
• Pane area greater than 1m²: Maximum 1 case, each not less than or equal to 3mm
diameter per metre of perimeter.
ii) Residues (spots) in the gas-filled cavity:
• Pane area greater than 1m²: Maximum 1 case, each not less than or equal to 3mm
diameter per metre of perimeter.
iii) Residues (patches) in the gas-filled cavity: Whitish grey or transparent – maximum 1 case
not less than or equal to 3cm².
iv) Scratches: Total of individual lengths; maximum 90mm. Individual length; maximum 30mm.
v) Hair-line cracks: Not allowed in higher concentration.
c) Main zone (remainder of unit inside the edge zone):
i) Inclusions, bubbles, spots, stains, etc.:
• Pane area greater than 1m² but not less than or equal to 2m²: Maximum 3 cases,
each not less than or equal to 2mm diameter.
• Pane area greater than 2m²: Maximum 5 cases, each not less than or equal to 2mm
diameter.
ii) Scratches: Total of individual lengths; maximum 45mm. Individual length; maximum 15mm.
iii) Hair-line cracks: Not allowed in higher concentration.
d) Main and edge zone combined:
i) Maximum number of allowable discrepancies as in edge zone.
ii) Inclusions, bubbles, spots, stains, etc. of dimensions 0.5 – 1.0mm are allowable without
any area-related limitation, except when they appear in higher concentration. “ Higher
concentration” means that at least 4 inclusions, bubbles, points, patches, etc. are located
within a circle with a diameter of not less than or equal to 20cm.
e) Visual inspection of the glass edges, edge seals and spacers shall be unhindered, prior to
glazing.
Z25.2140 Structural Sealant Glazing
Z25.2141 Type and Method

a) General:
i) Be responsible for the structural sealant glazing based upon the Design Drawings and the
ii) Be responsible for the final selection of materials, testing, fabrication, transportation and
installation of the structural silicone glazing, all in accordance with BS EN ISO 11600
and/or other standards specified and detailed in the Specification and submit samples for
review by the CA prior to manufacture.
iii) The structural sealant glazing shall be carried out in such a manner that will not
compromise the integrity of the double glazed units’ edge seals and the specified
warranties.
iv) Structural sealant glazing application shall only be carried out in an appropriate working
environment. The environment shall be strictly controlled in accordance with the
manufacturer’s written instructions to maintain temperature, humidity, dust and dirt free
conditions, etc. in the working environment.

v) Structural sealant glazing shall be suited to local conditions including blown sand. The
grade of sealant/silicone shall be suited to the local temperature and solar exposure and
at least capable of withstanding temperatures of at least 100 degrees.
b) Materials:
i) Provide structural sealant adhesive, which shall be obtained from a single source
manufacturer and applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s written
recommendations.
ii) For marine, or similar environments, the structural silicone shall be resistant to damage
from algae or attack by birds.
c) Installation/Fabrication:
i) Structural silicone glazing application shall not be carried out on Site unless agreed
otherwise with the CA.
ii) Provide documentation of the sealant manufacturer’s requirements for the particular
substrate of the construction including joint sizes, limitations and requirements for mixing,
cleaning, surface preparation, priming and application.
iii) Provide evidence that the sealant has been selected taking into account the sealant
manufacturer’s recommendations as to use and compatibility with the contact surfaces.
iv) Joint design shall be in accordance with the sealant manufacturer’s written
recommendations for glue-line and bite to glue-line ratio, taking into consideration the
design wind pressures and panel sizes.
v) Provide details of tensometer and any other testing equipment as required.
vi) Glazing procedures shall include frame assembly, cleaning, priming (if necessary),
gunning, tooling and frame handling after glazing and curing. Sealants shall not be applied
when the temperature is below 4°C and units shall not be moved until the silicone has
achieved a level of cure recommended by the silicone supplier.
vii) Adopt sealant batching logging procedures to record all batches used, including batch
manufacture date and arrival date of each batch at the fabrication works. The location of
each structural silicone glazed panel shall be individually located on As-built Drawings of
the building, recording date and batch of structural silicone, with details of tests carried
out to ensure that the highest quality of silicone is being used.
viii) The structural silicone glazing shall be recorded at the time of assembly and shall include
identification marks of every panel by a unique number, readable from the inside of the
building for the life of the building. Provide glazing records with information on each panel
including silicone type, batch, date of application, glazier’s name and temperature and
humidity measured inside the factory on the day of assembly.
ix) Recommend a periodical maintenance regime for agreement with the CA. This shall be
incorporated in the O&M manuals. Acceptance criteria shall be consistent with the
requirements of the testing criteria, which as a minimum shall be:
• A standard ‘peel test’ on any broken panels that require replacement.
• A close visual inspection, to be carried out externally from the cleaning apparatus,
including application of hand pressure to verify continued adhesion. This exercise
shall be carried out for 1% of the cladding, at a yearly frequency for the first 3 years,
then at a frequency of 5 years following. The panels shall be randomly selected
around the elevations at varying heights.
• The tests shall be carried out by the sealant supplier, or other qualified body.
Z25.2150 Rooflights/Horizontal and Inclined Glazing
Z25.2151 Type and Method

a) Horizontal glazing shall be designed to satisfy the requirements of ACR(M) 001, CWCT
Technical Note No. 42 in addition to the ‘Health and Safety in Roof Work’ guidance book
(G)33, Appendix 4, the HSE and CDM regulations and shall be manufactured only by a
company registered to BS EN ISO 9001 or carrying European Technical Approval (ETA).
b) Glazing for rooflights or horizontal and inclined situations shall be capable of accommodating
the following live loads without any reduction in its performance:

i) All defined loads resulting from specified movements of the main structural frame during
building use.
ii) Point loads imposed on the glass framing members of 695N inwardly acting based upon
BS 5516. Maintenance loads shall not be carried by the glass infill panels.
iii) Wind loads as defined by BS 6399: Part 2 and BS 5516.
iv) Loads imposed by snow as determined by BS 6399: Part 3 and BS 5516.
v) Minimum working pressures on infill panels for hand cleaning operations as defined in BS
5516.
vi) The impact load of two persons falling on it during maintenance, cleaning and inspection
operations in accordance with the requirements of the Specification. The glazing system
to maintain its structural integrity and the glass and edge covering to have adequate
thickness so that units do not ‘pop out’ of the frame under such impact. Should the outer
layer of glass break, then the inner sheet glass shall stay in place and support the
operatives.
vii) Large body impact tests by an accredited test organisation with certification produced to
demonstrate compliance to an energy level of 1200J, when tested to prEN 1873.
c) When calculating loads on the glazing and structure, the worst combination of the above shall
be considered, taking into account of the fact that the pressure coefficients at various locations
may determine more than one design criterion.
End of Section

Contents
Z30 METALWORK FINISHES ....................................................................................2
Z30.2000 MATERIALS/PRODUCTS AND APPLICATION ................................................ 2
Z30.2100 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................ 2

Z30.2101 Appearance......................................................................................................................................................................................2
Z30.2102 Surface Preparation of Steelwork ..............................................................................................................................................2
Z30.2200 FINISHES ............................................................................................................................ 2

Z30.2201 Liquid Organic Coating ................................................................................................................................................................2
Z30.2202 Plating of Surfaces.........................................................................................................................................................................2
Z30.2203 Vitreous Enamelling .......................................................................................................................................................................2
Z30.2204 Galvanising Generally ...................................................................................................................................................................2
Z30.2205 Galvanised Self Finish Surfaces.................................................................................................................................................2
Z30.2206 Galvanised Surfaces to be Over Painted.................................................................................................................................3

Z30 METALWORK FINISHES

Z30.2000 MATERIALS/PRODUCTS AND APPLICATION
Z30.2100 MATERIALS
Z30.2101 Appearance
a) All finishes shall be stable, fade resistant and not affected by ultraviolet light. Provide data and
samples for review by the CA.
b) All finishes shall be durable, of uniform texture and colour and be resilient to all known and/or
specified environmental and pollution effects. This shall include scratching and cigarette smoke
and burns, etc. Submit data and samples for review by the CA.
c) Minor scratches and blemishes shall be repaired using the coating manufacturer’s
recommended products and system, matching original finish for colour, texture and gloss.
Repair coatings shall be visually acceptable to the CA. Confirmation shall be provided that the
repair to the damaged finish complies in all respects to the requirements of the Specification.
Guarantee in writing that the damaged or defective coating is satisfactory for the proposed
remedial paint system. Employ an independent finishing consultant to carry out an inspection
and any necessary tests and supply a full report to the CA.
d) All finishes shall be within the limits of the agreed samples and without irregularities or
distortions. Fixings, stiffeners, etc. which are not intended to be visible shall be treated so that
there is no discontinuity in the finished surface appearance.
Z30.2102 Surface Preparation of Steelwork

Surface preparation shall remove all rust, scale and surface contamination to leave a surface
equivalent in cleanliness to Sa 2.5 quality of Swedish standard SIS 05-59-00. (BS EN ISO 8501:
Part 1). In general this shall be achieved by acid pickling, except where the presence of paint, oil,
grease, welding slag, etc. renders this ineffective, and in all weld areas, the steel shall be locally blast-
cleaned to Sa 2.5 quality of Swedish standard SIS 05-59-00. (BS EN ISO 8501: Part 1).
Z30.2200 FINISHES
Z30.2201 Liquid Organic Coating
For aluminium alloy components to BS 4842.
Z30.2202 Plating of Surfaces
a) Cadmium/zinc plating of iron and steel surfaces shall comply with BS EN 12329 and BS EN
12330.
b) Chromium plating shall comply with BS EN 12540.
Z30.2203 Vitreous Enamelling

Vitreous enamelling of steel surfaces shall comply with BS 3830.
Z30.2204 Galvanising Generally

a) To BS EN ISO 1461.
b) Coating thicknesses shall comply with BS EN ISO 1461 and BS EN ISO 14713 to suit the
c) Where galvanising is visible, the final finish shall be smooth, continuous, consistent and free
from flux staining and other forms of staining. Coating weight shall be as consistent maintaining
a uniform appearance throughout the service life of the Works.
Z30.2205 Galvanised Self Finish Surfaces

a) Blast Clean: Blast clean to BS EN ISO 8504: Parts 1 and 2 and BS EN ISO 8503, Sa 2.5
where applied thickness of coating is greater than 86 microns.
b) Preparation: Edge grind, remove all grease, oil and varnish and any other surface contaminants,
ensure that any oil or silicon based anti-weld spatter is removed, remove weld spatter, grind

welds as required and fill pits and other surface imperfections that may cause the premature
failure of the coating system.
c) Galvanising: The steelwork shall be supplied to the galvaniser in a suitable condition to be acid
pickled in dilute hydrochloric acid, passivated and then hot dip galvanised in accordance with
the provisions of BS EN ISO 1461.
d) Uniformity: The galvanising shall be carried out in such a way as to maximise the smoothness
and uniformity of the deposited coating. Only use double dipping where no alternative exists.
e) Touching-up is not allowed unless agreement is given by the CA. In which case it shall be in
accordance with Annex C of BS EN ISO 1461.
i) Where acceptance is given, use the Zilt-Stick system in accordance with the
manufacturer’s current recommendations. Zilt-Stick is a self-fluxing and galvanising
system, which is applied by hand. The stick is made up of a galvanising compound, which
has a “foil” wrapping, and is rubbed over the affected area until completely covered. The
black flux residue can be removed using a damp cloth.
ii) The maximum size of an area of touch-up is to be determined by locating the point on the
damaged surface that is furthest from an intact galvanised coating. If the distance from
this point to the galvanising is in excess of 10mm, then the member shall be re-galvanised
or rejected.
iii) Galvafroid or paint applied finishes are not permitted under any circumstances.
f) Refer to the recommendations of the Zinc Development Association for galvanising and zinc
metal-spraying.
g) Immersion process: This shall be discussed and agreed with the CA and submitted for formal
comment. This is to ensure that during the galvanising process drips are not allowed to run off
fair-faced surfaces and thus disfigure them. Fair-faced surfaces are all those surfaces that will
be visible in the completed Works. Agree location of all fair-faced surfaces with the CA before
application.
h) Breathing Holes: Locate in unobtrusive places. Agree the location of these holes with the CA
and mark clearly on the Shop Drawings.
i) Distortion: Ensure that no distortion of fabricated elements occurs during galvanising. Advise
the CA on the possibility for distortion of the steelwork elements during the galvanising process
to enable design modifications of components to be made before fabrication of these
components.
Z30.2206 Galvanised Surfaces to be Over Painted

a) Galvanised steelwork to be painted.
i) Preparation: As recommended by the manufacturer of the applied coating system.
To BS EN ISO 1461 and BS EN ISO 12944: Parts 1 to 8.
End of Section

Contents
Z31 POWDER COATINGS.........................................................................................2
Z31.2100 BRITISH STANDARD COMPLIANT TYPE POWDER COATINGS............................ 2

Z31.2101 General .............................................................................................................................................................................................2
Z31.2102 Materials............................................................................................................................................................................................2
Z31.2103 Workmanship ..................................................................................................................................................................................2
Z31.2104 Testing...............................................................................................................................................................................................3

Z31 POWDER COATINGS

Z31.2100 BRITISH STANDARD COMPLIANT TYPE POWDER COATINGS

Z31.2101 General
a) Powder coating shall be applied using only materials suitable for the purpose intended.
Aluminium alloys shall be selected to ensure that the finished visual appearance of all
components is consistent and identical. The alloy for extrusions shall be grade 6063 or 6060
or acceptable equivalent complying with BS EN 754: Parts 3-5 and BS EN 755: Parts 1-9, and
for sheet material grade 1200/3103 complying with BS EN 485: Parts 1-4, BS EN 515 and BS
EN 573: Parts 1-4. Aluminium shall be in a condition suitable for the application of the coating
process. The sheet shall be of a suitable and agreed thickness and of suitable temper to
withstand the stoving process.
b) The application shall comply with all the relevant parts of the COSHH Regulations 1988, the
Environmental Protection Act 1990 Part 1, the Management of Health and Safety at Work
Regulations 1992 and the Construction (Design and Management) Regulations 1994.
Z31.2102 Materials
a) Colour: The colour shall be selected by the CA from the BS/RAL ranges.
b) Colour Consistency: Colour consistency shall be assured from batch to batch for the Works, in
accordance with the conditions described in BS 950: Part 1.
c) Colour Uniformity: Limits for acceptable colour variations in production shall be established and
accepted by the CA from samples provided by the Contractor prior to production. When
metallic colours are used, top and bottom limits of colour variation and appearance shall be
established and agreed prior to coating commencement. All colour samples shall be submitted
and accepted by the CA before coating commences.
d) The minimum and maximum local dry film thickness on adjacent panels shall not vary by more
than 20%. If this is not achievable, submit samples to the CA for review showing the maximum
variation in coating thickness.
e) The powder coating shall be consistent throughout in all respects within the upper and lower
levels agreed which shall be based on samples provided and agreed with the CA.
f) Protective Tapes/Films: Adhesive/protective tapes/films shall be low tack type applied at room
temperature, remaining in contact with the surface for a maximum period of 6 months. Should
longer periods be required, then the tape/film shall be removed and replaced. Where
adhesive/protective tapes/films are used, then the colour shall be white or lighter in tone than
the powder coating.
Z31.2103 Workmanship
a) The selected coating shall carry a current British Board of Agrément Approval Certificate or
acceptable equivalent. A copy, signed by the Managing Director of the coating applicator
company, shall be made available to the CA, prior to commencement of coating.
b) Applicator Requirements: The powder coating application and stoving shall be carried out in
accordance with BS 6496 and/or BS 6497. Only one coating plant shall be used for the
Works along with one batch of powder, unless otherwise accepted by the CA.
c) Guarantees: Make available to the CA, fully documented and signed copies of the coating
guarantees. The duration of the guarantees shall be 25 years or as otherwise agreed with the
CA.
d) Cleaning Frequency: The normal cleaning frequency associated with the guarantees detailed
above shall be 12 months unless agreed otherwise by the CA.
e) Repair of Damage: Damage shall be repaired immediately. Site rectification of damage shall
generally not be acceptable and only be carried out with the CA’s agreement carrying a
guarantee for colour retention, gloss retention and adhesion for the remaining period of the
guarantee.

f) In addition to the requirements of BS 6496 the pretreatment shall use a chromate process.
Z31.2104 Testing
Demonstrate compliance with the following test requirements:
a) Artificial Weathering: There shall be no chalking in excess of the minimum illustrated in the
photographic reference standards of ASTM D 4214 when tested in accordance with BS 6496,
Clause 4.10 (a) or BS 6497, Clause 4.8 (a). In addition, the coating shall show no cracking,
checking or flaking and any change in colour shall not exceed one step in hue, value or chroma
in the Munsell atlas from the original colour.
b) Natural Weathering: There shall be no chalking in excess of the minimum illustrated in the
photographic reference standards of ASTM D 4214 when tested for three years in accordance
with BS 6496, Clause 4.10 (a) or BS 6497, Clause 4.8 (b). In addition, the coating shall show
no checking, cracking or flaking and any change in colour shall not exceed one step in hue,
value or chroma in the Munsell atlas from the original colour.
c) Exterior Exposure: When viewed from a distance of 1m, there shall be no blisters, dirt,
entrapped particles, craters, pinholes, porosity, scratches or other visual defects on significant
surfaces when measured in accordance with BS 6496, Clause 10.2.
d) Impact Resistance: There shall be no sign of cracking or detachment of film, when measured in
accordance with BS 6496, Clause 4.7.
e) Cupping Test: There shall be no sign of detachment when measured in accordance with BS
6496, Clause 4.5.
f) Scratch Test: There shall be no penetration to the substrate when tested in accordance with
BS 6496, Clause 4.6.
g) Adhesion: The coating shall have a classification of Class 0 and there shall be no removal of the
coating when tested in accordance with BS 6496, Clause 4.4.
h) Flexibility: There shall be no cracking, flaking or film deformation above 6mm when tested in
accordance with BS EN ISO 6860.
i) Salt Spray Resistance: No blistering, softening or detachment of the coating shall occur when
tested for 1000 hours on aluminium to BS 6496, Clause 4.9 or for 500 hours on galvanised
steel to BS 6497, Clause 4.7.
j) Humidity Resistance: No blistering, softening or detachment of the film shall occur when tested
in accordance with BS 6496, Clause 4.11.
k) Permeability: The coating, when tested in accordance with BS 6496, Clause 4.13, shall show
no blistering of the coating, except within 3mm of any edge.
l) Mortar Resistance: There shall be no blistering, softening or detachment of the coating, etc.
when tested in accordance with BS 6496, Clause 4.8.
m) Film Thickness: The minimum film thickness at any point shall be 40 microns for aluminium and
60 microns for galvanised steel. (Note 1: - Where hazardous environments are involved, the
minimum shall be increased to 60 microns and 80 microns respectively.) (Note 2: - Some
colours also require the minimum film thickness to be increased to 60 microns to develop the
correct intensity of colour.) No seeding or double coating of work shall be accepted.
n) Gloss Levels: The gloss level, when measured using a 60 degree Gardiner head, shall read: -
25% ±5% for matts, 70% ±5% for satins and 85% ±5% for gloss.
o) Spread of Flame: The Powder Coating, when tested to BS 476: Part 7, shall have a Class 1
rating.
p) Building Regulations: The Powder Coating shall have a Class 0 rating as defined under the
Building Regulations.
q) Product tests shall meet all the requirements of the Specification.
r) Test pieces shall consist of finished panels or extrusions representative of product-coated
aluminium. Test pieces shall be at least 150mm long and 75mm wide with a flat
coated/significant surface, as defined in BS EN ISO 2064, on which to conduct instrumental
measurements. The Shop Drawings shall indicate exposed/significant surfaces.
s) Tests shall be performed on exposed/significant surfaces as defined in BS EN ISO 2064 as
indicated, and shall meet the requirements of BS 6496 or BS 6497.

t) Test reports shall be produced at the time of coating and made available to the CA. These
reports shall include:
i) Date when tests were performed and date of issue of report.
ii) Identification of the coating system tested, including product supplier, colour reference,
product code and batch reference.
iii) Statement indicating that the coating system tested passed all tests, or failed one or
more.
iv) In the case of failure, which test(s) and description of failure(s).
v) Statement that all tests were conducted in accordance with the Specification.
vi) Name and address of the laboratory which conducted the tests and issued the reports.
vii) The CA shall commission an independent testing authority, with the Contractor being
responsible for all costs incurred. To gain acceptance of the finished products for use,
carry out a minimum of three independent acceptance inspections, sampling procedures
and plans as set out in BS 6001: Part 1 for general inspection level 2. AQL (Acceptable
Quality Level) = 1% on each colour and finish used in the Works. These inspections shall
be carried out at the finishing plant prior to fabrication by an independent, consultant or
acceptance laboratory.
viii) In addition, the Contractor shall make allowance for Site inspections where, due to
damage or non-supply of the production test reports, the CA may require independent
investigation of all finishes on Site-fixed units. This investigation shall be carried out within
the guidelines of BS 6001: Part 2, LQ (Limited Quality) (Pa = 10%) + 5%. For the
purpose of this inspection, each section in the window curtain wall or other fabrication
shall be taken as an individual component in assessing the overall batch number to allow
the acceptance inspection laboratory to certify that the Works comply with the
Specification. For units that are finished in fewer than three production runs, acceptance
inspections shall also be made using BS 6001: Part 2 to the same LQ.
ix) Certificates of Practical Completion or any other document of authority accepting
responsibility may not be signed by the CA until he has received these reports.
End of Section

Contents
Z32 PVDF COATINGS.................................................................................................2
Z32.2100 POLYVINYLIDENE FLUORIDE (PVDF) COATINGS .................................................... 2

Z32.2101 General .............................................................................................................................................................................................2
Z32.2102 Materials............................................................................................................................................................................................2
Z32.2103 Application Workmanship ............................................................................................................................................................2
Z32.2104 Testing...............................................................................................................................................................................................3
Z32.2105 Product Tests ..................................................................................................................................................................................3

Z32 PVDF COATINGS

Z32.2100 POLYVINYLIDENE FLUORIDE (PVDF) COATINGS

The selected PVDF coating system is required to achieve a high quality durable finish in accordance
with the requirements identified herein. The formulation mix shall be not less than 70% polyvinylidene
fluoropolymer resin with the remaining percentage made up of acrylics.
Z32.2101 General
a) PVDF coating shall be carried out using materials suitable for the intended purpose. Aluminium
alloys shall be selected to ensure that the finished visual appearance of all components is
constant and identical. The alloy for extrusions shall be grade 6063, 6060 or acceptable
equivalent, complying with BS EN 515, BS EN 573: Parts 3 and 4, and BS EN 755: Parts 1-9
and for sheet material grade 1200/3103, complying with BS EN 485: Parts 1-4, BS EN 515
and BS EN 573: Parts 1-4. All aluminium shall be in a condition suitable for the application of
the coating process. The sheet shall be of a suitable and agreed thickness and of suitable
temper to withstand the stoving process.
b) In conjunction with the CA, ensure that the application complies with all the relevant parts of the
COSHH Regulations 1988, the Environmental Protection Act 1990 Part 1, the Management of
Health and Safety at Work Regulations 1992 and the Construction (Design and Management)
Regulations 1994.
Z32.2102 Materials
a) Colour: The colour shall be selected by the CA from the BS/RAL ranges.
b) Colour Consistency: Colour consistency shall be maintained between batches, in accordance
with BS 950: Part 1.
c) Colour Uniformity: Limits for acceptable colour variations in production shall be established and
agreed by the CA from samples provided, prior to production. When metallic colours are to be
used, the top and bottom limits of colour variation and appearance shall be accepted by the CA
prior to coating commencement. The grain on PVDF coated materials shall be identified in order
to ensure that they are fixed in the same direction in their finished position.
d) The PVDF coating minimum and maximum local dry film thickness on adjacent panels shall not
vary by more than 20%. Submitted samples shall confirm compliance.
e) The PVDF coating finish shall be identical in all respects subject to the criterion specified, on all
components similarly finished, and hung in the same direction.
f) Protective Tapes/Films: When adhesive/protective tapes/films are proposed to protect finished
products, tapes/films of a low tack nature shall be used. They shall be applied at room
temperature, after the coating is fully stoved, and remain in contact with the surface for a
maximum period of six months. Should longer periods be required, then the tape/film shall be
removed and replaced. Care shall be taken when removing adhesive/protective tapes/films. No
sharp instruments or abrasive materials shall be used to remove the tape/film. No solvents or
cleaning solutions shall be used to remove residues, without the prior permission of the CA.
Where adhesive/protective tapes/films are used, then the colour shall be white or lighter in tone
than the finish it is protecting.
Z32.2103 Application Workmanship

a) Applicator Requirements: The PVDF coating application and stoving shall be carried out in
accordance with AAMA 2605. The applicator shall agree to work to this standard and be
accepted by the coating supplier. Only one coating plant shall be used along with only one
batch of paint, unless otherwise accepted by the CA.
b) Guarantees: Make available to the CA, fully documented and signed copies of the coating
guarantees. The duration of these guarantees shall be 25 years or as otherwise advised at the
time of Tender, appropriate to the environmental conditions prevailing on Site.
c) Cleaning Frequency: The normal cleaning frequency associated with the guarantees shall be
not less than 12 months, unless advised otherwise at the time of Tender.

d) Repair of Damage: If during installation, or later, damage occurs, this shall be rectified
immediately and not left to the end of the installation. Site rectification of damage shall only be
carried out with the CA’s acceptance and shall carry a guarantee for colour retention, gloss
retention and adhesion for the remaining period of the original guarantee.
Z32.2104 Testing
a) Carry out the following tests or provide data demonstrating that the following tests have been
carried out. All PVDF coatings applied to aluminium shall comply with the requirements of
AAMA 2605 including:
i) Gloss Retention: The residual gloss shall be at least 50%, after 10 years' exposure in
Florida, in accordance with AAMA 2605, Clause 7.9.1.4.
ii) Colour Retention: A maximum colour change of Delta E5, after 10 years' exposure in
Florida, in accordance with AAMA 2605, Clause 7.9.1.2.
iii) Exterior Exposure: When viewed from a distance of 3m, no visible blisters, scratches, flow
lines, streaks or other visual defects shall be allowed, in accordance with AAMA 2605,
Clause 4.2.
iv) Impact Resistance: There shall be no removal of film, when measured in accordance with
AAMA 2605, Clause 7.5.
v) Abrasion Test: The coating shall demonstrate a minimum value of 40 for the abrasion
coefficient, when tested in accordance with AAMA 2605, Clause 7.6.2.
vi) Adhesion: There shall be no removal of film or blistering, when measured in accordance
with AAMA 2605, Clause 7.4.
vii) Dry Film Hardness: A minimum pencil hardness of grade F (Berol Eagle Turquoise Pencil)
shall be obtained when the coating is tested in accordance with AAMA 2605, Clause 7.3.
viii) Salt Spray Resistance: The coating shall pass the requirements of AAMA 2605, Clause
7.8.2 after an exposure period of 4000 hours.
ix) Humidity Resistance: The coating shall pass the requirements of AAMA 2605, Clause
7.8.1 after an exposure period of 4,000 hours.
x) Mortar Resistance: Easy removal of mortar shall be obtained after 24 hours when tested
in accordance with AAMA 2605, Clause 7.7.2. In addition, there shall be no loss of film
adhesion or visual change in appearance.
xi) Muriatic Acid Resistance: The coating shall show no signs of attack when tested in
accordance with AAMA 2605, Clause 7.7.1.
xii) Film Thickness: The minimum dry film thickness shall be 30 microns for solid colours and
40 microns for metallic colours, when measured in accordance with AAMA 2605, Clause
4.3. The minimum local dry film thickness shall be increased to be consistent with colour
selection and type of coating as recommended by the coating manufacturer. Additionally,
the local dry film thickness shall be increased consistent with durability requirements and
environmental conditions, as recommended by the coating manufacturer.
xiii) Gloss Levels: The gloss level, when measured using a 60 degree Gardiner head shall
read 19% or less for ‘low gloss’, 20-79% for ‘medium gloss’ and 80% and over for ‘high
gloss’, in accordance with AAMA 2605, Clause 7.2.
xiv) Spread of Flame: The PVDF coating, when tested to BS 476: Part 7 shall have a Class 1
rating.
xv) Building Regulations: The PVDF coating shall have a Class 0 rating as defined under the
Building Regulations.
Z32.2105 Product Tests

a) Product tests shall meet all the requirements of the Specification.
b) Test pieces shall consist of finished panels or extrusions representative of product-coated
aluminium. Test pieces shall be at least 150mm long and 75mm wide with a flat
coated/significant surface (as defined in BS EN ISO 2064) on which to conduct instrumental
measurements. The CA shall indicate exposed/significant surfaces.
c) Tests shall be performed on exposed/significant surfaces as defined in BS EN ISO 2064 and
shall meet the requirements of AAMA 2605.

d) Test reports shall be produced at the time of coating and made available to the CA. These
reports shall include:
i) Date when tests were performed and date of issue of report.
ii) Identification of the PVDF coating/system tested, including product supplier, colour
reference, product code and batch reference.
iii) Statement indicating that the PVDF coating/system tested passed all tests, or failed one
or more.
iv) In the case of failure, which test(s) and description of failure(s).
v) Statement that all tests were conducted in accordance with the Specification.
vi) Name and address of the laboratory which conducted the tests and issued the reports.
vii) The CA shall commission an independent inspecting authority with the Contractor
responsible for all costs incurred. To gain acceptance of the finished products for use,
carry out a minimum of three independent acceptance inspections, sampling procedures
and plans as set out in BS 6001: Part 1 for general inspection level 2. AQL (Acceptable
Quality Level) = 1% on each colour and finish used in the Works. These inspections shall
be carried out at the finishing plant prior to fabrication by an independent consultant or
acceptance laboratory.
viii) Carry out a Site inspection since, due to damage or non-supply of the production test
reports, the CA shall commission an independent investigation of all finishes on Site-fixed
units. This investigation shall be carried out within the guidelines of BS 6001: Part 2, LQ
(Limited Quality) (Pa = 10%) = 5%. For the purpose of this inspection each section in the
window curtain wall or other fabrication shall be taken as an individual component in
assessing the overall batch number to allow the acceptance inspection laboratory to
certify that the Works comply with the Specification. For units that are finished in fewer
than three production runs, acceptance inspections shall also be made using BS 6001:
Part 2 to the same LQ. The acceptance inspection laboratory shall be accepted by the
CA and instructed by the commissioning authority to submit all reports simultaneously to
the Contractor and the CA. These reports shall cover factory production materials and
Site-fixed units.
ix) Certificates of Practical Completion or any other document of authority accepting
responsibility may not be signed by the CA until he has received these reports.
End of Section

Contents
Z33 ANODISING ..........................................................................................................2
Z33.2000 PRODUCTS AND APPLICATION ....................................................................... 2
Z33.2100 ALUMINIUM ANODISING ................................................................................................ 2

Z33.2101 Materials............................................................................................................................................................................................2
Z33.2102 Workmanship ..................................................................................................................................................................................2
Z33.2103 Testing...............................................................................................................................................................................................3

Z33 ANODISING
Z33.2000 PRODUCTS AND APPLICATION
Z33.2100 ALUMINIUM ANODISING

Z33.2101 Materials
a) Aluminium anodising shall comply with BS 3987, unless specified otherwise. Provide a
certificate of assurance that each batch of anodising has been properly carried out.
b) The colour anodising process shall be agreed with the CA. Colouring of the anodic film shall be
achieved by use of a two-stage electrolytic process utilising cobalt or nickel as the colouring
metal or by use of a single stage integral process. On no account shall anodic films coloured by
the use of tin electrolytes be used. Any proposal by the Contractor for the use of an alternative
colouring technique can only be considered if the anodiser confirms in writing that the
alternative process will meet all of the visual, physical and documentary requirements detailed
within the Specification. Satisfactory independent evidence and samples will be required to
prove that an alternative colouring process will provide an equal or superior standard of
performance and life expectancy.
c) Colour control limits shall be submitted as samples with the Tender for review and comment by
the CA. The anodic finish shall be within these limits agreed and held by the CA.
d) All aluminium alloys shall be selected to ensure that the finished visual appearance of all
components is identical. The alloy for extrusions shall be grade 6063, or acceptable equivalent,
and for sheet material grade J57S, or acceptable equivalent, and a certificate shall be obtained
from the material supplier stating the grade of material supplied.
e) Base metal batching shall be controlled in order that areas match. Critical visible areas shall be
from a single batch. Agree base metal batching with the CA in advance of production.
Z33.2102 Workmanship
a) Anodic oxidation coating shall be carried out at a single place of manufacture. All critical visible
areas shall be anodised in a single batch.
b) Anodising shall commence after fabrication/machining is complete wherever possible.
c) Any fabrication of pre-finished lengths shall be previously agreed with the CA. Uncoated edges
shall not be visible in assemblies or exposed to the atmosphere. Fabricated pieces shall meet
the thickness requirements of BS 3987.
d) The processes adopted shall be compatible, offering weather resistance, abrasion resistance,
impact resistance and protection against chemical attacks as follows:
i) Corrosion resistance shall be equal to or greater than that of an anodised aluminium finish
thickness of minimum average 25 microns and sealing in accordance with BS 3987 and
the Specification.
ii) For production control the abrasion resistance of the anodising shall be determined in
accordance with BS 6161: Part 18. Films, which when tested by this method continue to
be scratched by glass coated abrasive paper do not conform to the Specification. In the
event of a dispute, the referee test described in BS EN 12373: Part 9 shall be carried out
on test pieces cut from eight components whose results from the abrasive paper test
indicate that they have suspect low abrasion resistance. The wear index obtained from the
referee test shall be no greater than 1.4, for acceptance.
iii) For production control the sealing value of the anodising shall be determined in
accordance with BS EN 12373: Part 5. In the event of a dispute, the referee test
described in BS EN 12373: Part 7 shall be carried out. The maximum weight loss from
the referee test shall be no greater than 30mg/dm², for acceptance. Impregnated cold
sealing processes shall not be used.
iv) For production control the film thickness of the anodising shall be determined in
accordance with BS EN ISO 2360. In the event of a dispute the referee test described in
BS EN ISO 1463 shall be carried out. The minimum local film thickness shall be 20
microns with a maximum of 35 microns.

v) Anodic oxidation coating shall be carried out by the sulphuric acid bath process. The
temperatures of the anodising bath and chemical content shall be set and maintained to
achieve good quality control of the finished product in accordance with BS 3987.
vi) Notwithstanding BS 3987 visible surfaces shall be free from coating or metallurgical
defects when viewed from 1 metre.
e) The temperatures of the anodising bath and chemical content shall be set and maintained to
achieve good quality control of the finished product in accordance with BS 3987.
f) A quality control system for cleaning extrusion dies shall be adopted such that no lines appear
on the face of the extrusions. As a minimum check every 5th extrusion.
g) Rejected anodised extrusions shall only be reprocessed once.
h) Anodised finishes shall be within the control limits (established from range samples) or
standards accepted by the CA.
i) The finish shall be agreed with the CA from the range samples provided.
j) The finish shall be sealed in accordance with BS 3987.
k) Finishes shall be tested to BS EN 12373: Part 8.
l) Variation of final surface finish shall be limited to tolerances agreed with the CA prior to
commencement. If such variations do occur then such components that, in the opinion of the
CA, fail to achieve a uniform final surface finish shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own
expense.
m) Lines produced at the location of die connection points shall only occur on non-visible surfaces
in the installed Works. The contact marks on sections resulting from electrical connection shall
not be on visible surfaces of the installed Works.
n) Cleaning Frequency: The normal cleaning frequency associated with the guarantees shall be
not less than 18 months, unless advised otherwise at the time of Tender.
o) Repair of damage: Surface areas likely to be damaged during handling, fixing or by other
building trades shall be fully protected until completion of all other work in the area of the
installation. If during fixing or glazing any damage does occur, this shall be rectified immediately
and not left until the end of the installation. Site rectification of damage shall only be carried out
with the CA’s acceptance and shall carry a 25 year guarantee for colour retention, avoidance of
discolouration and corrosion resistance.
Z33.2103 Testing
a) The CA shall commission an independent testing authority with the Contractor responsible for
all costs incurred. To gain acceptance of the finished products for use, carry out a minimum of
three independent acceptance inspections, sampling procedures and plans, as set out in BS
6001: Part 1, for general inspection level 2. AQL (Acceptable Quality Level) = 1% on each
colour and finish used in the Works. These inspections shall be carried out at the finishing plant
prior to fabrication by a competent independent inspector from one of the approved
laboratories listed in the AASC technical information sheet No. 8.
b) Where there is damage or the production test reports have not been provided, the CA shall
commission an independent investigation of all finishes on Site-fixed units with the Contractor
being responsible for all costs in connection with such Site inspections. This investigation shall
be carried out within the guidelines of BS 6001: Part 2, LQ (Limited Quality) (Pa = 10%) =
5%. For the purpose of this inspection each section in the window curtain wall or other
fabrication shall be taken as an individual component in assessing the overall batch number to
allow the consultant to certify that the completed Contract complies with the Specification. For
units that are finished in fewer than three production runs, acceptance inspections shall also be
made using BS 6001: Part 2 to the same LQ.
c) Certificates of Practical Completion or any other document of authority accepting responsibility
may not be signed by the CA until he has received these reports.
End of Section

Contents
Z36 GASKETS ..............................................................................................................2
Z36.2100 MATERIALS TYPE AND USE........................................................................................... 2

Z36.2101 Materials............................................................................................................................................................................................2

Z36 GASKETS
Z36.2100 MATERIALS TYPE AND USE

Z36.2101 Materials
a) The gaskets shall accommodate the maximum movements applicable.
b) All gaskets shall be of a type suited to the local climate, shall not melt in high temperatures and
shall be suited to all locations and conditions of use.
c) All gasket to gasket joints shall be butt jointed and heat sealed. The bonding of gaskets using
other materials shall not be acceptable. The gaskets shall perform and appear as a single
continuous material.
d) The gasket system shall comprise both extruded and moulded elements. These shall perform
and appear as a single element.
e) All gaskets shall be fabricated to the most appropriate grade and hardness. Design and select
all gaskets in order to:
i) Comply with the stipulations of BS 4255.
ii) Be most appropriate to the extrusion design.
iii) Ensure that glass retention and weatherproofing requirements are maintained by dry solid
materials and/or structural silicone.
iv) Ensure that they do not permanently distort over the working life of the Works.
f) Gaskets shall be free from contact with materials that have stain characteristics and be
compatible with all substrate, sealants and all other materials used in the Works.
g) Provide written confirmation from the gasket manufacturer that the gasket material and designs
are wholly suitable for their specific use in any part of the Works and are compatible with all
other materials and sealants used within the installation and at interfaces with other
materials/components.
h) The colour of all gaskets shall be black unless specified otherwise.
i) Gaskets shall not shrink nor warp and shall not deteriorate between the periods stated in the
Contractor’s stated times for replacement.
j) Gasket corners in frames shall be preformed and factory vulcanised in ladders.
k) The choice of seals and gaskets shall not result in any reduction in sound insulation
performance.
l) Gaskets and seals used to achieve the required airtightness shall be selected to accommodate
fully the range of dimensional tolerances and movements associated with the design, fabrication
and installation of the Works. They shall be formed from materials capable of maintaining their
elastic qualities and dimensions and shall be resistant to physical and chemical attack, sufficient
to maintain the full acoustic performance of the Works.
m) Be responsible for ensuring that the glazing framework is effectively sealed to the building
structure to such an extent that the acoustic performance of the installation is equivalent to that
measured under the test conditions detailed in the Specification.
End of Section


As T2t3ewrs

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

As T2t3ewrs

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

As T2t3ewrs

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Central Market

ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATION _ T2-T3 External

Tel: 020 7738 0455

A.1000 FORMAT, DEFINITIONS AND USE OF THE SPECIFICATION................................ 4

A.2000 DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT............................................................................... 6

A.3000 DETAILS OF CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES................................................ 6

A.4000 SUBMITTALS .................................................................................................................10

A.5000 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS AND DATA.......................................................14

Architectural Specification – T2-T3 External A/2 Foster + Partners

A.6000 QUALITY CONTROL.....................................................................................................19

Architectural Specification – T2-T3 External A/3 Foster + Partners

A.1001 Specification Format

A.1002 Work Section Categories

A.1003 Supplemental Information

Architectural Specification – T2-T3 External A/4 Foster + Partners

Architectural Specification – T2-T3 External A/5 Foster + Partners

A.1005 Copyright, Patent Rights, etc

A.2000 DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT

A.3000 DETAILS OF CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES

A.3101 General Requirements

A.3102 Contractor Responsibility

Architectural Specification – T2-T3 External A/6 Foster + Partners

A.3103 Contractor’s Proposals

Architectural Specification – T2-T3 External A/7 Foster + Partners

A.3104 The Detailed Design

A.3105 Supply of Additional Supplemental Information

Architectural Specification – T2-T3 External A/8 Foster + Partners

A.3106 Material Preferences

A.3107 Detailed Design, Manufacturing and Installation Tolerances

A.3108 Substitution at the Time of Tender

Architectural Specification – T2-T3 External A/9 Foster + Partners

A.4002 Tender Submittals

A.4003 Post Contract Submittals

Architectural Specification – T2-T3 External A/10 Foster + Partners

A.4004 Samples Generally

A.4005 Pre-contract Samples

A.4006 Post Contract Samples

A.4009 Quality Benchmarks

Architectural Specification – T2-T3 External A/11 Foster + Partners

A.4010 Shop Drawings

Architectural Specification – T2-T3 External A/12 Foster + Partners

A.4011 As-built Drawings and Manuals

A.4012 Other Submittals

Architectural Specification – T2-T3 External A/13 Foster + Partners

A.4013 Review of Submittals

A.5000 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS AND DATA

A.5101 Performance Requirements

A.5200 Design and Service Life

A.5201 Design Life of Building

A.5202 Service Life of Components

Architectural Specification – T2-T3 External A/14 Foster + Partners

A.5301 Movements and Tolerances

A.5302 Dead Loads

A.5303 Live Loads

Architectural Specification – T2-T3 External A/15 Foster + Partners

A.5306 Preceding Work

A.5308 Acoustic Requirement Values of Curtain Walling

Architectural Specification – T2-T3 External A/16 Foster + Partners

Building And Sound Reduction Index (dB)